Preface Table of Contents Introduction

SIPROTEC Distributed Busbar/ Breaker Failure Protection 7SS522 V4.6 7SS523 V3.2 7SS525 V3.2
Manual

Design and Connection System Getting Started Configuration Functions Control During Operation Installation and Commissioning Maintenance and Repair Technical Data Appendix References Index

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

C53000-G1176-C182-1

Exclusion of Liability We have checked the contents of this publication and every effort has been made to ensure that the descriptions of both hardware and software are as accurate as possible. However, deviations from the description cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions contained in the information given. The data in this manual are checked regularly and the necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. We are grateful for any improvements that you care to suggest. Subject to technical modifications. Document Release 4.60.02

Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2005 All Rights Reserved Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration. Registered Trademarks DIGSI is a registered trademark of SIEMENS AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1176-C182-1

Preface
Aim of this Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the complete SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection system. In particular, you will find: Information on configuration of the system Chapter 4, page 45 Description of the system functions and their setting options Chapter 5, page 91 Information on control during operation Chapter 6, page 203 Information on installation and commissioning Chapter 7, page 245 Overview of technical data Chapter 9, page 301 and a compilation of the most important information for the experienced user Chapter A.1, page 328 The SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ deals in a general way with the management, configuration, parameterization, operation, installation and commissioning of a SIPROTEC 4 system. Target audience Protection engineers, commissioners, persons who are involved in setting, testing and maintenance of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation personnel in electrical plants and power stations. This manual is valid for the complete SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection system, firmware version 4.6. The system comprises the central unit 7SS522 V4.6 and the bay units 7SS523 V3.2 and 7SS525 V3.2. The complete system will be referred to in the manual as 7SS52 V4. Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 73/23 EEC). This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC directive) and with the standard EN 60255-6 (for Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens AG. The device is designed and manufactured for application in industrial environment. The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.

Scope of validity of this manual

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

iii

Preface

Additional support

For any questions concerning your SIPROTEC system, please contact your Siemens representative. Individual course offers may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions can be directed to our training center in Nuremberg. The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them! The following terms and definitions are used:

Training courses

Instructions and Warnings

DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. This is especially valid for damage on or in the device itself and consequential damage thereof. Note indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual which is essential to highlight.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage.

iv

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Preface

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, he or she has the following qualifications: Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in rendering first aid. Typographic and symbol conventions The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the text flow: Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with DIGSI), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with DIGSI), are written in italic style, additionally. This applies also for options in menus. Annunciations, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotes. Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings: Device-internal logical input signal Device-internal logical output signal Internal input signal of an analog quantity External binary input signal with number (binary input, input indication) External binary output signal with number (device indication)

Example of a parameter switch designated with the address and the possible settings

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Preface

Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60 61712 and IEC 60 61713 or symbols derived from these standards. The most frequent symbols are the following:

Input signal of an analogue quantity

OR-combination of input values

AND-combination of input values ExclusiveOR gate: output is active, if only one of the inputs is active >2 at least two inputs are active Coincidence: output is active if both inputs are active or inactive at the same time Dynamic input signals (edgetriggered) above with positive, below with negative edge Formation of one analogue output signal from a number of analogue input signals

Limit value stage with parameter address and parameter name

Timer (pickup delay T adjustable) with parameter address and parameter name

Timer (dropout delay T, non-adjustable) Edge-controlled time stage with effective time T Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)

Circuit breaker (open and closed) Isolator (open and closed)

vi

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 4 Features ................................................................................................................................. 5

Design and Connection System....................................................................................................... 13 2.0 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1.3.3 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.2.1 2.3.2.2 2.3.2.3 2.3.2.4 2.3.2.5 General................................................................................................................................. 14 Central Unit .......................................................................................................................... 15 Front View ............................................................................................................................ 15 Modules and Submodules .................................................................................................... 16 Design .................................................................................................................................. 17 Subrack ES902 C (SIPAC)................................................................................................... 17 Wall-mounted housing.......................................................................................................... 17 8MF Cubicle ......................................................................................................................... 17 Bay Unit ................................................................................................................................ 18 Front View ............................................................................................................................ 18 Modules and Submodules .................................................................................................... 19 Design .................................................................................................................................. 21 Panel Surface Mounting ....................................................................................................... 21 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting.......................................................................... 21 Connection Method .............................................................................................................. 22 Location of Device Connections ........................................................................................... 22 Device Connections.............................................................................................................. 25 Screw-Type Terminals.......................................................................................................... 26 Double Leaf-Spring-Crimp Contacts..................................................................................... 26 D-SUB Female Connectors .................................................................................................. 27 Fiber-Optic Cable Connections ............................................................................................ 27 EN100 module Ethernet (IEC 61850)................................................................................... 28

Getting Started................................................................................................................................... 29 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Unpacking and Repacking.................................................................................................... 30 Checking the Rated Data ..................................................................................................... 30 Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery................................................................................................... 31 Electrical Checks .................................................................................................................. 38 Setting up the Communication between the Central Unit and the Bay Unit ................................................................................................................... 39

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

vii

3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.7 4

Operation of SIPROTEC Devices from the Operator Panel ................................................. 40 User Interface ....................................................................................................................... 40 Navigating the Operating Tree of the Display....................................................................... 40 Setting Addresses in the Bay Unit ........................................................................................ 41 Adjusting the Display Contrast.............................................................................................. 42 Storage ................................................................................................................................. 44

Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 45 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.6.1 4.3.6.2 4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.1.1 4.5.1.2 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.7 4.8 Creating a Project ................................................................................................................. 46 Inserting Central Unit / Bay Units.......................................................................................... 47 Plant Configuration ............................................................................................................... 49 How to Proceed .................................................................................................................... 49 Starting the Plant Configuration............................................................................................ 50 Drawing Busbars ................................................................................................................. 52 Defining Bays........................................................................................................................ 54 Inserting Dynamic Elements ................................................................................................. 55 Connecting Dynamic Elements to the Busbars .................................................................... 57 Inserting Lines ...................................................................................................................... 57 Inserting a Connection.......................................................................................................... 58 Inserting Static Text .............................................................................................................. 59 Creating and Inserting Typicals. ........................................................................................... 59 Saving the Substation Chart ................................................................................................. 60 Assigning Bay Units.............................................................................................................. 61 Marshalling ........................................................................................................................... 63 Marshalling Information Items of the Central Unit................................................................. 63 Allocable Information ............................................................................................................ 63 Marshalling ........................................................................................................................... 64 Marshalling Bay Unit Information.......................................................................................... 66 Allocable Information ............................................................................................................ 66 Marshalling ........................................................................................................................... 67 Settings................................................................................................................................. 70 Serial Ports ........................................................................................................................... 71 Date/Clock Management...................................................................................................... 75 Concluding the Configuration ............................................................................................... 79 Configuration Notes .............................................................................................................. 81

viii

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Functions............................................................................................................................................ 91 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.1.1 5.1.1.2 5.1.1.3 5.1.1.4 5.1.1.5 5.1.1.6 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.1.3.2 5.1.3.3 5.1.3.4 5.1.3.5 5.1.3.6 5.1.3.7 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.5.1 5.3.5.2 5.3.5.3 5.3.5.4 5.3.5.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 Busbar Protection ................................................................................................................. 92 Mode of operation ................................................................................................................ 92 Basic Principle ...................................................................................................................... 92 Algorithm with Instantaneous Values ................................................................................... 94 Separate Evaluation of Half-Cycles...................................................................................... 96 Evaluation of the Initial Values ............................................................................................. 99 Algorithm with Filtered Values ............................................................................................ 100 Summary of the Measuring Method ................................................................................... 100 Isolator Replica................................................................................................................... 101 Bus Coupler Variants.......................................................................................................... 103 Bus Couplers with One Current Transformer ..................................................................... 103 Bus Couplers with Two Current Transformers ................................................................... 103 Bus Couplers without Circuit Breaker................................................................................. 104 Bus Couplers with more than 5 Isolators............................................................................ 104 Combi-Coupler ................................................................................................................... 104 Transfer Busbars ................................................................................................................ 105 Transfer Busbar Protection With Inside Transformers ....................................................... 107 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 107 Settings for the Central Unit ............................................................................................... 110 Check Zone ........................................................................................................................ 111 Mode of operation .............................................................................................................. 111 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 112 Settings for the Central Unit ............................................................................................... 112 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection....................................................................................... 113 Characteristics for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection................................................... 113 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 114 Settings for the Central Unit ............................................................................................... 115 List of Information from the Central Unit............................................................................. 115 Bay-Specific Functions (BU)............................................................................................... 116 Triggering and Releasing the Breaker Failure Protection................................................... 116 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection during a Feeder Short-Circuit ....................................... 118 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection for Busbar Faults .......................................................... 124 Failure of the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker ......................................................................... 125 Circuit Breaker Not Ready.................................................................................................. 125 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 126 Settings for the Central Unit ............................................................................................... 129 List of Information from the Central Unit............................................................................. 130 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 131

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

ix

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 5.5.1.3 5.5.1.4 5.5.1.5 5.5.1.6 5.5.1.7 5.5.1.8 5.5.1.9 5.5.1.10 5.5.1.11 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4

End Fault Protection ........................................................................................................... 132 End Fault Protection in the Feeder ..................................................................................... 132 Protection in the Dead Zone of the Bus Coupler.............................................................. 134 Circuit Breaker Closed........................................................................................................ 134 Circuit Breaker Open .......................................................................................................... 135 CLOSE Command of the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker ...................................................... 136 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 137 Settings for the Central Unit................................................................................................ 137 List of Information from the Central Unit ............................................................................. 138 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 138 Supervisory Functions ....................................................................................................... 139 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 139 Zone-Selective Blocking ..................................................................................................... 139 Auxiliary and Reference Voltages....................................................................................... 141 Measured Value Supervision.............................................................................................. 141 Output Trip Supervision ...................................................................................................... 142 Battery Monitoring............................................................................................................... 142 Supervision in Maintenance Mode...................................................................................... 142 Cyclic Test .......................................................................................................................... 143 Supervision of External Current Transformer Circuits ........................................................ 143 Isolator Status Supervision ................................................................................................. 145 Supervisory of Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................ 148 Overview of the Supervisory Functions .............................................................................. 149 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 152 Settings for the Central Unit................................................................................................ 155 List of Information from the Central Unit ............................................................................. 156 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 157 Oscillographic Fault Recording........................................................................................... 158 Mode of operation............................................................................................................... 158 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 159 Settings for the Central Unit................................................................................................ 160 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 160 List of Information from the Central Unit ............................................................................. 160 Device................................................................................................................................. 161 Mode of operation............................................................................................................... 161 Annunciations ..................................................................................................................... 161 List of Information from the Central Unit ............................................................................. 163 Power System Data ............................................................................................................ 164 Mode of operation............................................................................................................... 164 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 164 Settings for the Central Unit................................................................................................ 164 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 164

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.9.5 5.9.6 5.9.7 5.9.8 5.9.9 5.9.10 5.9.11 5.9.12 5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.11 5.11.1 5.11.2 5.11.3 5.12 5.12.1 5.12.2 5.12.3 5.13 5.13.1 5.13.2 5.13.3 5.14 5.14.1 5.14.2 5.14.3 5.14.4 5.15 5.15.1 5.15.2 5.15.3 5.15.4

Protection General ............................................................................................................. 165 Current-Controlled TRIP Reset .......................................................................................... 165 Local Control of the Bay Unit.............................................................................................. 165 Operating States "Bay Out of Service", "Maintenance Mode"............................................ 166 Overcurrent-Controlled TRIP command ............................................................................. 167 Feeder-Selective Trip Release ........................................................................................... 168 Testing the Tripping Circuits and the Circuit Breakers ....................................................... 168 Busbar Tripping via an External Signal .............................................................................. 169 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 169 Settings for the Central Unit ............................................................................................... 172 List of Information from the Central Unit............................................................................. 173 Settings for the Bay Unit..................................................................................................... 173 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 173 Bay Unit .............................................................................................................................. 174 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 174 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 174 Integrated Operation of the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 175 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 175 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 175 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 176 PC Port of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 177 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 177 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 177 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 178 Fault Recording in the Bay Unit (Local Fault Recording) ................................................. 179 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 179 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 179 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 180 Scope of Protective Functions in the Bay Unit ................................................................... 181 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 181 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 181 Settings of the Central Unit................................................................................................. 182 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 182 Power System Data of the Bay Unit ................................................................................... 183 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 183 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 183 Settings of the Central Unit................................................................................................. 184 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 184

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

xi

5.16 5.16.1 5.16.2 5.16.3 5.16.4 5.17 5.17.1 5.17.2 5.17.3 5.17.4 5.18 5.18.1 5.18.2 5.18.3 5.18.4 5.18.5 5.18.6 6

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit ............................................................................... 185 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 185 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 187 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 191 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 193 User-Defined Annunciations ............................................................................................... 194 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 194 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 195 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 195 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 196 Backup Breaker Failure Protection in the Bay Unit............................................................. 197 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 197 Setting Notes ...................................................................................................................... 200 Settings of the Central Unit................................................................................................. 200 List of Information from the Central Unit ............................................................................. 201 Settings of the Bay Unit ...................................................................................................... 201 List of Information from the Bay Unit .................................................................................. 202

Control During Operation................................................................................................................ 203 6.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.4 6.2.1.5 6.2.1.6 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.2.1 6.3.2.2 6.3.2.3 6.3.3 6.3.3.1 6.3.3.2 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.5.1 6.3.5.2 6.3.6 6.3.7 Overview............................................................................................................................. 204 Reading Out Information..................................................................................................... 206 Annunciations ..................................................................................................................... 206 Operational Annunciations.................................................................................................. 208 Fault events ........................................................................................................................ 209 Alarm List............................................................................................................................ 211 General Interrogation.......................................................................................................... 211 Spontaneous Annunciation................................................................................................. 212 Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 212 Reading Out Measured Values........................................................................................... 213 Reading Out Fault Data ...................................................................................................... 215 Controlling Device Functions .............................................................................................. 218 Creating an Oscillographic Record ..................................................................................... 218 Blocking .............................................................................................................................. 219 Blocking the TRIP Command ............................................................................................. 219 Blocking the Breaker Failure Protection ............................................................................. 222 Blocking of Individual Busbar Sections............................................................................... 224 Saving and Deleting Annunciations .................................................................................... 225 Saving Annunciations ......................................................................................................... 225 Deleting Annunciations ....................................................................................................... 226 Circuit Breaker Test ............................................................................................................ 227 Reset Blocking.................................................................................................................... 229 Reset Blocking of Differential Current Supervision............................................................. 229 Reset Blocking of Isolator Fault .......................................................................................... 230 Trigger Initial Start and Restart........................................................................................... 230 Read and Set Date / Time.................................................................................................. 231

xii

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

6.4 6.5 6.6 7

Feeder Shutdown and Commissioning............................................................................... 236 Maintenance Mode ............................................................................................................. 239 Plant Visualization .............................................................................................................. 241

Installation and Commissioning .................................................................................................... 245 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.3.1 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.4 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2.1 7.3.2.2 7.3.2.3 7.3.3 7.3.3.1 7.3.3.2 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.2.1 7.4.2.2 7.4.3 7.4.3.1 7.4.3.2 7.4.3.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.5.1 7.4.5.2 7.4.6 7.5 7.5.1 7.6 Installation and Commissioning.......................................................................................... 246 Central Unit ........................................................................................................................ 246 Bay Unit .............................................................................................................................. 247 General Information on the 2-Bay Bus Coupler.................................................................. 248 General............................................................................................................................... 248 2-Bay Bus Coupler With 2 Current Transformers............................................................... 249 2-Bay Bus Coupler With one Current Transformer............................................................. 249 Connection ......................................................................................................................... 249 Checking the Connections.................................................................................................. 251 Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 252 How to Proceed .................................................................................................................. 253 Web Monitor ....................................................................................................................... 254 General............................................................................................................................... 254 Functions ............................................................................................................................ 255 Operating Modes ................................................................................................................ 260 Checking the Switching States of the binary Inputs/Outputs.............................................. 262 Central Unit ........................................................................................................................ 262 Bay Unit .............................................................................................................................. 264 Testing the System Port ..................................................................................................... 266 Control of the Isolator Replica ............................................................................................ 268 Switching the Test Mode and the Transmission Block On and OFF. ................................. 269 Checks With Secondary Values ......................................................................................... 270 General............................................................................................................................... 270 Trip Characteristic of the Busbar Protection....................................................................... 271 busbar-selective Protection ................................................................................................ 271 Check Zone ........................................................................................................................ 273 Differential Current Monitoring............................................................................................ 275 busbar-selective Protection ................................................................................................ 275 Check Zone ........................................................................................................................ 276 Time Delay ......................................................................................................................... 276 Overcurrent Threshold Tripping.......................................................................................... 277 Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................................................. 277 Trip Characteristic for Operating Mode Unbalancing ....................................................... 277 Delay Time at Operating Mode Unbalancing and I>Query ............................................ 278 Finishing the Tests with Secondary Values........................................................................ 278 Checks With Primary Values .............................................................................................. 279 Transformer Polarity ........................................................................................................... 279 Final Check of the Protection ............................................................................................. 280

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

xiii

Maintenance and Repair.................................................................................................................. 281 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.3 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 282 Fault Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 284 Evaluation of Operational Events ....................................................................................... 284 Checking the Auxiliary Voltage Supply ............................................................................... 285 Checking the LEDs on the Modules ................................................................................... 285 Analysis of Internal Communication Failures...................................................................... 287 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 290 Repair ................................................................................................................................. 293 Replacing the Buffer Battery............................................................................................... 294 Replacing the Fine-Wire Fuse ............................................................................................ 297 Startup with a Defective Bay Unit / Defective Fiber-Optic Cable ........................................ 300

Technical Data.................................................................................................................................. 301 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 9.2.7 9.2.8 9.2.9 9.2.10 9.2.11 9.2.12 9.2.13 9.2.14 9.2.15 9.2.16 9.2.17 9.2.18 9.2.19 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 General Data ...................................................................................................................... 302 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 303 Analog Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................. 303 Rated Auxiliary Voltage ...................................................................................................... 303 Binary Inputs....................................................................................................................... 304 Alarm Contacts ................................................................................................................... 304 Trip Contacts ...................................................................................................................... 305 Light Emitting Diodes.......................................................................................................... 305 Operation, Displays ............................................................................................................ 305 Serial Ports ......................................................................................................................... 306 Busbar Protection ............................................................................................................... 307 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection....................................................................................... 308 Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit ............................................................................... 309 Auxiliary Functions.............................................................................................................. 311 User-Configurable Functions (CFC) ................................................................................... 312 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 313 Mechanical Tests................................................................................................................ 315 Climatic Stress Tests .......................................................................................................... 316 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................. 317 Design Versions.................................................................................................................. 317 MCBs for Device 7SS52x ................................................................................................... 318 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 319 Central Unit......................................................................................................................... 319 Bay Unit .............................................................................................................................. 322

xiv

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Appendix .......................................................................................................................................... 327 A.1 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.4.1 A.4.2 A.4.3 A.5 A.5.1 A.5.2 A.5.3 A.5.4 A.5.5 A.5.6 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11 A.12 A.13 A.14 A.15 A.16 A.17 A.18 A.19 A.20 A.21 Data for Selection and Ordering ......................................................................................... 328 Central Unit ........................................................................................................................ 328 Bay Units ............................................................................................................................ 329 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 330 Basis for Selection of the Stabilization Factor k ................................................................. 333 Connection Diagrams ......................................................................................................... 334 Settings Central Unit........................................................................................................ 340 Settings of the ZPS Modules .............................................................................................. 340 Settings of the EAZ Module................................................................................................ 342 Jumper Settings of the D-CPU Module .............................................................................. 344 Jumper Settings Bay Unit ................................................................................................ 346 Settings of the PFE Module................................................................................................ 346 Settings of the SVW Module............................................................................................... 347 Settings of the SAF Module................................................................................................ 348 Settings of the AFE Module................................................................................................ 349 Settings of the EFE Module................................................................................................ 350 Settings of the EFE_10 Module.......................................................................................... 352 Protocol-Dependent Functions ........................................................................................... 354 Parameter Listing - Central Unit ......................................................................................... 355 Parameter Listing - Bay Unit............................................................................................... 357 List of information - Central Unit ......................................................................................... 362 List of Information - Bay Unit .............................................................................................. 372 Group Alarms - Central Unit ............................................................................................... 378 Group Alarms - Bay Unit..................................................................................................... 382 Measured Value List - Central Unit..................................................................................... 383 Measured Value List - Bay Unit .......................................................................................... 384 Marshalling - Central Unit ................................................................................................... 385 Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS523........................................................................................... 388 Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS525........................................................................................... 391 Navigation Tree - Central Unit ............................................................................................ 393 Navigation Tree of the Bay Unit.......................................................................................... 403 Abbreviations...................................................................................................................... 404 References ......................................................................................................................... 405

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

xv

xvi

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction

1
This chapter introduces the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection. An overview of the device is presented in its application, characteristics, and scope of functions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overall Operation Applications Features 2 4 5

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction

1.1

Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection consists of compact bay units which are connected to the central unit by fiber-optic cables. Figure 1-1, page 3 shows the basic structure of the protection system. All tasks from acquisition of the measured values up to the commands to the circuit breakers are exclusively processed in a digital manner. In the bay units the feeder or coupler currents are measured time-synchronized, digitalized, preprocessed and transmitted to the central unit via the fast serial port. The input nominal current can be 1 or 5 A depending on the main current transformer design. A full galvanic and low-capacitive isolation of the measuring inputs is provided by transducers. Suppression of disturbances is achieved by filters which are optimized for the measured value processing with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.

Bay units

The bay units can be parameterized and operated either directly or from the central unit. Chapter 6.1, page 204 summarizes the operator options during operation. The bay units capture the isolator positions and bay-related binary signals, process functions of the breaker failure protection and fulfil auto diagnosis tasks. Heavy-duty command relays take the protection system's trip commands directly to the circuit breakers. Marshallable alarm relays and indicators (LEDs, LC display, DIGSI communication software) allow event indication. In addition operational measured values are displayed. For the marshalling of isolator positions, command relays, alarm relays and allocatable binary inputs the DIGSI communication software is used. Optionally, the bay units can be equipped with a backup protection function (definitetime, inverse-time) including breaker failure protection.

Central unit

The central unit reads in time-synchronized measured currents from the connected bay units and processes them together with binary information from the protection functions (differential protection, breaker failure protection). The central unit transmits the results of the calculations cyclically to the bay units, which perform logical combinations of the results. Freely marshallable alarm relays and LED displays are provided for signalling. They are marshalled with the DIGSI communication software. The central unit manages all configuration and setting data for the busbar and breaker failure protection functions. Communication is possible via the serial port by means of a PC utilizing a current version of the DIGSI communication software. With DIGSI V4.6 the central unit - but not the bay unit - can also be operated via IEC 61850 with the optional EN100 module. Indications, parameters and measured values are visualized in the display or in DIGSI. In addition the program can read out fault data from the protection device and analyze it. The central unit and bay units contain power supply modules for a reliable power supply on different voltage ranges.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overall Operation

SBK: DPR:

Protection processing Dual port RAM

SC: PS: ZPS:

Serial coupling Power supply Central processor protection

I/O CU: Input/output central unit SBK: Bus master

Figure 1-1 General view of the configuration of the protection system

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction

1.2

Applications
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection is a selective, reliable and fast protection for busbar short-circuits and circuit-breaker failures in medium-voltage, high-voltage and extra high-voltage switching stations. It is suitable for almost all busbar configurations. The busbar protection uses a phase-selective measuring principle. The protection system consists of a central unit (CU) and up to 48 bay units (BU) connected by fiber-optic (FO) cables. The latter can be located in the vicinity of the bays (distributed) but also together with the CU in cubicles (centralized).

Application

Use and scope of functions

The protection can be used with all types of switchgear with either conventional or linearized CTs. The modular design facilitates extensions or modifications of the protection system in conformity with the switchgear design. The 7SS52 V4 is designed for 12 selective bus zones and 12 bus coupler (auxiliary bus) sections. These are sections which serve exclusively for coupling of the bus zones. They do not have any feeders. The busbar configuration can include up to 24 sectionalizing isolators and 16 bus couplers with one bay unit or 8 bus couplers with two bay units. By virtue of the universal isolator replica, the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection can be matched with different busbar configurations in the design phase. Compensation of different current transformer ratios is achieved by parameter setting. Interposing current transformers are thus no more required. A busbar short-circuit is detected by evaluating the differential current and the stabilizing current. Appropriate measures ensure correct performance even for extreme CT saturation (requested current transmission time 2 ms for stability in the case of external faults and 3 ms for tripping). The integrated circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) can be operated in five modes, selectable per bay (see Chapter 5.3.5.2, page 118): I> query (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with overcurrent detection I> (2-stage CBF) Unbalancing (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with following unbalancing (2-stage CBF) Single-pole or three-pole start by external CBF and tripping via the isolator replica In addition, the integrated circuit breaker failure protection provides two operating modes that can be set in parallel to the other five modes (see Chapter 5.3.5.2, page 118): Low-current operating mode without/with TRIP repetition Pulse mode

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Features

The overcurrent-time protection is a back-up protection function of the bay unit and includes the following functions (see Chapter 5.14, page 181): Phase-selective high-set stage (I>>) High-set stage for the earth current (IE>>) Phase-selective overcurrent stage with definite time or inverse time characteristic (I> / Ip) Overcurrent stage for the earth current with definite time or inverse time characteristic (IE> / IEp) Back-up protection function, can work without the central unit Separate circuit breaker failure protection

1.3

Features
Powerful multiprocessor system Completely digital measured value processing and control, from the acquisition and digitizing of measured values, recognition of the isolator status and processing of the CB failure protection signals up to the trip decisions for the circuit-breaker Graphical station planning with the DIGSI communication software Easy station configuration with the DIGSI communication software Easy centralized operation of bay units from the central unit using DIGSI, or local menu-guided operation via integrated keypad and display panel Battery-buffered storage of fault events as well as instantaneous values for fault recording Complete galvanic and disturbance-free isolation between the internal processing circuits of central unit and bay units and the measuring and auxiliary supply circuits of the station by virtue of screened measuring transducers, binary input and output modules and DC converters Disturbance-free and fast data transmission from and to the bay units by fiber-optic links Complete scope of functions for the selective protection of multiple busbar systems Central administration of the isolator states Continuous monitoring of measured values as well as of hardware and software of the unit Comprehensive self-monitoring provides for fast signaling of unit failures Communication via electrical or optical interfaces and use of the DIGSI communication software for planning, parameterization and for indication and fault record analysis Communication check via Web browser IEC 61850 Control center link of the central unit as per IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction

Output of indications to Control center LEDs Binary outputs of the central unit Commissioning support by measuring and display functions, and output of indications to a control center as well as to LEDs and outputs of the central unit. Busbar protection The digital busbar protection contains the following functions: Evaluation of the differential current in conjunction with through-current stabilization (Figure 1-2, page 7) Trip decision based on 3 independent measurements. 2 measurements are based on busbar configuration, and the third measurement considers all busbar sections independent of the isolator replica (check zone). Fast tripping (typical trip time 15 ms) Busbar protection with up to 12 bus zones (BZ), 12 bus coupler (auxiliary bus) sections (AB) and up to 48 bay units Protection of systems with up to quintuple busbars (including transfer busbars) Stabilization against spurious tripping in case of external faults and CT saturation Zone-selective and phase-selective blocking of the busbar protection by the differential current monitor Selective blocking of the bus section in case of Isolator faults Bay faults (bay unit, FO cable) Measured value error Response of the zero crossing supervision Characteristics for check zone and bus-selective zones can be set independently from each other Normal pick-up characteristic (Figure 1-2, page 7) Earth fault characteristic (Figure 1-3, page 7) Matching to different CT ratios without interposing matching transformers Selective clearance of short-circuits even on the bypass bus with signal transmission to the remote end Detection and disconnection of short-circuits in the coupler bay between current transformers and circuit-breaker based on current measurement and selective unbalance Detection and disconnection of short-circuits between current transformers and circuit-breaker of a line by end fault protection Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF), selectable per bay, for low-current faults in the variants I> query (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with overcurrent detection I> (2-stage CBF) Unbalancing (1-stage CBF)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Features

TRIP repetition with following unbalancing (2-stage CBF) Single-pole or three-pole start by external breaker failure protection and tripping via the isolator replica Direct operation of the circuit breaker by the bay unit Direct tripping of busbar sections via binary inputs of the central unit

Figure 1-2 Pick-up characteristics of the busbar and breaker failure protection (unbalancing)

Figure 1-3 Earth fault characteristic

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction

Breaker failure protection

The integrated circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) contains the following functions: In case of a busbar short-circuit, a breaker failure is detected by comparison of current thresholds. In all operating modes of the circuit breaker failure protection, a bay-selective command is output by the bay units to trip the circuit breaker at the remote end (transfer trip command). The external breaker failure protection can be started for one phase or for three phases. The breaker failure protection can be started on 1 channel or, for extra reliability, on 2 channels. Both settings can be combined with a monitoring feature. Reduced response times in case of a circuit breaker malfunction Query of the circuit breaker position in case of low-current faults The circuit breaker failure protection function can be deactivated for test purposes. The following modes are available for the circuit breaker failure protection: I> query: After initiation by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, the 7SS52 V4 checks the feeder current. If the measured current stays above the set threshold after a set time has elapsed, the 7SS52 V4 issues zone-selective TRIP commands in the bays considering the isolator replica. TRIP repetition with subsequent I> query: When initiated by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, the 7SS52 V4 issues a second TRIP command to the circuit breaker of the initiating feeder after a set time delay. In case this second TRIP command is also unsuccessful, tripping as per mode I>query is effected. Unbalancing: After initiation by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, the 7SS52 V4 system checks the feeder current. If the measured current stays above the set threshold after a set time has elapsed, the polarity of the current in this feeder is inverted by the 7SS52 V4 (unbalancing). TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing: When initiated by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, the 7SS52 V4 issues a second TRIP command to the circuit breaker of the initiating feeder after a set time delay. In case this second TRIP command is also unsuccessful, tripping as per mode Unbalancing is effected. TRIP by external CBF: Where a separate circuit breaker failure protection is provided, the 7SS52 V4 can generate zone-selective feeder trip commands utilizing the integrated isolator replica. TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing with pulse trigger or I>query: This mode should be used when the CBF is triggered by the remote station. The function is triggered by a trip command from the feeder protection at the remote feeder terminal. The further proceeding is described in the modes TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing and I>query. Low-current CBF: This mode outputs a TRIP command even in the case of low-current faults (e.g. tripping by Buchholz protection). After a settable time the circuit breaker position is queried. A TRIP repetition also takes place with a low-current operating mode.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Features

End fault protection

This mode detects short-circuits between the current transformers and the circuit breaker and generates the necessary commands to disconnect the faulted line. The overcurrent protection of the bay unit is independent of the busbar protection function and of the central unit. The overcurrent protection comprises the following functions (Chapter 5.14, page 181): High-set stage I>> with separate fault detection in each phase High-set stage IE>> Definite time overcurrent stage I> with separate fault detection in each phase OR Inverse time overcurrent stage Ip with separate fault detection in each phase Definite time earth current stage IE> OR Inverse time earth current stage IEP Setting of different current/time characteristics for phase and earth currents is possible. With inverse time O/C protection: three standardized characteristics are selectable for phase currents and earth currents. The CBF function remains active even in case of central unit failure or with the bay unit out of service.

Overcurrent protection

Isolator replica

The isolator replica is common for the busbar protection and the circuit-breaker failure protection function. The isolator replica comprises the following functions: Management of up to 48 bay units, 12 bus zones and 12 bus coupler sections: The protection system is suitable for configurations up to quintuple busbars. Combibus operation is possible. Up to 16 couplers can be configured with one bay unit, and up to 8 couplers with 2 bay units. These can be bus couplers or/and sectionalizing isolators. Isolator running time supervision Integrated storage of isolator status on loss of DC supply: The isolator replica allows to allocate to the isolators their positions prior to the DC supply failure. It is also possible to allocate to all isolators of this feeder the position CLOSED. The allocation of NOT OPEN = CLOSED eliminates the necessity of calibrated isolator auxiliary contacts. Also, it ensures stable functioning of the protection even in case of a wire break. Graphical planning of the station configuration with the DIGSI communication software Visualization of isolator positions by LEDs on the bay units

Trip output / Trip reset

The signal processing is distinguished by the following characteristics: Feeder-selective TRIP command by the bay units Feeder-selective selectable overcurrent release of the TRIP command Extension of busbar TRIP signal for set time Current-controlled reset of TRIP signal

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Introduction

Fault recording

During a fault event, the instantaneous values of the measured values are stored at intervals of 1 ms at 50 Hz and 0.83 ms at 60 Hz respectively in a buffer of the central unit or of the bay units. The central unit calculates from the instantaneous values the differential and restraint currents of each phase for all busbar sections and the check zone. The bay units calculate from the instantaneous values the currents and the binary tracks. After starting the fault recording, the fault data are stored in a range from max. 500 ms before the TRIP command to max. 500 ms after it. The central units can store up to 8 faults with a maximum of 80 fault events each, and each bay unit can store 8 faults with a maximum of 100 fault events each. Where more events are generated, the oldest are overwritten in the order of their generation. Fault recording is started, for instance, by a busbar short circuit, by a binary input or through DIGSI. The fault data can be read out to a PC and evaluated by the DIGSI communication software. The fault record data buffer SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 is protected against data loss in case of power failures.

Relays, LEds and binary inputs of the central unit

All inputs and outputs are freely marshallable. Each LED or relay can be allocated to more than one event; likewise, events can be marshalled more than one LED or relay. 12 binary inputs are available to control the functions of the central unit (e.g. clock synchronization, LED reset). 16 alarm relays and 32 LED in the central unit can be allocated to various functions for user-specific output and indication.

of the bay unit

The bay units are the interface link to the station. Each bay unit 7SS523 has 4 command relays with each 2 NO contacts 1 command relay with 1 NO contact 1 command relay with 1 NO contact 1alarm relay with 2 NC contacts (device failure, not marshallable) The functional allocation of the outputs can be marshalled with the DIGSI communication software. 20 freely marshallable binary inputs are available for control functions or state recognition. 16 binary inputs can be marshalled to various functions, such as recognition of the isolator states.

10

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Features

Each bay unit 7SS525 has 3 command relays with each 2 NO contacts 2 command relay with 1 NO contact 1 command relay with 1 NO contact 1 alarm relay with 1 NC contact (device failure, not marshallable) The functional allocation of the outputs can be marshalled with the DIGSI communication software. 10 freely marshallable binary inputs are available for control functions or state recognition. 1 LED is freely allocable. Measuring and testing functions The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and circuit breaker failure provides a variety of measuring and testing functions to assist during commissioning and maintenance. These functions are: Display of the feeder currents per phase in each bay unit and in the central unit. In addition the data are available at the serial port for visualization in the DIGSI software. Phase-selective and zone-selective calculation of differential and stabilizing currents. Display in the DIGSI software through the serial PC port. In addition, the data are visualized per phase, per bus zone, and for the checkzone, in the display of the central unit. The display of the bay unit shows only the data for the check zone. Monitoring of the zone-selective and phase-selective differential currents with zoneselective blocking or alarm output Monitoring of the zone-selective and phase-selective differential currents with zoneselective blocking or alarm output Phase-selective trip test including control of the feeder circuit breaker (through DIGSI, bay unit display or binary input) Bay out of service Removal of one bay from the busbar protection processing via central unit or bay unit, e.g during maintenance works. Revision mode The isolator replica of one bay is retained by the central and the bay unit with the protection function remaining active. Cyclic test of measured value acquisition, measured value processing and trip circuit test including the coils of the command relays Manual blocking Blocking of the circuit breaker failure protection, the XMZ and the backup breaker failure protection and of the TRIP commands.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

11

Introduction

Event buffer in central unit

The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and circuit breaker failure protection supplies battery-buffered data for the analysis of faults as well as for operational events. Up to 200 operational events and 80 fault events with real-time information are stored in a circulating buffer in the central unit. Operational events include switching operations, protection status indications, isolator status irregularities and monitoring functions. Fault events include trip signals in the event of busbar short-circuits, circuit-breaker failure and transfer trip.

Event buffer in bay unit Self monitoring

Up to 50 operational events and 100 fault events per fault.

Hardware and software are continuously monitored; irregularities are recognized instantly and annunciated. A high degree of security and availability is achieved by the continuous monitoring of: Isolator statuses Trip circuits Measured current circuits Measured value transformations Supply voltages Program memories Program processing Discharge degree of battery (central unit and bay unit) For diagnosis purposes in the event of device failures, a battery-buffered dedicated data memory is available in the central unit.

Clock control

Central unit Battery-buffered time with 1 ms resolution Time set by entry of current data Synchronization of the central unit via binary input or system port (synchronization signal DCF77, IRIG B by satellite receiver) IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850 Bay unit Battery-buffered time with 1 ms resolution Clock synchronization by central unit in intervals of 1 minute Local clock setting possible as well

Battery-buffered functions

The central unit and the bay units are equipped with buffer batteries to ensure that LED states, date and time, operational and fault events as well as fault records are maintained in case of an auxiliary power failure.

12

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Design and Connection System

2
14 15 18 22

This chapter describes the design of the central unit and the bay units that constitute the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection. It explains what housing versions are possible and what connection methods are used.

2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3

General Central Unit Bay Unit Connection Method

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

13

Design and Connection System

2.0

General
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection is comprised of: Central unit Bay units Data links (fiber-optic cables) Prefabricated fiber optic cables with double-end ST plug connectors are used for the data exchange. They can be delivered with specific anti-rodent protection for outdoor installation. Indoor cables may be used for centralized configuration of the bay units.

Power supply

The modules in the bay unit and central unit are powered by powerful power supply units. For the range required for your specific input voltage, please refer to the selection and ordering data in the Table A-1, page 328. Short dips or failures of the supply voltage up to 50 ms, which may occur due to shortcircuits in the DC supply system of the station, are compensated by a DC storage capacitor (for nominal voltages 60 V).

Bonding power failure

14

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Central Unit

2.1

Central Unit
The central unit is installed in an ES902 C (SIPAC) subrack. This subrack can additionally be fitted in a wall-mounted housing or in an 8MF cubicle. On account of the modular design, different variants and degrees of expansion can be coordinated with the station configuration.

2.1.1

Front View

Figure 2-1 Front view of the central unit

1 2 3 4 5 6

LEDs for the indication of operating states LCD for textual display of process and device information Navigation keys for moving through the operating tree MENU key for calling up the main menu 9-pole female sub D connector for connecting a PC running DIGSI ENTER for confirmation of changes or for acknowledging information displayed in the LCD ESC key to move up one level Numeric keypad for entering numeric values

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

15

Design and Connection System

Function keys: F1 Alarm list F2 Operational events F3 Measured values F4 Last fault freely parameterizable LEDs for display of process or device information. Next to the LEDs, there is a labeling strip for labeling of the function of each LED.

10 LED key for testing and resetting the LEDs

2.1.2

Modules and Submodules

Figure 2-2 Module arrangement in the central unit

Power supply module (SV) Communication module (D-CPU)

The power supply (SV) has a width of 4 standard mounting spaces. Each of the other units has a width of 2 standard mounting spaces. The communication module (D-CPU) is used for communication between the central unit and the DIGSI software. It also offers a control center interface, a service port and 5 binary inputs. An integrated electrical EN100 module for the communication via IEC 61850 is optionally available. The I/O module (EAZ) comprises 16 alarm relays.

Input/output module (EAZ) Processor modules (ZPS)

The 4 processor modules (ZPS-SBK; ZPS-BSZ1 to ZPS-BSZ3) provide the protection functions. Another 1 to 6 modules (depending on the system configuration) are used for communication with the interfaces (ZPS-SK1 to ZPS-SK6) to ensure the data exchange with the bay units. Each module can exchange data with up to 8 bay units.

16

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Central Unit

Fiber-optic module (LMZ)

For each ZPS-SK-module there is an electrical/optical signal converter module (LMZ, with 8 optical interfaces each), fitted on the device's rear side. The receiver and transmitter connection points per bay unit are consecutively numbered on the central unit's rear plate. For the fiber-optic interfaces to the bay units, optical modules (ST) are available for substation control and servicing purposes (see Table A-1, page 328). On the rear side of the central unit, terminal blocks are provided for the external electrical connection of the power supply module (SV), the I/O module (EAZ) and the communication module (D-CPU). For each electrical connection point, there is one screwtype and one snap-in connector for the station wiring. The terminal blocks are identified according to their position in a coordinate system. The connections inside a block are numbered from left to right, see the example in Bild 2-6, page 22.

Terminal blocks

2.1.3
2.1.3.1

Design
Subrack ES902 C (SIPAC) The subrack ES902 C (SIPAC) consists of an aluminium frame covered from all sides by metal plates. The front and the rear plate are hinged and can be opened downwards for easy servicing. The dimensions of the housing can be in Figure 9-5, page 322.

2.1.3.2

Wall-mounted housing In this variant, the subrack is fitted into a wall-mounted housing. All electrical and optical connections are made from the bottom side of the housing. The door of the housing is equipped with a large glass window. The design of the wallmounted housing with the three components door, swing-out frame and base facilitates installation, operation and service. The dimensions of the housing can be in Figure 9-8, page 325.

2.1.3.3

8MF Cubicle In this variant, the subrack ES902 C (SIPAC) is fitted into an 8MF cubicle with swingout frame. The electrical connections of the terminal blocks are prewired to a terminal strip in the cubicle.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

17

Design and Connection System

2.2

Bay Unit
The bay units are available in a 7XP20 housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle mounting, or in a housing for panel surface mounting for bay unit 7SS523.

2.2.1

Front View

Figure 2-3 Front view of the bay unit 7SS523 and 7SS525

1 2 3 4 5

LEDs for the indication of operating states LCD for textual display of process and device information Navigation keys for moving through the operating tree MENU key: no function ENTER key: for confirmation of inputs, for entering the next level, or for switching between ordering code (MLFB) and operational measured values ESC key to move up one level Function keys: F1 Direct access to the operating tree for changing the mode F2 Starts the circuit breaker test F3: Direct access to the operating tree for switching the revision function F4: Transformer polarity reversal ON/OFF switch for the power supply

18

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Bay Unit

8 9

9-pole female sub D connector for connecting a PC running DIGSI LED key for testing and resetting the LEDs and for display of operational measured values in 4-line mode

10 Freely parameterizable LEDs for display of process or device information. Next to the LEDs, there is a labeling strip for labeling of the function of each LED. 11 Freely parameterizable LED.

2.2.2

Modules and Submodules

Figure 2-4 Module arrangement in the bay unit 7SS523

PFE module

In the PFE module the firmware is located and processed; it also contains the current transformers and the measured value acquisition function. The SAF module contains the power supply and the alarm and trip relays. The EFE contains the binary inputs and receives indications (e.g. from isolators and circuit breakers). The heavy-duty current terminals automatically short-circuit the current transformer when the module is withdrawn. The plug-in modules are identified according to their position in a coordinate system. The connections inside a module are numbered consecutively from left to right (viewed from the rear), see example in Figure 2-8, page 24.

SAF module EFE module

Heavy-duty current terminals Plug-in modules

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

19

Design and Connection System

Figure 2-5 Module arrangement in the bay unit 7SS525

PFE/SVW module

In the PFE/SVW module the firmware is located and processed; it also contains the power supply, the current transformers and the measured value acquisition function. The AFE module contains the alarm and trip relays. The EFE_10 contains the binary inputs and receives indications (e.g. from isolators and circuit breakers). The heavy-duty current terminals automatically short-circuit the current transformer when the module is withdrawn. The plug-in modules are identified according to their position in a coordinate system. The connections inside a module are numbered consecutively from left to right (viewed from the rear), see example in Figure 2-8, page 24.

AFE module EFE_10 module

Heavy-duty current terminals Plug-in modules

20

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Bay Unit

2.2.3
2.2.3.1

Design
Panel Surface Mounting For panel surface mounting, only possible for device 7SS523, the bay units are delivered in casings type 7XP2040-1. The front plate is hinged and can be pulled out with a plastic tab and swung to the left for easy servicing. All signals including the auxiliary voltage are connected to two-tier terminals. In each tier the terminals are numbered from left to right (Figure 2-7, page 23). For the fiber-optic interface, 2 ST connectors are provided at the bottom of the device next to the terminal strip. Earthing screws are provided at the left side of the housing. The dimensions of the housing can be in Figure 9-5, page 322.

2.2.3.2

Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting For panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting the bay units are delivered in casings type 7XP2040-2. With the bay unit 7SS523 the front plate is hinged and can be pulled out with a plastic tab and swung to the left for easy servicing. With the bay unit 7SS525 the front plate can be removed. All signals including the auxiliary voltage are connected to terminal blocks on the rear plate. For each electrical connection point, there is one screw-type and one snap-in connector for the station wiring. For the fiber-optic interface, 2 ST connectors are provided at the rear of the device next to the terminal strip. An earthing screw is provided at the back of the housing. The dimensions of the housing can be in Figure 9-6, page 323.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

21

Design and Connection System

2.3
2.3.1

Connection Method
Location of Device Connections

Central unit

Bild 2-6

Device connections on central unit

22

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Connection Method

Bay unit Panel surface mounting

Figure 2-7 Device connections on bay unit 7SS523 for panel surface mounting

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

23

Design and Connection System

7SS523 bay unit Panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting

Figure 2-8 Device connections on bay unit for panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting

24

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Connection Method

7SS525 bay unit Panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting

Figure 2-9 Device connections on bay unit 7SS525

2.3.2

Device Connections

Tabelle 2-1 Variant Central unit

Overview of device connections Current connections Voltage connections Screw connection for max. 1.5 mm and Double leaf-spring-crimp contact for max. 1.5 mm Screw-type terminals for stranded wires with max. 4 mm or for solid wires with max. 7 mm Screw connection for max. 4 mm and Double leaf-spring-crimp contact for max. 2.5 mm Screw connection for max. 1.5 mm and Double leaf-spring-crimp contact for max. 1.5 mm FO connections Integrated ST connector for FO connection, glass fiber 62.5/125 m FO duplex outdoor cable or FO duplex indoor cable Integrated ST connector for FO connection, glass fiber 62.5/125 m Integrated ST connector for FO connection, glass fiber 62.5/125 m

Bay unit Panel surface mounting Bay unit Panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

25

Design and Connection System

2.3.2.1

Screw-Type Terminals The voltage connections of the central unit and the voltage and current connections of the bay units have screw terminals. For assignment of the terminals, please refer to the Figures A-3, page 334 and A-5, page 337 in the Appendix. Use copper conductors only! You can use solid conductors or stranded conductors with end sleeves. You can use end sleeves with plastic collar (acc. to DIN 46228 P. 1) that have a crosssection between 0.5 mm2 and 4 mm2 (equivalent to AWG 20 to 12) and a length up to: Conductor cross-section 0.5 mm2 0.75 and 1 mm2 1.5; 2.5 and 4 mm2 Length (without collar) 10 mm 12 mm 18 mm

Connection

Connection method

Tools

Use a screwdriver for slot-head screws size 6 1. Use a crimping tool for end sleeves between 0.5 mm2 and 6 mm2 (equivalent to AWG 20 to 10) with or without plastic collar.

2.3.2.2

Double Leaf-Spring-Crimp Contacts The voltage connections of the central unit and the voltage and current connections of the bay units have double leaf-spring-crimp contacts. For assignment of the terminals, please refer to the Figures A-3, page 334 and A-5, page 337 in the Appendix. Use copper conductors only! Use stranded conductors with a cross-section between 1.5 mm2 and 2.5 mm2. Use double leaf-spring-crimp contacts type L with 2 snap lugs that match the selected conductor cross-sections.

Connection

Connection method (current terminals)

Connection method (voltage terminals)

Use copper conductors only! Use stranded conductors with a cross-section between 0.5 mm2 and 1 mm2. Use double leaf-spring-crimp contacts that match the selected conductor cross-sections.

Tools

Use a crimping tool for the double leaf-spring-crimp contacts.

26

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Connection Method

2.3.2.3

D-SUB Female Connectors The serial ports of the central unit and of the bay units have 9-pole D-SUB female connectors. The serial ports include: the PC port at the front of the central unit and the bay unit the service port at the back of the central unit the system port at the back of the central unit the clock synchronization interface at the back of the central unit For assignment of the connectors, please refer to the Figures A-3, page 334 and A-5, page 337 in the Appendix.

Connectors

Connection method

You can use any standard 9-pole D-SUB plug connectors per MIL-C-24308 and DIN 41652. Depending on the device version, the pin assignment is the same as for an RS232 or RS485 port. You can use for connection e.g. a 5-strand, shielded interface cable.

Tools 2.3.2.4

No tools are required for connection the interface cables. Fiber-Optic Cable Connections Depending on the variant ordered, the service and the system port on the rear of the central unit may have additional fiber-optic connections (Bild 2-6, page 22). Moreover, the central unit is connected with the bay units by fiber-optic cables. The bay unit connectors are located on the back of the central unit (Bild 2-6, page 22).

Central unit

Bay units

Depending on the mounting variant, the fiber-optic interface to the central unit is located on the bottom (Figure 2-7, page 23) or the rear (Figure 2-8, page 24) of the bay unit. For assignment of the connectors, please refer to Figure A-4, page 335 in the Appendix.

Connection method

FO connector type: Use fiber type:

ST connector Multimode FO, G50/125 m, G62.5/125 m, G100/140 m approx. 820 nm

for wave length:

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

27

Design and Connection System

Note The bending radius of the available FO cables may not be smaller than 200 mm for outdoor cables and 80 mm for indoor cables. If you use other fiber types than those recommended above, please make sure to observe the manufacturers specifications. By using the fiber types G50/125 m and G62,5/125 m, compliance with class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1 is ensured. 2.3.2.5 EN100 module Ethernet (IEC 61850) The IEC 61850 is a manufacturer- and device-independent communication protocol. The data transmission between PC and SIPROTEC 4 device thus becomes much faster than via the system inferface. This protocol is available for most of the SIPROTEC 4 devices such as e.g. 7SS522 as of version V4.6. For a detailed description, please refer to the manual Ethernet & IEC 61850 Start Up /6/. Ethernet connection 8-pin RJ45 connectors (100Base-T in acc. with IEEE 802.3) serve as connections for the wired Ethernet100 interfaces.
ETHERNET - EN100-E Ch1 Ch2

6 3 2 1

Figure 2-10 Ethernet connection

Connector type:RJ45 connector in acc. with IEEE 802 Lines: Note For the implementation of an optical IEC 61850 interface, an external converter is additionally required. 150 W STP (shielded twisted-pair)

6 3 2 1

28

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Getting Started

This chapter describes the first steps that you should take after receiving your SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 system. After unpacking, please check whether the version and rated data match your requirements. Match the rated control voltages of the system components to your station conditions and insert the buffer batteries. Next, set up the communication between the central unit and the bay units. For an electrical check, you can now navigate in the user interface without any measured values. You can also connect the system to a PC and operate it from the computer using the DIGSI software. In the last section you will find hints on what to observe for a longterm storage of the system.

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

Unpacking and Repacking Checking the Rated Data Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery Electrical Checks

30 30 31 38

Setting up the Communication between the Central Unit and the Bay Unit 39 Operation of SIPROTEC Devices from the Operator Panel Storage 40 44

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

29

Getting Started

3.1

Unpacking and Repacking

The protection system is packaged at the factory to meet the requirements of IEC 60255-21. Unpack and pack the devices with normal care, without using force, and with appropriate tools. Visually check the device immediately upon arrival for correct mechanical condition. Please observe the instruction leaflet and any other documentation that may be part of the delivery. Check also that the accessories included in the delivery are complete. (Table A-4, page 330). You can use the transport packing in the same manner for further shipment. Storage packaging alone, for individual devices, is not sufficient for shipping. If you use other packaging, make sure that the shock requirements under IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2 and IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 are met. Note The device must be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.

3.2

Checking the Rated Data

First of all, check the complete ordering code (MLFB) of the system to ensure that the version delivered complies with the required rated data and functions. The complete ordering code can be found on the rating plates on the back of the housings. The meaning of its digits is shown in Appendix Chapter A.1, page 328. The most important point is the matching of the rated device data to the station ratings, such as rated auxiliary voltage and rated currents of the CTs. This information is also found on the rating plate.

30

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery

3.3

Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery

Control voltage

Warning!
Only one jumper may be fitted per binary input.

When delivered, the binary inputs of the EAZ and D-CPU modules in the central unit, and the EFE or EFE_10 modules in the bay units, are configured for 220 V rated control voltage. For each binary input, different switching thresholds can be selected. This is done on the central unit by means of 3 jumpers on the EAZ module and 4 jumpers on the DCPU module, and in the bay units by 3 jumpers each on the EFE or EFE_10 modules. Central unit

Warning!
Dangerous voltages may be present inside the device! Make sure to switch the auxiliary voltage off before opening the front panel. To change the rated control voltages of the binary inputs in the central unit: Open the front panel. The location of the EAZ and D-CPU module is shown in Figure 2-2, page 16. Remove the front plug connectors X3, X4, X5 on the D-CPU module (Figure 3-2, page 33). Press down the locking bolt of the modules at the bottom guide rail. Use the extraction handle (included in the delivery) to pull out the module. Change the rated control voltages for the binary inputs of the EAZ module as desired by relocating the jumpers (shown in Figure 3-1, page 32 and Table 3-1, page 32). Change the rated control voltages for the binary inputs of the D-CPU module by relocating the jumpers (shown in Figure 3-2, page 33 and Table 3-2, page 33). To insert the buffer battery into the central unit: Press the battery firmly into its snap-in holder (see Figure 3-2, page 33) on the DCPU module. Observe the correct battery polarity!

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

31

Getting Started

Figure 3-1 Location of the jumpers on the EAZ module (central unit)

Table 3-1

Control voltage for the binary inputs on the EAZ (central unit) in relation to the fitted jumper Control voltage setting Name 24 V 60 V 110 V 220 V

BI1 to BI5 (on the D-CPU module, Table 3-2, page 33) BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI1 BI12 X31 X32 X33 X34 X35 X36 X37 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 -

32

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery

Figure 3-2 Location of the jumpers and the buffer battery on the D-CPU module (central unit)

Table 3-2

Control voltage for the binary inputs on the D-CPU module (central unit) in relation to the fitted jumper Binary inputs BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 Jumper 24 V 2, 2 2, 2 2, 2 2, 2 2, 2 60 V 3, 3 3, 3 3, 3 3, 3 3, 3 110 V 220 V 4, 4 4, 4 4, 4 4, 4 4, 4

Connector

X20, X21 X22, X23 X24, X25 X26, X27 X28, X29

BI6 to BI12 (on the EAZ module, Table 3-1, page 32)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

33

Getting Started

Bay unit 7SS523

Warning!
Dangerous voltages may be present inside the device! Make sure to switch the auxiliary voltage off before opening the front panel. To change the rated control voltages of the binary inputs in a bay unit: Open the front panel. The location of the EFE module is shown in Figure 2-4, page 19. Remove the plug connector X1 to the front plate on the EFE module (Figure 3-3, page 34) and pull out the module. Change the rated control voltages of the binary inputs to the desired settings, see Figure 3-3, page 34 and Table 3-3, page 35. To insert the buffer battery into the bay unit: Press the battery firmly into its snap-in holder (see Figure 2-4, page 19) on the PFE module. Observe the correct battery polarity! The polarity is marked on the back of the board.

Figure 3-3 Location of the jumpers on the EFE module (bay unit 7SS523)

34

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery

Table 3-3

Control voltage for the binary inputs on the EFE (bay unit) in relation to the fitted jumper

Control voltage setting Name BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4 BI 5 BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 10 BI 11 BI 12 BI 13 BI 14 BI 15 BI 16 BI 17 BI 18 BI 19 BI 20 24 V X37 X40 X43 X46 X49 X52 X55 X58 X61 X64 X67 X70 X73 X76 X79 X82 X85 X88 X91 X94 60 V X36 X39 X42 X45 X48 X51 X54 X57 X60 X63 X66 X69 X72 X75 X78 X81 X84 X87 X90 X93 110 V X35 X38 X41 X44 X47 X50 X53 X56 X59 X62 X65 X68 X71 X74 X77 X80 X83 X86 X89 X92 220 V -

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

35

Getting Started

Bay unit 7SS525

Warning!
Dangerous voltages may be present inside the device! Make sure to switch the auxiliary voltage off before opening the front panel. To change the rated control voltages of the binary inputs in a bay unit: Open the front panel. The location of the EFE_10 module is shown in Figure 2-5, page 20. Remove the plug connector X1 to the front plate on the EFE_10 module (Figure 3-4, page 36) and pull out the module. Change the rated control voltages of the binary inputs to the desired settings, see Figure 3-4, page 36 and Table Table 3-4, page 37. To insert the buffer battery into the bay unit: Press the battery firmly into its snap-in holder (see Figure 2-5, page 20) on the PFE/ SVW module. Observe the correct battery polarity! The polarity is marked on the back of the board.

Figure 3-4 Location of the jumpers on the EFE_10 module (bay unit 7SS525)

36

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Matching the Control Voltage for the Binary Inputs and Inserting the Buffer Battery

Table 3-4

Control voltage for the binary inputs on the EFE_10 (bay unit) in relation to the fitted jumper

Control voltage setting Name BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4 BI 5 BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 10 24 V X37 X40 X43 X46 X49 X52 X55 X58 X76 X79 60 V X36 X39 X42 X45 X48 X51 X54 X57 X75 X78 110 V X35 X38 X41 X44 X47 X50 X53 X56 X74 X77 220 V -

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

37

Getting Started

3.4

Electrical Checks
Make sure that the operating conditions are compliant with VDE0100 and VDE0105 Part 1. The devices should have been in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.

Warning!
The following inspection steps are performed in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements and precautionary measures may perform these steps. For a first electrical check of the 7SS52 V4, it is sufficient to ensure safe earthing and to apply the auxiliary voltage: Connect the earthing of the devices with the protective earthing of the location. In the version for cubicle mounting or panel flush mounting, the earthing screws are on the back of the devices, in the version for panel surface mounting a terminal is provided for earthing. Connect the auxiliary voltage to the device inputs via a switch or a miniature circuit breaker. Verify that the supply voltage has the correct magnitude and polarity. Refer to the overview diagrams in the Chapter A.3, page 334. Close the protective switch or miniature circuit breaker to apply the auxiliary voltage. The green LED on the front panel must light after no more than 0.5 s, and the red LED must be off after no more than 10 s. After no more than 15 s the startup indications (showing the complete ordering number, the implemented firmware version and the boot system) disappear, and the default display appears. Depending on the default marshalling, some LEDs may already be on.

38

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Setting up the Communication between the Central Unit and the Bay Unit

3.5

Setting up the Communication between the Central Unit and the Bay Unit
The 7SS52 V4makes it possible to configure, parameterize and operate your station centrally from one PC connected to the central unit and running the DIGSI software. A prerequisite for this is that the central unit can communicate with the bay units. To set up the communication between the central unit and the bay units: Connect the central unit with the bay units by fiber-optic cables. For detailed information on connector and cable designs, please refer to Chapter 2.3.2, page 25. Match the setting of the substation address, the feeder address and the and the device address in each bay unit to the settings in the DIGSI Manager. You can either set the addresses on the operator panel of the bay unit (see Chapter 3.6.3, page 41), or initialise the bay units with the DIGSI software. For details on initializing the bay units using DIGSI, please refer to the SIPROTEC System Description /1/.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

39

Getting Started

3.6

Operation of SIPROTEC Devices from the Operator Panel

In addition to operating your station with the DIGSI software (see Chapter 6, page 203), the 7SS52 V4 allows you to operate the central unit and the bay units 7SS523 locally from the user interface on the device.

3.6.1

User Interface
The following sections describe succinctly in a few typical operations how to navigate the user interface from the integrated operator panel. The illustrations of the examples show each menu completely. The display on the device shows only 4 lines at a time.

3.6.2

Navigating the Operating Tree of the Display

The user interface of the central unit and the bay unit is composed of a hierarchically structured operating tree which is navigated by means of the navigation keys and the keys: MENU (only in the central unit), ENTER and ESC .

Central unit

With the device ready for operation, press first the key MENU. Next, select with the navigation keys tion key to enter the submenu. or

MENU ,

to enter the MAIN

a menu item and press the naviga-

Go on moving in the same way through the operating tree until you have reached the information you are looking for. To move back one level, press the navigation key To move back menu item, press the navigation key Be pressing again the key the MAIN MENU. Bay unit
MENU

. .
ESC

or by repeatedly pressing the key

you return to

Select a menu item directly with the navigation keys gation key to enter the submenu.

or

and press the navi-

Go on moving in the same way through the operating tree until you have reached the information you are looking for. To move back one level, press the navigation key To move back menu item, press the navigation key Be pressing the key
ESC

. .

you return to the next higher level.

40

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Operation of SIPROTEC Devices from the Operator Panel

3.6.3

Setting Addresses in the Bay Unit

The central unit can only communicate with the bay units if the setting of the substation address, the feeder address and the device address in each bay unit matches the corresponding IEC addresses in the DIGSI Manager. You can for this initialize the bay units with the DIGSI software or, as an alternative, set the addresses on the operator panel of the bay unit. To set the device address on the operator panel of a bay unit: Note The parameter 7201 DEVICE ADD. is only displayed with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. Use the navigation keys or to navigate to the menu item 7200 PC/SYSTEM INTERFACES, and the navigation key to go on to the submenu for the parameter 7201 DEVICE ADD. (see Figure 3-5, page 42). Press the
ENTER

key and enter the password F3F1F3F1F3F1.

Confirm with the ENTER key. The password is accepted, and the message Passw. accepted appears in the display. Confirm 2 more times with the
ENTER

key. The display now changes into edit mode. or the key.

Set the correct device address using the

Press the ENTER key followed by F1 . The device address that you have entered is now accepted and stored.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

41

Getting Started

7200 PC/SYSTEM INTERFACES

7201 DEVICE ADD. 1

ENTER

Enter password
ENTER

Passw. accepted

ENTER

ENTER

7201 DEVICE ADD. 1 CHANGE MODE

ESC

F1

Figure 3-5 Operator menu for setting the device address in the bay units

To change the substation address or the feeder address from the operator panel of the bay unit, go to the parameters 7202 FEEDER ADD. (feeder address) or to 7203 SUBST. ADD. (substation address) and proceed as described above.

3.6.4

Adjusting the Display Contrast

Note The factory setting of the contrast for the integrated LC display can only be changed in the central unit. A higher contrast, for instance, makes the display more easily readable when viewed from a flat angle. Do not change the default setting by more than 1 or 2 steps, since with the contrast set too low or too high it may become impossible to read the display and thus to operate the central unit. Proceed as follows: Using the navigation keys, select MAIN MENU PARAMETERS SETUP/ EXTRAS Contrast Press the ENTER key. The current setting appears in a text box, with a blinking text insertion cursor.

42

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Operation of SIPROTEC Devices from the Operator Panel

Overwrite the setting using the numeric keys. A higher numeric value means a higher contrast and thus a darker image. Confirm your change with the
SETUP/EXTRAS -------------------Date/Time Clock Setup Serial Ports Device-ID MLFB/Version >Contrast 06/06 > > > > > > 1 2 3 4 5 6 ENTER

key.

ENTER

SETUP/EX 06/06 -------------------22 MLFB/Ve n > Contrast >

5 6

Figure 3-6 Operator menu for setting the display contrast

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

43

Getting Started

3.7

Storage
If parts of the system are not used immediately, they can be stored after verification of the rated data. The following storage conditions should be observed: SIPROTEC devices and associated assemblies should be stored in a dry and clean place, For storage of devices or related spare modules the applicable temperature range is between 25 C and +70 C (Chapter 9.2.16, page 316). To avoid premature aging of the electrolyte capacitors in the power supply, a temperature range of +10 C to +35 C (+50 F to +95 F) is recommended for storage. The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice buildup. If the system is to be stored for an extended period of time, the components (bay units and central unit power supply unit) should be connected to auxiliary voltage for one or two days approximately every two years to regenerate the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply. The same procedure should be followed before installing these devices. Under extreme climatic conditions (tropics), preheating is achieved at the same time, and condensation is prevented. The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.

44

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Configuration

This chapter describes how to use DIGSI to configure the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection on your PC. First you must create central units and bay units in DIGSI Manager. Then open the central unit in the DIGSI Manager and start the DIGSI Plant Configuration. As next step you will use the DIGSI Plant Configuration to draw and parameterize a complete substation. And last but not least you will assign the bay units to the substation. After that you can open the configured substation chart in the DIGSI Plant Visualization. The Plant Visualization gives an on-line overview of the current measured values (restraint currents, differential currents, feeder currents) and of the current status of the switchgear. Chapter 6.6, page 241 will tell you how to handle the Plant Visualization.

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8

Creating a Project Inserting Central Unit / Bay Units Plant Configuration Assigning Bay Units Marshalling Settings Concluding the Configuration Configuration Notes

46 47 49 61 63 70 79 81

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

45

Configuration

4.1

Creating a Project
When configuring with DIGSI you must first create a new project. To create a new project you must: Start DIGSI Manager. Open the dialog box File New. Specify the project name and its filing location. The project window will open upon that.

Figure 4-1 Project window after the creation of a new project

46

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Inserting Central Unit / Bay Units

4.2

Inserting Central Unit / Bay Units

In the next step you will insert the central unit and the bay units into the structure of the project. To insert the central unit into the project structure you must: Open the context menu in the project window of DIGSI Manager and open the Device Catalog.

Figure 4-2 Device Catalog

Switch to the directory 7SS522 in the Device Catalog and drag the object V4.6 for the version, the left mouse button depressed, to the desired position within the project structure. After you have released the left mouse button, the dialog box Properties - SIPROTEC 4 device opens with the tab MLFB. In this tab you can specify the model of the central unit by selecting the corresponding order number (MLFB).

Figure 4-3 Dialog box Properties - SIPROTEC 4 device, Tab MLFB

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

47

Configuration

To insert the bay units into the project structure you must: Switch to the directory 7SS523 in the Device Catalog and drag the object V3.2 for the version, the left mouse button depressed, to the desired position within the project structure. This object represents a bay unit. After you have released the left mouse button, the dialog box Properties - SIPROTEC 3 device opens with the tab MLFB. In this tab you can specify the model of the bay unit by selecting the corresponding order number (MLFB). Repeat the procedure until you have inserted all desired bay units into the project structure.

48

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Configuration

4.3

Plant Configuration
In the last section you have created central units and bay units in DIGSI Manager. This will be the basis for you to configure the substation in the next step. The DIGSI Plant Configuration is used for the configuration. The DIGSI Plant Configuration is a tool which enables you to compile all information items required by the central unit. First you will create a graphic model of the substation. You do so by drawing busbars and lines in a chart and add isolator switches, circuit breakers and transformers. Afterwards you will assign the individual components to bays and bay units via dialog boxes. Your entries will be saved in the setting group and together with it they are transmitted to the central unit. In the next step you will assign the bay units you have created in the DIGSI Plant Configuration to the bay units created in the Device Manager (see Chapter 4.4, page 61).

4.3.1

How to Proceed
The next paragraphs will depict the basic procedure by the example of the configuration of a double busbar with bus coupler. In order to draw and parameterize the substation you must: Start the DIGSI Plant Configuration (Chapter 4.3.2, page 50). Note Standard bays such as bus couplers and feeder bays are already available as Typicals. You can find Typicals and Templates in the folder SSTypicals. The DIGSI Plant Configuration interprets the data correctly. Insert Typicals anywhere you need them in the chart (Chapter 4.3.8, page 59). Draw the required busbars and name them (Chapter 4.3.3, page 52). Insert bay names to define the required bays (Chapter 4.3.4, page 54). Insert dynamic elements of the libraries into the substation chart (Chapter 4.3.5, page 55). Link the dynamic elements with the busbars. Use lines and connections for this purpose (Chapter 4.3.6, page 57). Insert static text e.g., for comments (Chapter 4.3.7, page 59). Create Typicals for frequently used substation components and insert them into the chart where needed (Chapter 4.3.8, page 59). Save the substation chart and exit the DIGSI Plant Configuration (Chapter 4.3.9, page 60). We will illustrate the configuration by the example of a double busbar with bus coupler.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

49

Configuration

4.3.2

Starting the Plant Configuration

To start the DIGSI Plant configuration you must: Select the central unit 7SS522 in the project window of DIGSI Manager and open the context menu via right mouse click. Apply the command Open object. The Open device dialog box opens. You can also open the dialog box by double-clicking the central unit 7SS522.

Figure 4-4 Open Device dialog box

Select the connection type and confirm with OK. The DIGSI Device Configuration opens. Unfold the directory Settings in the function selection of the DIGSI Device Configuration and select the object Substation configuration.

Figure 4-5 Start screen of the DIGSI Device Configuration

Right-click the object to open the context menu and apply the command Open object. The DIGSI Plant Configuration opens. You can also open the DIGSI Plant Configuration by double-clicking the object Substation configuration.

50

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Configuration

Note The Plant Configuration and the Plant Visualization cannot run simultaneously. Close the Plant Visualization before you start the Plant Configuration.

Figure 4-6 Start screen of the DIGSI Plant Configuration

Note For a detailed instruction on how to use the DIGSI Plant Configuration, please refer to the corresponding on-line help. The following paragraphs describe the basic method for drawing and parameterizing a substation.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

51

Configuration

4.3.3

Drawing Busbars
Busbars can be drawn into the substation chart in vertical or horizontal direction. A busbar can also be a combination of vertical and horizontal lines. For this purpose place the starting point of the busbar you want to draw on the end point of an existing busbar. The two lines will merge to form a single busbar. Thus you can draw e.g., Ushaped busbars. Busbars can also be T-shaped. For this purpose place the starting point of the busbar you want to draw on an already existing busbar. Again the two lines will merge to form a single busbar. A connection will be inserted automatically in the junction point of the two busbars. Note You can use templates for drawing a new chart. Some templates are installed on your computer together with DIGSI. You can also save your own charts as templates. You will find further information in the on-line help of the DIGSI Plant Configuration. To draw a busbar you must: Click Tools Draw busbar. Alternatively, you can click the bar. button on the tool-

Click the place in the chart which is to be the starting point of the busbar. Hold the mouse button pressed down. Draw the mouse pointer, the mouse button depressed, to the position that will mark the end point of the busbar. Release the mouse button. To modify the length of a busbar you must: Click Tools Select on the menu bar. Alternatively, you can click the the toolbar. button on

Click on the starting point or on the end point of the corresponding busbar and hold the mouse button depressed. Move the mouse pointer, the mouse button depressed, in horizontal or vertical direction depending on the orientation of the busbar. Release the mouse button. Note You delete a busbar by making its starting point and end point coincident. You can thus also erase busbar segments that are open at one end.

52

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Configuration

Figure 4-7 DIGSI Plant Configuration, Drawing busbars - Example

To name the busbar you must: Right-click the busbar. Click Object properties in the context menu. The dialog box Object Properties - Busbar opens.

Figure 4-8 Dialog box Object Properties - Busbar

Enter a busbar name of not more than 4 characters into the box Name short. This name will be used to characterize the associated information in the Configuration Matrix. Enter a busbar name of not more than 8 characters into the box Name long. This name will be displayed as movable text within the chart. The long name will also show in the measured value boxes of the busbar.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

53

Configuration

Click Select to choose the on-line colour of the busbar. The Plant Visualization will show the attachment of the feeders and measuring systems to the corresponding busbar in the colour you specify here. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box.

4.3.4

Defining Bays
Isolators, transformers and circuit breakers must be assigned to a certain bay. A bay in the substation chart is represented by a bay name. First you insert a wildcard for the bay name. Next you specify a short name and a long name for the bay name. To insert a wildcard for the bay name you must: Click Tools Insert Bay Name on the menu bar. Alternatively, you can click the button on the toolbar. Click the position on the substation chart where you wish to insert the bay name. A wildcard in the form of an asterisk is inserted. Click on the desired positions to insert further wildcards for bay names. Note After you have released the mouse button, the program verifies whether the wildcard superposes other elements. If this is the case, you will receive a corresponding message and the wildcard will not be inserted into the substation chart. To specify the short text and long text for a bay name you must: Right-click the wildcard in question. Click Object properties in the context menu. Or you can double-click the wildcard. Both methods will open the dialog box Object properties - Bay Name.

Figure 4-9 Dialog box Object Properties - Bay Name

Enter a bay name of not more than 4 characters into the box Short text. This name will be used to characterize the associated information in the Configuration Matrix. Enter a bay name of not more than eight characters into the box Long text. This name will be displayed as movable text within the chart of the substation. The long text will also be displayed in the measured value box of a transformer which is assigned to that bay. As you can give identical names to different bays, each long text is complemented by an automatically assigned number. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box.

54

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Configuration

Figure 4-10 DIGSI Plant Configuration, Defining bays - Example

4.3.5

Inserting Dynamic Elements

Static and dynamic elements are inserted into the chart from libraries. Dynamic elements such as isolators, circuit breakers and transformers usually have several possible states. Each state is represented by a separate symbol. Static and dynamic elements are filed in different libraries. The following three libraries exist: DIN, SIPROTEC and User-defined. To insert a dynamic library element you must: Open the dialog box Select Library via the menu item Library > Select Library and select a dynamic library. Select the element in the library you wish to insert in the substation chart. Click the position on the substation chart where you wish to insert the element. The element you have selected in the library will be pasted in the specified location. To insert additional elements of the same type into the chart, click the places where you wish to insert them. . Note After you have released the mouse button, the program verifies whether the element superposes other dynamic elements. If this is the case, you will receive a corresponding message and the new element will not be inserted into the substation chart.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

55

Configuration

Note A bay (feeder bay or bus coupler) must comprise at least one isolator, one current transformer an exactly one circuit breaker.

Figure 4-11 DIGSI Plant Configuration - Inserting dynamic elements - Example

Isolators, transformers and circuit breakers have properties whose values must be set individually. To specify the property values of a dynamic element you must: Right-click a single element. Click Object properties in the context menu. A properties dialog opens for the selected element. Make the required settings. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. Note Further information on setting the element property values can be found in the on-line help of the DIGSI Plant Configuration.

56

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Configuration

4.3.6

Connecting Dynamic Elements to the Busbars

Dynamic elements can be connected to busbars via lines.

4.3.6.1

Inserting Lines Lines can connect elements such as isolators, transformers, circuit breakers and lines with each other and to a busbar. Lines can be drawn into the substation chart in vertical or horizontal direction. A line can also be a combination of vertical and horizontal lines. For this purpose you place the starting point of the line you want to draw on the end point of an existing line. Unlike busbars the individual line segments cannot be merged to a single line. They can still be edited individually. Lines may also be linked in T-shape. For this purpose place the starting point of the line you want to draw on an already existing line. A connection will be inserted automatically in the junction point of the two lines. To draw a line you must: Click Tools Draw Line. Alternatively, you can click the button on the toolbar. Click the place in the chart which is to be the starting point of the line. Hold the mouse button pressed down. Draw the mouse pointer, the mouse button depressed, to the position that will mark the end point of the line. Release the mouse button. To modify the length of a line you must: Click Tools Select on the menu bar. Alternatively, you can click the the chart toolbar. button on

Click on the starting point or on the end point of the corresponding line and hold the mouse button depressed. Move the mouse pointer, the mouse button depressed, in horizontal or vertical direction depending on the orientation of the line. Release the mouse button. Note A line is deleted by making its starting point and end point coincident.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

57

Configuration

4.3.6.2

Inserting a Connection Lines or busbars that cross in the chart are not yet connected electrically. To this end you must insert an additional connection in the junction point. Such a connection is indicated by a small square. By manually adding a connection each line is separated into two autonomous lines. When you draw lines and busbars so that they meet as a T, a connection will be automatically inserted in the junction point. Unlike the manual insertion an automatically added connection does not split lines and busbars. To insert a connection you must: Click Tools Insert Connection on the menu bar. Alternatively, you can click the button on the toolbar. In the chart click on the position of a busbar or line where you wish to insert a connection. To delete a manually added connection you must: Draw a new busbar across the connected busbar sections if you want to delete the connection between two busbars. The connection and the busbar on the right-hand side or the lower of the two busbars is deleted. Draw a new line across the connected line sections if you want to delete the connection between two lines. The connection and the line on the right-hand side or the lower of the two lines is deleted.

Figure 4-12 DIGSI Plant Configuration - Inserting lines and connections - Example

58

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Configuration

4.3.7

Inserting Static Text

You can use static text to give additional short information within the chart. A static text may be composed of not more than twenty characters. To insert static text you must: Click ToolsInsert Text. Alternatively, you can click the toolbar. button on the chart

Click the position on the substation chart where you wish to insert the text. A text input box opens. Write the desired text into this box. That finished click the green check mark to the right of the text box. The text will be placed left-aligned to the selected insertion point.

Figure 4-13 DIGSI Plant Configuration - Inserting static text - Example

4.3.8

Creating and Inserting Typicals.

An arrangement of different elements in the substation chart can be saved as a socalled Typical. This Typical may then be inserted anywhere else in the substation chart or into other charts. Note Unlike a Typical a Template represents an entire substation chart which may be composed of Typicals. Templates may also be saved for reuse.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

59

Configuration

To save elements as Typical you must: Select all elements in the chart you wish to save together as Typical. Click Edit Save Graphic/Typical as on the menu bar. The Save as dialog box opens. Enter a name for the Typical file. A Typical file has the extension .sst. Select the location where you want to save the Typical file. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. The elements are saved to a file in the form of a Typical. To insert a Typical you must: Click Edit Insert Graphic/Typical from on the menu bar. The Open dialog box pops up. Select the drive of the Typical file from the Browse drop-down list box. Select a folder in the drop-down list box. You will find the supplied template files in the folder SSTypicals. All available files with the extension .sst are displayed in the box. Select the name of the Typical file you wish to open. Click OK to open the Typical file and to close the dialog box. Left-click into the chart to insert the Typical.

4.3.9

Saving the Substation Chart

You must explicitly save the modifications you have made to a chart. To save the changes in the active chart you must: Click Chart Save on the menu bar. Alternatively, you can click the button on the Standard toolbar.

60

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Assigning Bay Units

4.4

Assigning Bay Units

In the previous step you have drawn and parameterized your entire substation with the DIGSI Plant Configuration. Thus you have also configured bay units. Subsequently you must assign these bay units to the bay units in the Device Manager (see Chapter 4.2, page 47). Then you will be able to open the configured chart of the substation in the Plant Visualization and there you will see the present changes of the measured values and switch states. Furthermore, the central unit will not start without the assignment of the bay units. To assign bay units you must: Open the folder Settings in the DIGSI Device Configuration and select the function Bay unit allocation.

Figure 4-14 DIGSI Device Configuration - The folder Settings

Right-click the object to open the context menu and apply the command Open object. You can also double-click the function Bay unit allocation. The Bay unit assignment dialog box opens. The left column is a list of all bay units configured with the DIGSI Plant Configuration.

Figure 4-15 DIGSI Device Configuration - Dialog box for Bay unit assignment

Assign the created bay units in the right column to the configured bay units. In each row of the right column select a bay unit you have created in the Device Manager

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

61

Configuration

from the drop-down list. Bay units that are already assigned will not appear in the drop-down list. If there are not enough bay units available, you must create new ones in the device manager (see Chapter 4.2, page 47). Note You can print the assignment of the bay units via the menu File Print. The printout contains the number (1 to 48), the configured virtual bay unit and the physically existing bay unit created in the Device Manager.

62

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Marshalling

4.5

Marshalling
In the previous step you have assigned the configured bay units to the bay units created in the Device Manager. Next you will allocate information items to the input and output components of 7SS52 V4 such as binary inputs and binary outputs or LEDs. Information items can be indications, commands, measured values and metered values. You will not only determine the allocation itself but also the type of the allocation. An indication may for example be allocated to an LED in latched or unlatched mode. Also user-defined logic function can be the source of and the destination for information items. The assignment of information items to sources and destinations is called marshalling.

4.5.1
4.5.1.1

Marshalling Information Items of the Central Unit

Allocable Information The D-CPU communication module features 5 binary inputs (BI 1 to 5). The EAZ input/output module features 7 binary inputs (BI 6 to 12). The binary inputs are freely allocable. The can be activated with or without voltage. Note Allocate the indication >EF charact.(FNo. 10478/CU) for the earth fault characteristic to the binary input 1 to 5 since these binary inputs process by 1 to 2 ms faster than the binary inputs 6 to 12. Event data and binary input data are pre-allocated (see Table A-21, page 385). The Chapter A.9, page 362 gives an overview of all possible indications with their function number (FNo.).

Binary inputs

Binary outputs and LED indicators

The central unit features 16 alarm relays and 32 LED indicators. Any number of annunciations can be marshalled to a binary output (group annunciation). The most common group annunciations with their own function number are already available in the system (see Chapter A.11, page 378). Group annunciations that are not available by default are created by allocating the different function numbers to a relay and/or to an LED. Existing allocations may have to be deleted beforehand. Each annunciation may be allocated to up to 10 relays or LEDs. The presetting of the signal relays and of the LEDs is identical upon delivery and can be looked up in the tables A-22, page 385 and A-23, page 386. The Chapter A.9, page 362 gives an overview of all possible indications with their function number (FNo.).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

63

Configuration

4.5.1.2

Marshalling To marshal information items of the central unit via the Configuration Matrix you must: Note Bay units can only be allocated if they have been instanciated by the assignment of library elements (see Chapter 4.3.5, page 55) and by saving the substation chart Chapter 4.3.9, page 60.

Opening the Configuration Matrix

Open the central unit in DIGSI Manager. In the function selection of the DIGSI Device Configuration right-click the object Masking I/O (Configuration Matrix). Click Open object in the context menu. Or double-click the object. Both methods will open the Configuration Matrix.

Figure 4-16 Partial view of the Configuration Matrix

Changing the view

Maximize the Configuration Matrix In the toolbar select the option Indications and commands only from the left of the two drop-down list boxes. From the right drop-down list box of the toolbar select the option Configured Information. Click View Expand All on the menu bar. Double-click the command button Long text on the upper bar of the Configuration Matrix to hide this column. For a detailed description, please refer to the SIPROTEC System Description /1/, and to the DIGSI on-line help. Information of the type Indications and Commands, allocated to one source and /or destination, are now displayed depending on the selected filter. You will recognize an allocation by the character in the intersecting cell of an information row and of a source or destination column. Such characters will be called tags (flags) in the following. Information items are row-wise comprised to groups. The group is indicated by the command buttons on the left border of the Configuration Matrix. These command buttons are also called group buttons.

64

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Marshalling

Changing Allocations

Right-click the cell containing a tag (flag). The context menu shows you all tags with their meaning which are possible for this combination of the information with the source or the destination. You will always be offered the tag _ (not configured). Click this entry in the context menu. The cell is now empty. To find out whether an allocation is possible, place the mouse pointer on the intersecting cell of the information row and the source or destination column. If the mouse pointer turns into a prohibitive sign, you cannot allocate the information to the selected destination or source. If the mouse pointer does not change, you can allocate the information.

Inserting information items

The Configuration Matrix contains several predefined information items. They can be complemented by user-defined information items. You can insert such user-defined information items into the Configuration Matrix by using the Information Catalog. Click Insert Information or View Information Catalog on the menu bar. The Information Catalog opens.

Figure 4-17 Information Catalog

The Information Catalog is basically structured like the tree view of the DIGSI 4 Device Configuration. Click the plus sign before a folder or double-click a folder symbol to access a lower hierarchy level within the catalog structure. Double-click successively Commands without FeedBack und Single Point. Select the name of an information item. Drag the information item out of the Information Catalog onto a group button on the left border of the Configuration Matrix. After you have released the mouse button, a new information item is inserted into the corresponding group.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

65

Configuration

4.5.2
4.5.2.1

Marshalling Bay Unit Information

Allocable Information The bay unit 7SS523 features 20 binary inputs which are designated BINARY INPUT 1 to BINARY INPUT 20, bay unit 7SS525 features 10 binary inputs. The binary inputs are marshalled in the address block 6100/BU. It can be selected for each binary input function whether it is to operate as make circuit or as break circuit. A - Make Circuit: The input acts as a make-contact element meaning that the control voltage at the input terminal activates the allocated function; R - Break circuit The input acts as a break-contact element meaning that the control voltage at the input terminals resets the function, the function is active without control voltage. Note Marshalling a logic function to 2 or more binary inputs is not supported (no interconnection). A logic function must be allocated to one binary input. It is, however, possible to allocate different functions to one binary input. Table A-24, page 387 and Table A-30, page 391 shows the default assignment of the binary inputs upon delivery. Chapter A.10, page 372 gives an overview of the allocable input functions with their function numbers (FNo.).

Binary inputs

Signal relay

The bay unit has a freely allocable signalling output labelled SIGNAL RELAY 1. The allocation is made under 6201/BU. Several logic signalling functions (up to 20) can be marshalled to the signal output. Indications starting with > are the direct checkbacks of the binary inputs and are identical to them. They appear for as long as the corresponding binary input is active. The default setting of the signal relay is Bay o of Serv. (FNo. 7640/BU). Chapter A.10, page 372 contains the complete list of all possible signalling function with the function numbers (FNo.).

LED indicators

The bay unit 7SS523 features 18 LEDs for optical event indication. There are 16 LEDs which are freely allocable labelled LED 1 to LED 16. It is possible to assign several indications to each LED and also one indication to several LEDs. Besides the specification of the logic function it is indicated whether the indication is in latched mode m or in unlatchted mode nm. The ex-factory setting of the LEDs can be looked up in Table A-29, page 390. The default setting of the LEDs 1 to 16 can be displayed upon selection and can also be modified.

66

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Marshalling

The allocable signalling functions can be looked up in Chapter A.10, page 372 and match the signal relay functions. Trip relay The bay unit features 5 trip relays which are labelled TRIP RELAY 1 to 5. Several functions can be marshalled to each trip relay. Also each logic function can be allocated to several trip relays. The trip relays are preferably designed for the output of the TRIP command and of the transfer trip command. Depending on the plant specification and requirements they can also be used as additional signal relays. The default functions of the device upon delivery are comprised in Table A-28, page 389 and Table A-32, page 392. The functions stated in Chapter A.10, page 372 can also be marshalled to the trip relays. 4.5.2.2 Marshalling Unlike the central unit the bay units are marshalled via dialog boxes and not via a configuration matrix. To perform allocations for a bay unit you must: Open the bay unit in DIGSI Manager. Open the dialog box Marshalling.

Figure 4-18 Marshalling the bay units - the dialog box Marshalling

In this dialog box you will first select a group of physical components, for example binary inputs. For this purpose, select the corresponding designation in the Function column. Subsequently click Configure.... A second dialog box opens. It shows the names of all individual components of the selected group.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

67

Configuration

Figure 4-19 Marshalling the bay units - the dialog box Marshalling -

Now select the name of the component to which you want to allocate one or several indications. Subsequently click Configure.... A third dialog box opens. It gives an overview of how many indications of the selected component can basically be allocated and which indications are already marshalled. The display texts of these indications are shown in the column Status. Those allocating positions that are still empty are in the same column marked with the entry Not allocated.

Figure 4-20 Marshalling the bay units - the dialog box Binary input 1

To allocate a further message select one of the entries marked Not allocated. To modify an existing allocation select the display text of the marshalled message. Subsequently click Configure.... Another dialog box opens. It offers you the selection of the display texts of all indications which can be marshalled to this component.

68

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Marshalling

Figure 4-21 Marshalling the bay units - dialog box 6101 Binary input 1

In the selection box select the display text of the messages you wish to assign to the selected component. If this component is a binary input or an LED, you must select an additional indication from the drop-down list box. Subsequently click OK. The active dialog box closes and you return to the previous dialog box. The display of the allocated messages is updated according to your selection. Repeat the procedure to perform further allocations. When you have made all allocations for the current component click Close. The active dialog box closes and you return to the previous dialog box. You can now select a further component if needed. If not, click Close. The active dialog box closes and you return to the dialog box Marshalling. You can now select a further component group for configuration. To finish the process, click Close. Next you will be prompted whether to save the modified settings to files. Click Yes to save the data. Click No to discard the changes. To neither save nor discard the modified settings click Cancel. In this case the dialog box Marshalling remains opened.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

69

Configuration

4.6

Settings
After you have used the Configuration Matrix to assign sources and destinations to the information items, you can configure the settings. For detailed information on how to parameterize SIPROTEC 4 devices, please read the SIPROTEC System Description, /1/. The settings of certain functions (see Chapter 5.10, page 174 and following sections) can only be configured for the bay units (PC linked to central unit or bay unit). The procedure is almost identical to the method for SIPROTEC 4 device described below. For further information on how to parameterize SIPROTEC 3 devices, please refer to the HTML on-line help of the DIGSIDevice Configuration for SIPROTEC 3 devices.

Changing setting values

To change a setting value you must: Double-click the object Setting Group. The dialog box Setting Group is displayed. It gives an overview of protection functions. The individual function designations are displayed with a function number. Select for example the entry Power System Data and click Settings. The dialog box Power System Data opens. It enables you to set all parameters of this function. Change the value of a text parameter. For this purpose click in the corresponding box in the column Value. A drop-down list box opens from which you select the new setting. Subsequently, change the value of a decimal parameter. For this purpose click in the corresponding box in the column Value. The mouse cursors changes into an input cursor. Now you can enter the new numerical value. The unit of a value is assigned automatically. Click OK. The dialog box Power System Data is closed. Afterwards close the dialog box Setting Group by clicking OK.

Apply settings

To apply the changes to the setting values click Apply. This command button is active when at least one setting value has been changed. The dialog box remains opened. If, however, you click OK, the values are applied and the dialog box closes. In both cases the values are stored in the memory of the computer. The setting values are not yet saved to the setting group. If you want to know how to save your settings, please refer to the device manual DIGSI Device Configuration, Chapter 5.2, page 111.

Transmitting setting values to the device

When you are working Online, the command button DIGSI Device is active if you have at least changed one setting value. Click DIGSI Device, to transfer the changed settings to 7SS52 V4. The detailed procedure of transmitting setting values are described in the device manual DIGSI Device Configuration, Chapter 5.2, page 111.

70

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings

4.6.1

Serial Ports
The central unit of 7SS52 V4 features one or more serial ports: one operating interface integrated in the front panel, also called PC port, and one rear service port and system port for connection to a control center. Communication via this port is subject to certain agreements concerning the device identification, the transmission format and the transmission rate. These ports are configured via the DIGSI communication software. Click Settings on the navigation window. Then click Serial ports in the data window and enter your specific data into the dialog box that opens (Figure 4-22, page 71). Depending on the model of the device, the dialog box has different tabs with setting options for the corresponding interface parameters which you can access successively by mouse click.

Figure 4-22 DIGSI, settings of the PC port

Serial PC port

Indicate on the first tab sheet (Serial port on PC) the communication port of your PC connected to 7SS52 V4 (COM 1 or COM 2 etc.). You do not have to enter manually the settings for the data format and for the baudrate. You can take over the values from the tab Operator interface or, if available, from the tab Service interface. In doing so DIGSI reads out important settings directly from the interface and the corresponding boxes are grayed (see Figure 4-22, page 71). Or you can enter individual values at the option Independent of device. The tab sheets Operator interface and Service interface provide setting options for the data format, the baudrate and also for the IEC link address and maximum message gap (example given in Figure 4-23, page 72).

PC Port and service port

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

71

Configuration

Figure 4-23 DIGSI, setting options of the service port Example

Within an IEC bus, a unique IEC address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 IEC addresses are available for each IEC bus. Enter the IEC link address of this device into the Address box. The maximum message gap must only be entered if the device is to communicate via one of the ports by means of a modem. The specified time is the admissible maximum duration of transmission gaps during message transfer. Transmission gaps occur during modem operation and are caused by data compression, fault correction and differing baudrate. If the transmission quality between the modems is good, we recommend the setting 1.0 s. If modem connections are poor you should increase this value. High values slow down communication in case of transmission errors. If a PC is connected directly, the Max. message gap can be set to 0.0 s. Note Do not use the PC port for the communication via modem! For the communication via modem use the service port. Other ports In the other tabs you can enter your specific settings and addresses for device identification or check the values set by default. The device address is used by the control center to unambiguously identify each device. It must be unique for each device as otherwise it cannot be assigned in the overall system. For further information on the port setting, please read the SIPROTEC System Description, /1/. The idle state of fibre optic connection is set to Light OFF by default. You can change the setting for the idle state in the tab of the interface settings (see Figure 4-24, page 73).

Idle state of fibre optic connection

72

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings

Figure 4-24 Settings for a fibre optic interface

Retrieving and modifying the port settings via the operator panel

The most important port settings can be read out and some of them also modified via the operator panel of the actual device. You can access the screen for setting the ports from the MAIN MENU via Parameter Setup/Extras Serial ports. Below the heading of the menu (Serial Ports) you can select the PC port, the system port and the service port via the arrow key . Press the key to access the submenu of each port. The display and the option of parameterizing directly at the device are identical for the PC port and for the service port. We will take the example of the PC port (Figure 4-25, page 73).

PC Port 01/04 --------------------Phys.Addres >254 >Baudrate 19200 bauds Parity 8E1 Gaps 0.0s Figure 4-25 Reading and setting the PC port via the operator panel of the device.

The type of the port(s) depends on the device model and variant and may also miss entirely. While it is possible to modify the data of the PC port and the service port at the device, the data of the system port(s) can only be read out at the device. In addition to the parameters already mentioned for the PC port and the service port, the idle state for fibre optic connection can be read out here (see Figure 4-26, page 74). In case of a wired interface you will read not existent here.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

73

Configuration

PC Port 01/02 -------------------->IEC608705103 > 1

IEC 608705103 ------------------>Phys.Address 254 >Baudrate 9600 bauds Parity 8E1 Gaps 0.0s OFF-Sig. Light OFF

Figure 4-26 Reading out the setting values of the IEC 60870 port in the operator panel of the device.

Bay units

To enable correct communication of the PC and the bay units via the system port, some interface settings may have to be verified or changed. To verify or change the settings for the PC port and for the system port you must: Right-click Configuration in the list view. Click Configure in the context menu. You can also double-click Configuration. Both methods will open the dialog box Operating System Configuration. In the column Function select the entry PC AND SYSTEM INTERFACES. Subsequently click Configure. A second dialog box opens It shows the names of all parameters together with an address and the currently set value. Select a parameter to change its value and then click Configure. A third dialog box opens It offers you possible values for the selected parameter. Select the desired value. Subsequently click OK. The current dialog box closes and you return to the previous dialog box. The display in the column Value is updated according to your selection. Repeat the procedure for further parameters. Click Close to finish the procedure. The current dialog box closes and you return to the dialog box Operating System Configuration. Click Close. Next you will be prompted whether to save the modified settings to files. Click Yes to save the data. Click No to discard the changes. To neither save nor discard the modified settings click Cancel. In this case the dialog box Operating System Configuration remains opened. Note If you change the device address of a bay unit, you must reassign the bay unit in the DIGSI Device Manager (see Chapter 4.4, page 61) to enable the configured substation chart to be opened in the Plant Visualization and there to display the latest changes of the measured values and switch states.

74

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings

4.6.2

Date/Clock Management
The integrated date/clock management enables the exact timely assignment of events e.g., those in the operational annunciations and fault annunciations or in the lists of the minimum/maximum values. The time can be influenced by the internal clock RTC (Real Time Clock), external synchronisation sources (DCF77, IRIG B, SyncBox, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60850), external minute pulses via binary input. Note Upon delivery of the device the internal clock RTC is always set by default as synchronisation source, regardless of whether the device is equipped with a system port or not. If the time synchronisation is to be accomplished by an external source, you must select the latter.

Time synchronization

You find the parameters for the clock management in DIGSI at Settings Time Synchronization (Figure 4-27, page 75).

Figure 4-27 The window Settings in DIGSI Example

Double-click Time Synchronization. The Time Synchronization & Time Format dialog box opens (Figure 4-28, page 76).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

75

Configuration

Figure 4-28 Time Synchronization & Time Format dialog box in DIGSI Example

Specify here the factors for influencing the internal clock management. You can choose between the following operating modes:
Table 4-1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Operating modes of the clock management Operating mode Internal Clock IEC 60870-5-103 Time signal IRIG B Time signal DCF77 Time signal Sync. Box External Impulse via Binary Input NTP (IEC 61850) Comments Internal synchronization via RTC (default) External synchronization via IEC 60870-5-103system interface External synchronization via IRIG B External synchronization via the time signal DCF77 External synchronization via the time signal SIMEASSynch.Box External synchronization with impulse via binary input External synchronization via system interface (IEC 61850)

Due to the internal buffer battery the RTC continues to run even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off temporarily. RTC is always the first synchronization source for the internal clock management when the device is switched on or after a failure of the auxiliary voltage regardless of the set operating mode. In the operating mode Internal Clock the internal clock management uses only RTC as the synchronization source. It can also be changed manually. The manual setting of date and time is described in Chapter 6.3.7, page 231. If one of the external operating modes is selected, only the parameterized synchronization source will be used. If it fails, the internal clock will continue in unsynchronized mode. If the time synchronization is to be accomplished via the control center, the option IEC 60870-5-103 or NTP (IEC 61850) must be selected (Figure 4-28, page 76). For the operating modes with time signal (radio clock) you must observe that it may take up to 3 minutes after the start or return of the reception until the received time has been safely decoded. Only then will the internal clock management be synchronized.

76

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings

For the time signal IRIG B the year must be set manually as this standard does not include a year number. Note If you have by mistake entered a year smaller than 1991 for IRIG B, the year will be set to 1991 during the first synchronization. If the synchronization takes place by external pulse via binary input: From 30 seconds on the time will be rounded up to zero of the next minute when the positive pulse edge arrives. If the seconds have not yet reached 30, they are rounded off to zero of the previous minute. The signal is not monitored, each pulse takes immediate effect on the clock management. Synchronization offset The parameter Synchronization offset (Offset to time signal) can be used to adapt the synchronization time delivered by the radio clock receiver to the local time (time zone). The adjustable maximum offset is: 23 h 59 min = 1439 min. The tolerance time for faults (Fault indication after) indicates how long a cyclic synchronization may be missing until the time is considered faulted. An external or internal synchronization is usually performed in minute intervals. (The synchronization by external pulse via binary input is an exception. Its pulse may arrive in intervals of several minutes). Therefore, this parameter must always be at least 2 minutes. If the conditions for reception are unfavourable for the radio clock, the transition to the state error can be further delayed. Changing the operating mode When changing the operating mode, the corresponding hardware will switch to the other synchronization source after one second at latest. The cyclic synchronization is thus first interrupted and the clock is considered faulted, as is the case for a start, until the new synchronization source takes effect. If the synchronization offset is changed in the operating modes with time signal and if the year is changed in the operating mode IRIG B, the cyclic synchronization will not be lost but a time step will occur. When the offset is changed to the "switching" minute, the time value is displayed with "Clock SyncError on without the synchronization offset and afterwards with "Clock SyncError off with the synchronization offset. Operational indications of the clock management After the indication "Clock SyncError on a time step must be expected. This indication is triggered if: a synchronization fault has lasted for longer than the above mentioned tolerance time or by changing the operating mode. a time step is anticipated afterwards; the message is displayed with the time before the step. The message Clock SyncError off is triggered if: the synchronization has taken effect again (e.g. after faulted reception or radio clock reception); immediately after a time step; this message is displayed with the time after the step, so that conclusions can be drawn as to the magnitude of the step.

Fault indication after tolerance time

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

77

Configuration

Time format

Either the European time format (DD.MM.YYYY) or the US format (MM/DD/YYYY) can be specified for the device display.

78

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Concluding the Configuration

4.7

Concluding the Configuration

Conclude the configuration by using a report to verify the allocation of the parameters and transmit the parameters to the central unit or to the bay units. To view a report when exiting the Plant Configuration you must: Click Options Customize... on the menu bar of the DIGSI Plant Configuration. The window Customize opens.

Figure 4-29 Customize window Example

Mark the checkbox Show evaluation protocol when exiting. Subsequently click OK. The evaluation protocol (report) (Figure 4-30, page 79) opens when you exit the Plant Configuration.

Figure 4-30 Evaluation protocol (report) when exiting the configuration Example

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

79

Configuration

Allocation of isolator

The evaluation protocol (report) shows the allocation of isolators as a coded value. The explanation is given in Table 4-2, page 80
Table 4-2 Allocation of isolator Value 0 100...1200 5100...6200 +1...12 +51...62 +10000 +20000 +5000 +30000 +100000

Allocation of isolator isolator not existent BB isolator or "sect. isolator left side" on BB01...BB12 BB isolator or "sect. isolator left side" on TB01...TB12 "sect. isolator right side" on BB01...BB12 "sect. isolator right side" on TB01...TB12 left isolator of 1-bay-coupler right isolator of 1-bay-coupler line isolator transferbus/combined bus isolator isolator always closed

To transmit the modified settings to the central units or to the bay units: Note If you have created new bays on your own in the DIGSI Plant Configuration, you must check whether the report is correct. If you are transmitting the parameters for the first time, you must initialize 7SS52 V4. If you want to know more on this topic, please read the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/. If 7SS52 V4 has already been initialized, click Device on the menu bar and then the menu item DIGSI Device. You will be prompted to enter password No. 7 (parameter set). After you have entered the password and confirmed it with OK, the data will be transmitted and take effect when the transmission to the central unit or the bay units is completed.

80

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Configuration Notes

4.8

Configuration Notes
The 7SS52 V4 can be applied for the protection of busbar configurations with quintuple busbars as a maximum and up to 48 feeders. When configuring the up to 12 bus zones (including up to 4 transfer bus zones) and 12 bus coupler zones, the individual bus zones (BB01 to BB12) or bus coupler zones (TB01 to TB12) are numbered from left to right and from the top to the bottom starting from the first main busbar to the transfer busbar or fourth main busbar. The parameters are assigned automatically by the Plant Configuration and can be verified in the report (see Figure 4-30, page 79).. Note A bay (feeder bay or bus coupler) must comprise at least one isolator, one current transformer an exactly one circuit breaker. 2-bay bus couplers must be parameterized to bay units with successive numbers. Only switchgear or current transformers of the same bay may be assigned to a bay unit. Except sectionalising isolators. An example of a triple busbar with transfer busbars is shown in Figure 4-31, page 82. The corresponding configuration data are collected in Table 4-3, page 83. An example of a double busbar with a combination busbar is shown in Figure 4-32, page 84. The corresponding configuration data are collected in Table 4-4, page 85. Bus coupler zones are bus zones which are used exclusively for connecting bus zones and which have no feeder bays. In most cases they occur in connection with bus couplers. An example is given in Figure 4-32, page 84 (BS1, BS2).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

81

Configuration

1a) inside current transformer (referred to Q7), in the direction of the busbar (referred to Q0) 1b) inside current transformer (referred to Q7), in the direction of the line (referred to Q0) 2) line inside current transformer (referred to Q7)

Figure 4-31 Triple busbar with transfer busbar

82

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Configuration Notes

Table 4-3

Configuration for a triple busbar with transfer busbar ISO.1:Axx ISO.2:Axx ISO.3:Axx ISO.4:Axx ISO.5:Axx CT LOC

Bay: Bay: Type (XX) 01 Feeder bay

BZ1

BZ3

BZ5

BZ7

outgoing isolator

1a) Bus side t. bus 1b) Bus side t. line 2) line side Bus side t. line

02

2-bay coupler 2-bay coupler 2-bay coupler 2-bay coupler Section isolator Feeder bay

BZ1

BZ3

BZ5

not existent

not existent

03

BZ1

BZ3

BZ5

BZ7

not existent

non existent

04

BZ1

BZ3

BZ5

not existent

not existent

Bus side t. line

05

BZ2

BZ4

BZ6

not existent

not existent

Bus side t. line

06

BZ1/BZ2

BZ3/BZ4

BZ5/BZ6

BZ7/BZ8

not existent

non existent

07

BZ2

BZ4

BZ6

BZ8

outgoing isolator

1a) Bus side t. bus 1b) Bus side t. line 2) line side Bus side t. line

08

2-bay coupler 2-bay coupler

BZ2

BZ4

BZ6

not existent

not existent

09

BZ2

BZ4

BZ6

BZ8

not existent

non existent

1a) inside current transformer (referred to Q7), in the direction of the busbar (referred to Q0) 1b) inside current transformer (referred to Q7), in the direction of the line (referred to Q0) 2) line side current transformer (referred to Q7)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

83

Configuration

Figure 4-32 Double busbar with combi-bus

84

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Configuration Notes

Table 4-4

Configuration of a double busbar with combi-bus ISO.1:Axx ISO.2:Axx ISO.3:Axx ISO.4:Axx ISO.5:Axx CT LOC

Bay: Bay Type (xx) 01 1-bay coupler Feeder bay Feeder bay 1-bay coupler w/o CB

CL-BZ1

CR-BZ4

not existent

not existent

not existent

Bus side t. line

02 03 04

BZ1 BZ1 CL-BZ4

BZ4 BZ4 CR-BZ5

not existent not existent not existent

BZ4 BZ4 not existent

not existent not existent not existent

line side line side Bus side t. bus

05

Section iso- BZ1/BZ2 lator 1-bay coupler Feeder bay CL-BZ2

not existent

not existent

not existent

not existent

non existent

06

CR-BZ5

not existent

not existent

not existent

Bus side t. bus

07 08

BZ2

BZ5 BZ5/BS2

not existent not existent

BZ5 not existent

not existent not existent

line side non existent

Section iso- BZ2/BS1 lator 1-bay coupler CL-BS1

09

CR-BS2

not existent

not existent

not existent

Bus side t. line

10

Section iso- BS1/BZ3 lator Feeder bay Feeder bay BZ3 BZ3

BS2/BZ6

not existent

not existent

not existent

non existent

11 12

BZ6 BZ6

not existent not existent

BZ6 BZ6

not existent not existent

line side line side

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

85

Configuration

Bay types

The DIGSI Plant Configuration automatically configures bays as 1-bay bus couplers, 2-bay bus coupler, feeder bays or sectionalizing isolators. Reserve bays may be provided for in the configuration; they may be assigned any number that corresponds to their actual location. DIGSI configures the corresponding bay to not existent, if it has been drawn in the Plant Configuration but is not assigned in the "Bay unit allocation". Depending on the size of the plant, the hardware design of the central unit can be adapted in steps of 8 connections for bay units. One bay unit is allocated to each feeder bay and each sectionalizer. The station configuration can include up to 16 bus couplers and 24 sectionalizers. Accordingly, bus couplers may be assigned one or two bay units.

Reserve bays

Hardware design

Station configuration

Bus couplers

For further explanations about connection and setting of the bus coupler bays please refer to Chapter 7.1.3, page 248. Up to 5 isolators can be connected to each bay unit. The isolators can be assigned to any isolator type. For each isolator one auxiliary contact for recognition of the OPEN position and one auxiliary contact for recognition of the CLOSED position is wired to the bay unit. The binary inputs BI1 to BI10 of bay unit 7SS523 have default allocations (refer to Chapter A.15, page 385) which can however be changed. Bay unit 7SS525 with BI1 to BI4. The isolators in the individual bus zones are assigned via the bus zone number. In the status bay out of service all configured isolators of this bay are assumed to be OPEN. In case of bus coupler bays (type two-bay coupler), this applies automatically for both bay units.

Isolator

Sectionalizing isolator

Isolators 1 to 5 can be used as sectionalizing isolator too. If the bay unit has exclusively sectionalizing isolators the type "sectionalizing isolator " is assigned to the bay unit. A maximum of 24 sectionalizers can be configured per substation. To include the transfer or combi-bus in the protection system, the CTs in the feeder bays (Figure 4-32, page 84) must be located on the line side, and the protection function must be released in PROT TR BUS (5401/CU).

CTs

86

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Configuration Notes

CT location

The DIGSI Plant Configuration evaluates the CT location for the end fault protection and for stations with transfer busbars. The settings mean in this context: busside towards busbar means that the transformer is located between the circuit breaker and the busbar isolator (Figure 4-31, page 82, 1a) busside towards line means that the transformer is located upstream of the feeder isolator, i.e. between the circuit breaker and the feeder isolator (refer to Figure 431, page 82, 1b) line side means that the transformer is located downstream of the feeder isolator (Figure 4-31, page 82, 2). For the end fault protection, the position of the current transformer relative to the circuit breaker is important (position 1 a or 1b and 2 respectively). For the behaviour or the protection in bypass operation, the position of the current transformer relative to the transfer busbar isolator is important (position 1a and 1b respectively or 2). In 2-bay couplers, CT is only assigned to one bay unit (Figure 4-33, page 87).

Figure 4-33 Example for the configuration of a 2-bay coupler with one CT

Bay E01 E02a E02b E03

Bay unit BU 1 BU 2 BU 3 BU 4

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

87

Configuration

Figure 4-34 Object properties of the transformer T1 from the example given in Figure 4-33, page 87

Figure 4-35 Example for the configuration of a 2-bay coupler with two CTs

Bay E01 E02a E02b E03 E04

Bay unit BU 1 BU 2 BU 3 BU 4 BU 5

Please note the crosswise assignment of the transformers.

88

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Configuration Notes

Figure 4-36 Object properties of the transformer from the example given in Figure 4-35, page 88

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

89

Configuration

90

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Functions

5
This chapter explains the various functions of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection. It shows the setting possibilities for each function in maximum configuration. It also gives information and - where required - formulae for determination of the setting values. Unless otherwise specified, all settings are made on the central unit by means of the DIGSI communication software.

Contents

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.18

Busbar Protection Check Zone Circuit Breaker Failure Protection End Fault Protection Supervisory Functions Oscillographic Fault Recording Device Power System Data Protection General Bay Unit Integrated Operation of the Bay Unit PC Port of the Bay Unit Fault Recording in the Bay Unit (Local Fault Recording) Scope of Protective Functions in the Bay Unit Power System Data of the Bay Unit Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit User-Defined Annunciations Backup Breaker Failure Protection in the Bay Unit

92 111 113 132 139 158 161 164 165 174 175 177 179 181 183 185 194 197

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

91

Functions

5.1

Busbar Protection
The busbar protection represents the main function of the 7SS52 V4. It is characterized by a high measurement accuracy and flexible matching to the existing station configurations. It is supplemented by a series of ancillary functions. The measurement methods described here below apply for the bus zone-selective protection as well as for the check zone.

5.1.1
5.1.1.1

Mode of operation
Basic Principle The measurement method relies on Kirchhoff's current law. This law states that the vectorial sum of all currents flowing into a closed area must be zero. This law applies, in the first instance, to DC current. It applies to AC current for instantaneous values. Thus, the sum of the currents in all feeders of a busbar must be zero at any instant in time.

Figure 5-1 Busbar with n feeders

Assuming that the currents I1, I2, I3 to In flow in the feeders (Figure 5-1, page 92) connected to the busbar, the following equation applies in the healthy condition. A uniform orientation of the currents is assumed; the currents flowing towards the busbar are defined as positive, and the currents flowing away from the busbar as negative. I1 + I2 + I3 ... + In = 0 (1) If this equation is not fulfilled, there must be some other impermissible path through which a current flows. This means that there is a fault in the busbar region. This law is superior, as the basis for busbar protection, to any other known way of measurement. A single quantity characterizes faulty conditions. This quantity is the sum of currents. It can be formed at any time. The current sum used for evaluation is available at any instant without interruption. The current sum stays at zero, unless there due to a fault another path whose current is not measured. The above considerations apply strictly to the primary conditions in a high-voltage switching station. Protection systems, however, cannot carry out direct measurements of currents in high-voltage systems. Protection equipment measurement systems are connected through current transformers. The current transformers reproduce on their secondary side the currents flowing in the station. The currents are scaled down according to the transformation ratio of the CTs while retaining the same phase relation. Furthermore, the current transformers can keep dangerous high voltages away from

92

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

the protection system, since their secondary circuits are isolated from the high-voltage system and their shielding windings are earthed. The current transformers are an essential part of the whole protection. Their characteristics are an important factor for the correct operation of the protection. Their physical locations mark the limits of the protection zone covered by the protection system. The current transformers transform the primary currents flowing in the station (Iprim.) proportionally into secondary currents (Isek.). As a result, the following equation applies for the busbar protection in the fault-free condition: I1 sec. n1 + I2 sec. n2 + I3 sec. n3 ... + In sec. nn = 0 n1, n2, n3 ... nn are the CT transformation ratios and I1 sec., I2 sec... In sec. are the secondary currents. In order to be able to process currents from bays with different transformers on the busbar level, all currents must refer to the same CT transformation ratio. For this reason, a current standardisation is carried out in the bay unit. In the plant configuration, the specification of the reference current of the system is defined as the reference value as a basis by specification of the reference current of the system. To calculate the standardisation factor for each current, all CT transformation ratios in the equation (2) have to be divided by this reference current. Such a busbar protection would certainly detect any short-circuit inside the protection zone. However, since transformation errors of the current transformers are unavoidable to some degree, it would also be liable to cause spurious tripping as a result of an external short-circuit. Such an error might be, for instance, a close-up fault on one of the feeder bays. The current flowing into the short-circuit is shared on the infeed side by several bays. The current transformers in the infeeding bays carry only a fraction of the total fault current while the current transformer in the faulted feeder bay carries the full current in its primary winding. If the fault current is very high, this set of current transformers may therefore be saturated, so tending to deliver only a fraction of the actual current on the secondary side while the rest of the current transformers, due to the distribution of currents among several bays, perform properly. Although the sum of the currents is zero on the primary side, the sum of the currents in equation 2 is now no longer zero. In differential protection systems for busbars and similar objects, this difficulty is countered by employment of the so-called stabilization (restraining) devices. If the short-circuit does not occur at the voltage peak of the cycle, a DC component is initially superimposed on the short-circuit current. This DC component decays with a time constant = L / R of the impedance from source to fault. With the growing output ratings of the generator units, these time constants in the supply system tend to grow longer. A superimposed DC component speeds up the magnetic saturation in the transformer cores, thus considerably affecting the transformation task. Several measures - some of which are already known from the conventional protection - have been introduced into the measuring system of the 7SS52 V4 busbar protection to cope with these problems. They supplement the basic principle of monitoring the summation (differential) current. The 7SS52 V4 busbar protection has thus a maximum degree of security against spurious operation for external short-circuits. At the same time, it ensures that in the event of internal short-circuits a tripping signal is initiated within the very short time of less than a half-cycle. (2)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

93

Functions

The measuring circuit of the 7SS52 V4 is characterized by the following features: Basic principle: Monitoring the sum of the currents as the tripping quantity Measures taken to guard against the disturbing influences due to current-transformer saturation: Stabilization (against large through currents) Separate evaluation of each half-wave (particularly effective against DC components) Measures taken to obtain short tripping times: Separate evaluation of the current transformer currents during the first milliseconds after the occurrence of a fault (anticipating the current transformer saturation). 5.1.1.2 Algorithm with Instantaneous Values The stabilization reduces the influence on the measurement of transformation inaccuracies in the various feeders to such a degree that spurious behaviour of the protection system is prevented. The differential protection forms both the vectorial sum of the CT secondary currents, which acts in the operating sense, and the arithmetic sum of those quantities, which has a restraining effect. The stabilizing (restraint) current thus obtained is additionally smoothed by the software (Figure 5-2, page 94) to ensure stability even in cases of extreme saturation.

Stabilization

Figure 5-2 Formation of the stabilizing (restraint) current

Characteristic

The operating conditions for the busbar protection vary considerably between one plant and the other, as do the setup and the switching possibilities of the individual stations. For instance, the range between the lowest and the highest currents to be expected in case of a short-circuit is different for each plant. Another important factor are the data and burdens of the CTs available for connecting the protection system. Finally, the treatment of the starpoint in the high-voltage system has some importance for the design and setting of the protection. For all these reasons, the busbar protection system has to offer a high degree of flexibility. The standard characteristic is determined by the two settable parameters Stabilization factor k and Differential current limit Id>".

94

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

Figure 5-3 Standard characteristic

The vectorial sum Id as the tripping quantity Id = | I1 + I2 ... + In | is counterbalanced by the restraining quantity Is Is = | I1 | + | I2 | ... + | In | which is the arithmetic sum of the magnitudes of each current. The criterion for a short-circuit on the busbar is thus: Id > k . Is, mod The modified stabilizing quantity Is, mod is derived from Is and is illustrated in Figure 5-2, page 94. Standard characteristic Figure 5-3, page 95 illustrates the characteristic of a stabilized (restrained) differential protection system. In the diagram, the abscissa represents the sum Is, mod of the magnitudes of all quantities flowing through the busbar while the vectorial sum Id is plotted as the ordinate. Both axes use rated current as the unit and both have the same scale. If a short-circuit occurs on the busbars whereby the same phase relation applies to all infeeding currents, Id is equal to Is. The fault characteristic is a straight line inclined at 45. Any difference in phase relation of the fault currents leads to a (practically insignificant) lowering of the fault characteristic. Since in fault-free operation Id is approximately zero, the x-axis may be referred to as the normal load line. The stabilizing factors can be selected in a range of k = 0.10 to 0.80 for the bus zone-specific busbar protection or k = 0.00 to 0.80 for the check zone. The factors are represented as three straight lines with corresponding gradient and form the operating characteristic. The differential protection system determines whether the total of all currents supplied by the current transformers represents a point in the diagram above or below the set characteristic line. If the point lies above that line, tripping is initiated.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

95

Functions

Earth fault characteristic

For the detection of high-resistance earth faults, tripping characteristics with increased sensitivity are provided for the selective protection zones, the check zone and circuit breaker failure. These more sensitive characteristics have their own parameters. The stabilizing factor is identical with the normal load line. The marshallable binary input ">EF charact. (FNo. 10478/CU) in the central unit allows to switch over between the characteristics.

Figure 5-4 Earth fault characteristic

5.1.1.3

Separate Evaluation of Half-Cycles At the instant a short-circuit occurs, the current is usually not symmetrical about the zero line. The peak values of the two half cycles differ to an extent which depends on the time instant on the cycle when the short-circuit began. The short-circuit current contains a DC component which decays according to the function e t/. Time constants of approximately 64 ms are frequently encountered in high-voltage systems. 100 ms and more may be reached in the vicinity of large generators. Such DC components make it substantially more difficult for the current transformers to perform their function of transformation since such components increasingly polarize the iron core. Figure 5-5, page 98 illustrates the condition in the extreme case of an initially fully offset short-circuit current. An additional problem in this case is remanence of the current transformer under consideration (remanence, for instance after an auto-reclosure), which is presumed to be present in this case. Figure 5-5, page 98 a) depicts the initially fully offset current. The DC component at the beginning is equal to the peak value of the short-circuit AC current and decays at the rate of = 64 ms. The current flows through the current transformer which, under the conditions assumed to be present, would just be able to carry the AC current without saturation if the AC current and thus the magnetic flux in the iron core were not offset. However, on account of the superimposed DC component and the unfavorable magnetic flux at the instant of short-circuit inception, the current transformer will be saturated after about 6 ms. The magnetic flux cannot rise any more. The current transformer no longer delivers current on the secondary side. Only after the zero-crossing of the current is transmission to the secondary side again possible on account of the opposite current direction. After that, the currents shown in the figure below the axis are correctly transformed. However, the current transformer is only able to transform

96

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

the current above the axis to an extent that the current/time area is equal to that of the preceding half-cycle below the axis. Figure 5-5, page 98 b) illustrates the formation of the measured value according to the measurement algorithm employed assuming that the current flows into an external short-circuit beyond the protected zone. The current thus flows through at least two current transformers. One of them is assumed to be able to give a correct replica of the current whereas the other exhibits a behaviour as under Figure 5-5, page 98 a). With the stabilizing factor k = 0.65 a tripping condition occurs about 8 ms after inception of the short-circuit. This condition persists for about 4 ms before the restraint prevails again. The reversed current after zero current crossing does not make itself felt in the tripping sense since correct transformation is present. The second half-wave, however, again brings about a tripping condition which again lasts for about 4 ms. Due to the continuing decay of the DC component, the previously saturated current transformer recovers its ability for transformation. The tripping differential current Id subsequently does not reach the magnitude of the stabilizing current k Is,mod. Figure 5-5, page 98 c) illustrates the formation of the measured value on the following assumption: The current flows into a short-circuit within the protection zone via a current transformer. The current transformer shows the behaviour illustrated in Figure 55, page 98 a). The stabilization factor k is again assumed to be 0.65. In this case the tripping differential current Id prevails right from the beginning of the short circuit. But since the current transformer saturates, the tripping quantity disappears after 6 ms. The opposite half-cycle will have no tripping effect. As the process proceeds, the current will set up a tripping condition in the opposite half-cycles of the measuring circuit as well. A comparison of the measured values in cases b (external short-circuit) and c (internal short-circuit) shows, besides a temporary similarity, two essential discriminating features: After a few cycles the DC component has largely decayed. Each half-wave, i.e. the current in both directions, delivers a correct measured value according to the fault location. At the inception of the short-circuit usually at least for a quarter of a cycle the correct measured value is formed according to the fault location. These two facts are utilized by the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection to distinguish between external and internal short-circuits. They are particularly valuable when large short-circuit currents and DC components severely saturate the current transformers forcing the protection to operate under severely aggravated conditions.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

97

Functions

Figure 5-5 CT currents and measured values in the event of an initially fully offset fault current; DC component decaying with = 64 ms

98

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

A sophisticated combination of the above two distinguishing features stabilizes the operating characteristics of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection even under extremely difficult conditions, namely: high degree of stability even during current transformer saturation short tripping times for internal short-circuits correct behaviour and proper response to evolving faults At first glance, the stability in the event of external short-circuits appears to be jeopardized by the current conditions shown in Figure 5-5, page 98 b). The tripping quantity markedly exceeds the restraining quantity on two occasions. However, the logic included in the 7SS52 V4 ensures stability even in this case and reliably prevents overfunctioning. 5.1.1.4 Evaluation of the Initial Values For normal load currents, the magnetic flux in the current transformer's iron circuit is relatively small. It is of the order of, at most, a few percent of that value at which the iron saturation begins. The current transformers must have an overcurrent factor which is sufficiently high to ensure the proper behaviour of the associated relay equipment during large short-circuits currents. Since the magnetic flux under normal conditions is low, a certain time will elapse after short-circuit inception before the magnetic flux in the iron core reaches the saturation level. This is true even under extreme conditions such as a very large short-circuit current or a large DC component with a long time constant. This process will typically last from a quarter-cycle to a half-cycle in both conventional current transformers with a closed iron core and in linearized current transformers with an air gap in their cores. The current transformers transform accurately according to ratio before saturation. Therefore the secondary currents delivered during the first milliseconds after inception of a short-circuit has the most conclusive information. For this reason, the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection has a software logic which detects the inception of a short-circuit from the currents and determines whether an external or internal short-circuit is present. To do so, it determines the differential quotient dIs / dt of the stabilizing magnitude and compares it to a set threshold. When that threshold is exceeded, the characteristic condition (Figure 5-3, page 95) is checked. If the tripping condition is fulfilled, the protection trips after one measurement (1-out-of-1) within 3 ms. If it is not, two measurements are performed (2-out-of-2) and a trip initiated in the presence of an internal fault. If the measured result indicates an external fault, the "1-out-of-1" mode remains blocked for 150 ms.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

99

Functions

5.1.1.5

Algorithm with Filtered Values The protection logic eliminates any DC components in the differential current by calculating its fundamental wave. This increases the accuracy in the case of relatively small, offset differential currents and reduces the protection tripping times. The value of the differential current fundamental wave is determined by means of sine and cosine filters. The stabilizing current is calculated on the basis of the summated rectified mean values of the feeder currents. This part of the algorithm makes also use of the characteristics described in Chapter 5.1.1.2, page 94. The filter algorithm operates in parallel to the instantaneous values algorithm, so that both algorithms can initiate a trip independently of one another. In the presence of an external fault, the filter algorithm is blocked for 150 ms by the instantaneous values algorithm to avoid the risk of spurious tripping in case of highly saturated differential currents (see also Figure 5-8, page 101).

5.1.1.6

Summary of the Measuring Method The measuring method of the busbar protection can be summarized as follows: Tripping occurs when Id > set limit and Id > k Is,mod and release from 1-out-of-1, 2-out-of-2 or filter algorithm The measuring method is illustrated in Figures 5-6, page 100, 5-7, page 101 and 5-8, page 101.

Figure 5-6 TRIP following 1-out-of-1 evaluation

100

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

Figure 5-7 TRIP following 2-out-of-2 evaluation

Figure 5-8 TRIP due to filtered value

5.1.2

Isolator Replica
The allocation of the feeders to the bus zones is automatically determined by the position of the isolators. Only the OPEN position is evaluated for the allocation of the feeders to the busbars. Therefore, no special demands such as adjustment are made on the isolator auxiliary contacts. The CLOSED position is only used for the isolator status supervision (isolator malfunction, isolator intermediate position). The assignment of a coupler bay to the relevant bus zones is only carried out when at least one isolator is activated on both sides of the coupler (left and right side of the circuit breaker). An operational current flow is only then possible. This ensures that, with the closing of the first isolator and a short-circuit in the coupler area, the busbar feeding the fault is immediately tripped independent of the fault location and the current position of the circuit breaker (CBaux).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

101

Functions

Figure 5-9, page 102 shows the basic connection scheme.

Figure 5-9 Isolator status indication

The isolator states of each feeder are indicated in the bay units 7SS523 by red or green LEDs. The preselection can be seen in Table A-29, page 390. The isolator replica of the entire plant can be visualized in graphic form using the DIGSI Plant Visualization. Recognition of the feeder isolator status With parallel lines, due to the short-circuit current, a current can be induced in the switched-off and earthed line, which is processed as differential current in the busbar protection without Q9.(Figure 5-10, page 102). The protection sees a current in the zero sequence system of the earthed feeder. Integrating the feeder isolator (Q9) into the isolator logic prevents spurious tripping by the 7SS52 V4.

Figure 5-10 Parallel feeders

The 7SS52 V4 is configured to identify an isolator automatically as a line isolator. If an isolator is configured as line isolator, the feeder bay will only be allocated to a bus zone if both the corresponding bus isolator and the feeder isolator are closed.

102

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

5.1.3

Bus Coupler Variants

Most large busbar configurations are divided into different zones which constitute autonomous subsystems called zones or measuring systems that can be selectively protected. The subsystems are connected by bus couplers so that the configuration can assume all required operating states. Depending on the number of current transformers and the type of switching element, a bus coupler can have different design variants. The bus coupler variants are automatically recognized by the DIGSI Plant Configuration. The admissible types of bus couplers are shown below.

Figure 5-11 Examples of bus coupler variants

5.1.3.1

Bus Couplers with One Current Transformer Bus couplers with circuit breaker and one current transformer (Figure 5-11, page 103) are the most common variant. The low cost of this economical solution is offset by the disadvantage of a delayed trip of the faulted subsystem if a fault occurs in the dead zone with the coupler closed. The dead zone is understood to be the bus zone between the circuit breaker and the current transformer. With the coupler open, the detection of the circuit breaker status ensures selective tripping without delay.

1-bay coupler 5.1.3.2

In the 7SS52 V4 protection system, one bay unit is needed for this type of bus coupler.

Bus Couplers with Two Current Transformers Bus couplers can also have two current transformers, one on each side of the circuit breaker. The allocation of the currents to the subsystems overlaps in that case (Figure 5-11, page 103). The advantage of this design is that in case of a fault between the two current transformers both subsystems are tripped promptly, if not selectively. With the coupler open, the evaluation of the circuit breaker status ensures selective and undelayed tripping for this coupler variant as well.

2-bay coupler

In the 7SS52 V4 protection system, two bay units are needed for this type of bus coupler. For the connection of the bay units, please refer to Chapter 7.1.3.1, page 248.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

103

Functions

5.1.3.3

Bus Couplers without Circuit Breaker For cost reasons, bus zones are sometimes not connected by circuit breakers but by switch-isolators (Figure 5-11, page 103), in case of auxiliary busbars for bypass operation. In order to determine nevertheless the affected zone in case of fault, the current is measured at the coupling point. Tripping, however, must always be performed for the entire system.

5.1.3.4

Bus Couplers with more than 5 Isolators Each bay unit can handle up to 5 isolators. If a coupler comprises more than 5 isolators, two bay units are needed even in configurations with only one current transformer. For the connection of the bay units, please refer to Chapter 7.1.3.3, page 249.

5.1.3.5

Combi-Coupler The arrangement of the different switchgear elements is usally free and subject mainly to the operational requirements. Sporadically, the switching elements such as curcuit breaker, current transformer and isolator are used doubly, either as bus coupler or as switchgear bay. This special operation of the bus coupler bay is possible due to a combined bus coupler parameter Combi-Coupler (XX06A/CU) in the configuration of the bay units. It is valid for all bus coupler types with circuit breakers. In two-bay couplings, it is effective per bay. The presetting is No, the bus coupler acts as described in the introduction. With the configuration Yes and in the coupled state (isolator closed on both sides), there are also no differences. If isolators are closed only on one side of the bus coupler in this configuration, the current is assigned to the corresponding busbar and the check zone. The bus coupler behaves like a switchgear bay. The protected zone ends behind the current transformer. An extension of the protected zone or an increased selectivity can be achieved via the end fault protection.

Figure 5-12 Operation of a bus coupler as switchgear bay

104

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

The protected zone ends at the current transformer. All electrical elements including the isolators Q1 and Q2 are part of the line. Configuration note: The dotted part must not be displayed with Digsi! 5.1.3.6 Transfer Busbars During transfer operation, the line isolator in the feeder which is located on the bypass busbar is replaced by the line isolator of the bus coupler. Monitoring of the isolator states in the feeder and coupling bays ensures that this happens only after the bus or feeder isolator had been opened. Up to the final bypass operation, intermediate switching positions occur. The allocation of the respective feeder to the bus zone during this time depends on the current transformer location (bus side or line side). With external transformers, the transfer busbar can be protected selectively. In the case of a fault, the tripping of the transfer breaker (coupler) and a transfer trip command for the tripping of the circuit breaker takes place at the opposite end of the line. Figure 4-31, page 82 shows a plant configuration with transfer bus. Figure 5-13, page 106 summarizes the busbar allocation of the feeders. Normally the check zone measurement does not require any isolator status information. The coupler's current, however, has to be included in the check zone measurement, if a feeder with internal CT is connected to the transfer bus.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

105

Functions

Meas. system Bay/ CT Line side Bus side

BZA

BZB

TB Bus coupler Bus coupler

Check zone Feeder Feeder

Feeder, bus coup. Feeder, bus coup.

Meas. system Bay/ CT Line side Bus side

1) The

BZA Feeder

BZB

TB

Check zone

connected Feeder to BZA no 1) protection Feeder, Coup

Feeder, bus coup.

current being fed by the feeder or into the feeder cannot be measured.

Meas. system Bay/ CT Line side Bus side

1) The

BZA coupler coupler

BZB

TB Feeder, bus coup. no 1) protection

Checkzone Feeder Bus coupler

current being fed by the feeder or into the feeder cannot be measured.

Figure 5-13 Switching states in bypass operation (Feeder and bus coupler on the same bus zone)

US operation with several feeders

The transfer operation is usually started for one feeder. In that, a feeder is connected to the transfer / combination busbar above the bus coupler. For an operation that is as flexible as possible, several feeders and bus couplers can be connected to the transfer / combination busbar at the same time.

106

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

5.1.3.7

Transfer Busbar Protection With Inside Transformers If the protection of the transfer busbar is impossible because of internal transformers or not required for outside transformers, PROT TR BUS (5401/CU) is to be configured with No. Then, only the Q7 on the bus coupler side is required to start the transfer operation. With the Q7 installed, the protected zone ends at the last coupling transformer (T1). All system components "behind" the last coupling transformer are now outside the protected zone of the busbar protection. Therefore, the protected zone of the check zone also has to be transferred into the coupler (T1). The following figure shows the correction of the check zone with an unprotected transfer busbar.

Figure 5-14 Transfer operation without transfer busbar protection

1) configured and detected 2) existing but not configured

5.1.4

Setting Notes
The STAB FAC:BZ (6101/CU) is used to match the stabilizing factor for the bus zoneselective protection (common for all buses) to the service conditions. A high setting provides for more stability against faults outside the protection system but reduces the sensitivity for detecting busbar faults. The stabilizing factor should therefore be set as low as possible and as high as necessary. Two aspects are of major importance for selecting the stabilizing factor STAB FAC:BZ (6101/CU): Type of current transformers: "lineared" or "iron-cored". Iron-cored CTs transmit the DC component without any noticeable reduction, whereas linearized transformers substantially reduce the DC component. The burdening factor Kb of the current transformers This factor is calculated from the maximum continuous short-circuit current Iscc max and the current Isat at which CT saturation begins:

STAB FAC:BZ

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

107

Functions

Kb = Iscc max / Isat The saturation current Isat can be calculated from the rated current Ipn and the effective factor of the symmetrical rated short-circuit current K'ssc (which used to be called operational overcurrent factor n') Isat = Ipn * K'ssc Ipn = primary rated current The factor K'ssc can be calculated from the data and the actual burden of the current transformers: K'ssc = (Rct+Rb) / (Rct+R'b) * Kssc with R'b= Rl + Rrelay Rct = secondary winding resistance (75 C) Rb = resistive rated burden R'b = connected burden Rl = line resistance Rrelay = protection burden K'ssc = factor of the symmetrical rated short-circuit current For burden factors Kb < 2, a k-factor of 0.6 is sufficient. For Kb > 2, the minimum k-factor is: Kb k > ----------------------4 Kb 1 with Kb > 2

The setting value k thus obtained comprises 20 % safety. The basis for this fomula is summarized in the Chapter A.2, page 333. The CT with the highest burden factor Kb must be the basis for selecting the factor k. Id> BZ The parameter Id> BZ (6102/CU) is used to set the threshold for the bus zone-selective protection in the presence of small fault current. For pickup and tripping of the protection, only those normalized currents Id are considered which exceed the diff-current threshold set in the parameter Id> BZ (6102/CU). A current below this threshold causes the pickup to drop off. To calculate the highest permissible setting, determine first the smallest fault current to be expected in case of a busbar short-circuit. The set value should have an extra response margin of about 20%. The lowest permitted setting is Imax load + 30%. 1.3 Imax load < Id> BZ < 0.8 Iscc min

108

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Busbar Protection

Id> BZ - EF

The parameter Id> BZ - EF (6109A/CU) is used to set the diff-current threshold Is/ Ino for the bus zone-selective protection in the presence of a 1-pole earth fault. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter EF charact. (6320A/CU) is released. Where due to low infeed conditions or to the type of starpoint earthing earth fault currents do not exceed the normal load range, the threshold must be set to less than nominal value. A separate characteristic is provided for such cases. It should be noted, however, that with this setting the failure of one current transformer in combination with a high load can lead to a trip of the busbar. Additional criteria are required in such cases to ensure sufficient stability. Such a criterion may be, for instance, additional release by a feeder protection device through detection of the offset voltage. To calculate the highest permissible setting, determine first the smallest fault current to be expected in case of a busbar short-circuit. The set value should have an extra response margin of about 20%.

Is< BZ - EF

The parameter Is< BZ - EF (6108A/CU) is used to set the stabilizing current threshold Is/Ino for the bus zone-selective protection in the presence of a 1-pole earth fault This parameter is only displayed if the parameter EF charact. (6320A/CU) is released. The setting of the parameter Is< BZ - EF (6108A/CU) depends on the maximum stabilizing current to be expected and on the behaviour of the CTs. Is< BZ - EF = 1.2 * (Imax load + IEF ) Imax load = sum of all load currents flowing in and out

STAB FAC:CZ

The parameter STAB FAC:CZ (6103/CU) is used to match the stabilizing factor for the check zone to the service conditions. For single busbars, please refer to the setting hints for the parameter STAB FAC:BZ (6101/CU). For multiple busbars, a stabilizing factor of 0.5 is recommended. This helps to prevent overstabilization due to the load currents of bus zones which are not involved in the fault.

Id> CZ

The parameter Id> CZ (6104/CU) is used to set the threshold for the sensitivity of the check zone in the presence of small fault currents. For pickup and tripping of the protection, only those normalized currents Id are considered which exceed the diff-current threshold set in the parameter Id> CZ (6104/CU). A current below this threshold causes the pickup to drop off. To calculate the highest permissible setting, determine first the smallest fault current to be expected in case of a busbar short-circuit. The set value should have an extra response margin of about 20%. The smallest permissible setting is Imax load + 30%. 1.3 Imax load < Id> CZ < 0.8 Iscc min

Id> CZ - EF

The parameter Id> CZ - EF (6111A/CU) is used to set the diff-current threshold Id/ Ino for the check zone measuring system in the presence of a 1-pole earth fault. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter EF charact. (6320A/CU) is released.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

109

Functions

Siemens recommends to set the parameter Id> CZ - EF (6111A/CU) to 70% of the smallest 1-pole earth fault current to be expected. Is< CZ - EF The parameter Is< CZ - EF (6110A/CU) is used to set the stabilizing current threshold Is/Ino for the check zone measuring system in the presence of a 1-pole earth fault. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter EF charact. (6320A/CU) is released. Due to the special treatment of the stabilizing current of the check zone, the parameter Is< CZ - EF (6110A/CU) is to be set to the value Is< BZ - EF = 1.2 * 0.5 * Imax load .

5.1.5

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 106A 6101 6102 6103 6104 6108A 6109A 6110A 6111A 6120A

Setting Title Combi-Coupler STAB FAC:BZ Id> BZ STAB FAC:CZ Id> CZ Is< BZ - EF Id> BZ - EF Is< CZ - EF Id> CZ - EF EF charact.

Setting Options YES NO 0.10 .. 0.80 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 0.80 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 25.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 25.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino released blocked

Default Setting NO 0.65 1.00 I/Ino 0.50 1.00 I/Ino 5.00 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino 4.50 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino blocked

Comments Combi-Coupler Stabilizing factor - selective Diff-current threshold - selective Stabilizing factor - check zone Diff-current threshold - check zone Stabilizing current threshold - BZ - EF Diff-current threshold - selective - EF Stabilizing current threshold - CZ - EF Diff-current threshold - check zone - EF Earth fault characteristic switchover

110

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Check Zone

5.2
5.2.1

Check Zone
Mode of operation
The measuring system for the check zone detects a short-circuit in all bays, regardless of the isolator status. In some special cases, isolator status must however be considered for the check zone. If the stabilizing current is calculated in the same manner as for the bus zone-specific busbar protection, overstabilization results in multiple busbar systems. This overstabilization is caused by those bays which are not connected to the faulty busbar. To avoid overstabilization, the stabilizing current is calculated as follows: | Ip | = sum of the magnitudes of the currents which flow in the direction of the busbar | In | =sum of the magnitudes of the currents which flow away from the busbar Istab = lesser of the above two sums By forming the stabilizing current in this manner, only half of the total through-flowing load current acts as stabilizing current. The short-circuit current does not stabilize the check zone and only acts as differential current. This procedure is illustrated in Figure 5-15, page 111 and in the equations below.

Figure 5-15 Treatment of the stabilizing current for the check zone

Id = | I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 I3 I4 | = | I1 + I2 | Stabilizing current without special treatment: Is = | I1 | + | I2 | + | I3 | + | I4 | + | I3 + I4 | The load currents I3 and I4 are considered twice in the stabilizing current. This leads to overstabilization. Special treatment of the stabilizing current results in the following conditions: | Ip | = | I1 | + | I2 | + | I3 | + | I4 | | In | = | I3 + I4 | Is = | In | = | I3 + I4 | (= is equal to half the magnitude of the load current) This stabilizing current is modified for evaluation of the characteristic as mentioned in Chapter 5.1.1.2, page 94.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

111

Functions

Due to the phase angle differences between short-circuit current and load currents differences may occur in the formation of the sums.

5.2.2

Setting Notes
The check zone has its own characteristics, which can be set with the parameters STAB FAC:CZ (6103/CU), Id> CZ (6104/CU), Id> CZ - EF (6111A/CU) and Is< CZ - EF (6110A/CU) (Chapter 5.1.4, page 107).

5.2.3

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 6103 6104 6110A 6111A

Setting Title StAB FAC:CZ Id> CZ Is< CZ - EF Id> CZ - EF

Setting Options 0.00 .. 0.80 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 25.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino

Default Setting 0.50 1.00 I/Ino 4.50 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino

Comments Stabilizing factor check zone Diff-current threshold - check zone Stabilizing current threshold - CZ - EF Diff-current threshold - check zone - EF

112

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

5.3

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

The circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) function in the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection detects a failure of the circuit breaker either in the event of a feeder short-circuit or a busbar short-circuit. In the event of a feeder short-circuit, a breaker failure leads to selective isolation of the bus zone to which the feeder with the defective breaker is allocated. In addition a transfer trip (intertrip) signal is issued in order to trip the remote feeder terminal, too. The available operating modes are described in Chapter 5.3.5.2, page 118. Each mode can be set selectively for each bay. Thus the function can be matched optimally to existing conditions (type of bay, short-circuit currents etc.). In the event of a circuit breaker failure with a busbar short-circuit, the infeed from the remote feeder terminal has to be interrupted. For this purpose the 7SS52 V4 issues a transfer trip signal. The only operating mode used here is the unbalanced mode.

5.3.1

Characteristics for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Standard characteristic

The unbalanced mode has two separate parameter sets, one for 1-pole high-resistance earth faults and the other for multi-pole faults. Figure 5-16, page 113, shows the characteristics and the setting parameters. For the detection of high-resistance earth faults, tripping characteristics with increased sensitivity for breaker failure are provided. For these more sensitive characteristics the parameters I> BF-EF (XX19/CU) and Is< BF - EF (6202A/CU) apply. The stabilizing factor of CBF is identical with the stabilizing factor of the normal load line. The marshallable binary input ">EF charact." (FNo. 10478/CU) in the central unit allows to switch over between characteristics, provided that the parameter EF charact. (6320A/ CU) is set to released. Figure 5-16, page 113, shows the characteristics and the setting parameters.

Earth fault characteristic

Figure 5-16 Characteristics of the breaker failure protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

113

Functions

5.3.2
I> BF

Setting Notes
The parameter I> BF (118/CU) is used to set the threshold Id/In at which the protection detects a breaker failure and/or resets a TRIP command. Siemens recommends to set this parameter to about 50 % of the smallest short-circuit current to be expected. Note Please note that the limit value I> BF must not be set smaller than the limit value Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU). Otherwise, there is a danger of spurious tripping. If there is an operational differential current (e.g. defect in the transformer circuit) and at the same time a binary input of the breaker failure protection is activated. Note This parameter is also used for the functions End Fault Protection (Chapter 5.4, page 132), Current-Controlled TRIP Reset (Chapter 5.9.1, page 165).

STAB FAC:BF

The parameter STAB FAC:BF (6201/CU) is used to match the stabilizing factor for the selective breaker failure protection and the check zone to the service conditions. A setting value of 0.25 is recommended for the stabilization against current transformer errors. This parameter is only relevant for the modes BZ unbalance and trip rep/unbal. These modes are set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU) (Chapter 5.3.6, page 126).

EF charact.

The parameter EF charact. (6320A/CU) is used to match the busbar and breaker failure protection to the system conditions and to the treatment of the starpoint. An explanation of the standard characteristic and of the earth fault characteristic is given on page 95. With the setting blocked single-pole and multipole faults are treated with the same characteristic. With the setting released the measuring system switches to the more sensitive characteristic in the presence of a 1-pole fault. This characteristic has a lower diff-current threshold, which is set with the parameters Id> BZ - EF (6109A/CU) or Id> CZ - EF (6111A/CU), and a stabilizing current threshold which is set with the parameters Is< BZ - EF (6108A/CU) or Is< CZ - EF (6110A/CU). The setting released enables also the marshalling of the binary input annunciation for characteristic switchover ">EF charact. (FNo. 10478/CU).

I> BF-EF

The parameter I> BF-EF (XX19/CU) is used to set for an earth fault the threshold Id/ In at which the protection detects a breaker failure and/or resets a TRIP. Note This parameter is also used for the functions End Fault Protection (Kapitel 5.4, Seite 132), Current-Controlled TRIP Reset (Kapitel 5.9.1, Seite 165).

114

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Is< BF - EF

The parameter Is< BF - EF (6202A/CU) is used to set the stabilizing current threshold Is/Ino for the selective busbar protection and the check zone in the presence of a 1-pole earth fault. The setting of the parameter depends on the maximum stabilizing current to be expected and on the behaviour of the CTs. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter EF charact. (6320A/CU) is set to released. With setting 0.00 the characteristic will not be used.

5.3.3

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 118 119 6201 6308 6202A 6320A

Setting Title I> BF I> BF-EF STAB FAC:BF Id> SUPERV BZ Is< BF - EF EF charact.

Setting Options 0.10 .. 2.00 I / In 0.05 .. 2.00 I / In 0.00 .. 0.80 0.05 .. 0.80 I/Ino 0.00 .. 25.00 I/In released blocked

Default Setting 0.50 I / In 0.25 I / In 0.50 0.10 I/Ino 5.00 I/In blocked

Comments Current threshold for BF Current threshold for BF - EF Stabilizing factor BF protection Limit value diff-current supervision -BZ Stabilizing current threshold - BF - EF Earth fault characteristic switchover

5.3.4

List of Information from the Central Unit

FNo. 10478 >EF charact.

Alarm

Comments >Earth fault characteristic active

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

115

Functions

5.3.5

Bay-Specific Functions (BU)

All parameters of the breaker failure protection function can be set separately for each feeder. Thus the function can be matched to different types of bays (e.g. line, transformer) or short-circuit conditions (e.g. low-current faults).

5.3.5.1

Triggering and Releasing the Breaker Failure Protection The parameter BF BI MODE (XX14/CU) is used to specify whether the breaker failure protection function will be triggered exclusively by the feeder-selective binary input (1channel) or only after evaluation of a second binary input ("CBF release" (FNo. 7615/BU) or >CBF rel.3p. (FNo. 7622/BU)) (2-channel). Normally the function is released by pickup of the feeder protection. Triggering by 2 channels gives the breaker failure protection extra reliability. Together with every TRIP command, a transfer trip is generated. Apart from triggering and releasing, there is also the pulse mode for breaker failure protection. For more information on the pulse mode, please refer to page 121 and Figure 5-22, page 120. If a binary input for triggering the breaker failure protection (">CBF L1" (FNo. 7611/ BU), ">CBF L2" (FNo. 7612/BU), ">CBF L3" (FNo. 7613/BU) or ">CBF 3-pole" (FNo. 7621/BU)) is activated erroneously, a feeder current above the threshold for the breaker failure protection is apt to cause a spurious trip of the busbar. The following monitoring measures can be taken to detect this kind of errors in time: If a triggering signal is present for more than 15 s, the faulty binary input is blocked and the annunciation "BF-BIErr $xx Lx" (FNo. 176.1091, 176.1092, 176.1093/CU) or "BFBIErr $00 3P" (FNo. 176.1094/CU) is output. If the release signal for the breaker failure protection is present for longer than the time set in the parameter T-BF rel sup (XX27/CU), the breaker failure protection is blocked and the annunciation "BFRlErr $00 1P" (FNo. 176.1101/CU) or "BFRlErr $00 3P" (FNo. 176.1102/CU) is output. As long as the release signal is present, the breaker failure protection of this feeder is blocked. If a 1-pole or 3-pole triggering signal is present but no release signal arrives within a settable time T-BF 2chan (128/CU), the breaker failure protection is selectively blocked and the annunciation "BF-BIErr $xx Lx" (FNo. 176.1091, 176.1092, 176.1093/CU) or "BFBIErr $xx 3P" (FNo. 176.1094/CU) is output.

Figure 5-17 Characteristics of the breaker failure protection

116

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Figure 5-18 Triggering and releasing the breaker failure protection - 1-pole

Figure 5-19 Monitoring the breaker failure protection triggering and release - 3-pole

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

117

Functions

5.3.5.2

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection during a Feeder Short-Circuit In the event of a breaker failure following a feeder short-circuit, the fault current must be interrupted by isolating the bus zone to which the affected feeder is allocated. The breaker failure protection of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection is triggered by the TRIP command from the feeder protection. This command can be detected for one phase with the binary inputs >CBF Lx (FNo. 7611,7612,7613/BU) or for three phases with the binary input >CBF 3-pole (FNo. 7621/BU) in the bay unit.

BF OP MODE

How the 7SS52 V4 protection system reacts after this depends on the breaker failure protection mode, which is set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU). It is set individually for each feeder. The following modes are available for the circuit breaker failure protection (CBF): I> query (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with overcurrent detection I> (2-stage CBF) Unbalancing (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with following unbalancing (2-stage CBF) TRIP by external CBF

2-stage CBF

In the 2-stage CBF operating modes, a second bay-selective TRIP command is output by the bay unit after the delay T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU) has elapsed to provide in any case for a trip of the circuit breaker. This can be useful, for instance, if the circuit breaker has a second trip coil or a control circuit that is separate from the bay protection. The affected bus zone is not disconnected until a second, unsuccessful TRIP attempt has been made. A prerequisite for a TRIP repeat is that the curcuit breaker is ready for operation. That means a binary input ">CB not ready" (FNo. 7619/BU) is not active. In feeders with a double set of protection devices (main/back-up protection), the CBF protection can be initiated both phase-selectively and 3-phase by the main or back-up protection equipment. To do so, the binary inputs ">CBF Lx" (FNo. 7611,7612, 7613/BU) and/or ">CBF 3-pole" (FNo. 7621/BU) must be marshalled accordingly. The CBF protection is started by the first signal that is detected. If a single-pole fault evolves to a multi-pole short-circuit before the delay set with the parameter T-BF-1P (XX20/CU) has elapsed, the running process is aborted and a delay time is started which is set with the parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/CU).

Initiation by feeder protection

Circuit breaker failure delay times

118

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Figure 5-20 Triggering by binary inputs

Figure 5-21 Logic of the current check of the breaker failure protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

119

Functions

Continuation for (1) and (2) see Figure 5-45, page 199 Continuation for (3) and (4) see Figure 5-25, page 124
Figure 5-22 Breaker failure protection logic - operating modes

120

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

I>query

The circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) function is initiated by the TRIP command from the feeder protection. If the operating mode I>query is set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU), the feeder current is monitored for exceeding the threshold set with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU) or I> BF-EF (XX19/CU) (Figure 5-21, page 119). A feeder current above this threshold starts the delay time set with the parameter TBF-1P (X X20/CU) or T-BF-mP (XX21/CU). If the feeder current is still above the threshold after this delay has elapsed, the central unit issues a 3-pole TRIP command to isolate the bus zone.

trip rep/I>quer

If the operating mode trip rep/I>quer is set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU), the current is monitored for exceeding the threshold set with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU) or I> BF-EF (XX19/CU). A current above this threshold starts the delay time for the TRIP repetition, which is set with the parameter T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU). If this release criterion is fulfilled for all of the delay time for the TRIP repetition, the bay unit issues a 1-pole or 3-pole TRIP command to the local circuit breaker. A single-pole TRIP repetition is generated on condition that the feeder current in the CBF-initiating phase and the earth current exceed the threshold set with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU) or I> BF-EF (XX19/CU) (ILx & IE). For this purpose, set the parameter TRIP REP. MODE (XX17/CU) to single-channel. For a 3-pole TRIP repetition, set this parameter to 3pole. Regardless of the above setting, a three-phase trip repetition is always issued if the current exceeds in two or more phases the limit which is set with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU). If the circuit breaker trips correctly, the initiation and thus the CBF function is cleared. If the CBF initiation persists, the time delay of the CBF - set with the parameter T-BF1P (XX20/CU) or T-BF-mP (XX21/CU) - elapses. In conformity with the current isolator replica, all feeders are tripped which are allocated to the bus zone of the CBF initiating bay unit. A further condition is that the current threshold, which can be set individually for each feeder with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU), is exceeded during the total time period.

BZ unbalance

If the operating mode BZ unbalance is set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU), the system checks whether the TRIP command of the feeder protection has initiated the CBF function ">CBF Lx" (FNo. 7611, 7612, 7613/BU) or ">CBF 3-pole" (FNr. 7621/BU). If the criterion for this is fulfilled, a delay time is started which is set with the parameter T-BF-1P (XX20/CU) or T-BF-mP (XX21/CU). If the CBF initiation is active for all of the delay time, the polarity of the feeder current in the protection algorithm is changed (unbalancing). If the TRIP criterion and the current sensor criterion are fulfilled, the central unit issues a three-phase TRIP command to all feeders of the affected bus zone. The principle of unbalancing is depicted in Figure 5-23, page 122. Unbalancing causes a differential current of twice the magnitude of the current in the CBF initiating feeder.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

121

Functions

Figure 5-23 Principle of unbalancing for the circuit breaker failure protection

The BZ unbalance mode has two separate parameter sets, one for 1-pole earth faults and the other for multi-pole faults. The sensitive earth fault characteristic is released by a binary input in the central unit. Figure 5-16, page 113 shows the characteristics and the settings. This operating mode yields the following essential advantages: Extremely short dropout times due to the use of instantaneous values. For the clearing time of the feeder protection no special requirements need to be met. Even with a longer clearing time, there is no danger of spurious tripping since the circuit breaker has interrupted the current and a differential current is not formed by the unbalancing. trip rep/unbal If the operating mode trip rep/unbal is set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU), this mode also uses the "unbalancing". Before all feeders of the bus zone with the CBF initiating bay unit are tripped three-pole, the TRIP command is repeated as in the mode trip rep/I>quer. If the operating mode external is set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU), the breaker failure is detected by an external device. On activation of the configured binary inputs of the bay unit ">CBF Lx" (FNo. 7611, 7612, 7613/BU) or ">CBF 3-pole" (FNo. 7621/BU), the protection system trips without delay the busbar to which the bay with the faulted circuit breaker is connected. The central unit evaluates for this the isolator replica.

Initiation by external CBF

Note In this operating mode, always work with breaker failure protection triggering and releasing (2 BI) since there is no further protection by a current check.

Low-current mode

In the presence of low-current faults (e.g. trip by the Buchholz protection of the transformer), the necessary threshold for a current-controlled mode may not be reached. Therefore, it is not ensured that the circuit breaker failure protection is activated.

122

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

The low-current mode BF I< (XX16/CU) ensures that circuit breaker failure protection is provided nevertheless. After a set time T-BF I< (XX22/CU) has elapsed, and if the circuit breaker is closed, a busbar TRIP command for the affected bus zone is issued. If the feeder current exceeds this one with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU) adjusted limiting value, the low-current mode is blocked. Logic of the current release see Figure 5-21, page 119. With the operating modes non existent and external, to be set with the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU), this function has no influence. For more information on the operating modes, please refer to the setting notes in Chapter 5.3.6, page 126. As with other operating modes of the breaker failure protection, the tripping consists of two stages, i.e. a first stage as "TRIP repetition" on the local breaker and a second stage for the tripping of the busbar. The parameter T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU), which is also used for the current-controlled stages of the breaker failure protection, is used in the central unit to delay the first stage. The following figure shows the logic of the low-current operating mode of the breaker failure protection:

Continuation for (3) and (4) see Figure 5-22, page 120

Continuation for (3) and (4) see Figure 5-22, page 120
Figure 5-24 Low-current mode

Pulse mode

In the operating mode Pulse mode, the circuit breaker failure protection is initiated by the opposite end of the line. It operates independently of the CBF function proper if the binary input ">CBF puls" (FNo. 7614/BU) is allocated accordingly. The pulse mode only operates with the following modes: TRIP repetition/Unbalancing TRIP repetition/I> query:

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

123

Functions

The pulse mode is reserved for special applications. This operating mode may be used if initiation of the CBF cannot be given by the corresponding feeder protection (e.g. delayed fault recognition; feeder protection inoperative). In these specific cases the CBF can be initiated by the protection at the remote end via a binary input ">CBF puls" (FNo. 7614/BU) of the bay unit. The devices for transmission provide a signal (pulse) of variable duration. The minimum signal duration of the binary input at the bay unit has to be 20 ms, the maximum is 15 s. If the time monitoring of the impulse binary signal of the breaker failure protection picks up, the following alarm BF BIImpErr $00 (FNo. 176.1104.xx) and the general fault alarm BF ImpBI errorM (FNo. 10437) is issued by the central unit. As soon as the delay time set with the parameter T-BF IMP (XX23A/CU) has elapsed, a feeder-selective, three-pole TRIP command is issued. If the TRIP command does not result in clearing the protection function, the second stage is started after a delay time has elapsed. This delay time is set with the parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/CU). 5.3.5.3 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection for Busbar Faults Circuit Breaker failure can occur during a busbar short-circuit, too. In this case, the current must be interrupted from the remote end (Figure 5-25, page 124). The 7SS52 detects the breaker failure and allows a shorter tripping time by the trip signal sent to the opposite line end. If signal transmission equipment is used, the current can be interrupted faster since signal transmission equipment trips the circuit breaker at the remote end as soon as the delay time set with the parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/ CU) has elapsed. On issuing a TRIP command, the currents are monitored in all feeders which are to be tripped. If the current persists above the feeder-selective threshold set with the parameter I> BF (XX18/CU) after the delay time has elapsed, the corresponding bay unit issues a transfer trip command (Figure 5-26, page 125).

Figure 5-25 Circuit breaker failure during a busbar fault

124

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Figure 5-26 Circuit breaker failure protection for busbar faults

5.3.5.4

Failure of the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker If a busbar short-circuit occurs with the bus coupler closed (Figure 5-27, page 125), a TRIP command is issued to all related feeders of this zone and to the coupling bay units. (1) Thus bus zone BZ A is isolated and the healthy bus zone BZ B stays in service. In the event of a failure of the bus coupler circuit breaker, the busbar protection has to disconnect bus zone BZ B, too (single unbalancing to BZ B). If the current continues to flow in a coupler unit after the time set with the parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/CU), the coupler current is set to zero. The trip criterion is thus fulfilled and bus zone BZ B is isolated, too. (2) In the case of a breaker failure of the circuit breaker in the bus coupler bay (internal breaker failure), the alarm "TRIP BF M" (10436/CU) is issued.

Figure 5-27 Fault on bus zone BZ A and failure of the bus coupler circuit breaker

5.3.5.5

Circuit Breaker Not Ready For the detection of malfunctions in the tripping mechanism of the feeder circuit breaker, the bay unit is provided with a binary input ">CB not ready" (FNo. 7619/BU). If a breaker failure occurs while a signal is present at this binary input, the breaker failure protection uses the delay time T-BF CB fault (XX24/CU) instead of the time set with the parameters T-BF-1P (XX20/CU) and T-BF-mP (XX21/CU).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

125

Functions

With the parameter T-BF CB fault (XX24/CU), the delay time of the breaker failure protection can be reduced. A TRIP command from the bay unit issues at the same time a transfer trip command to trip the remote end (Figure 5-22, page 120).

5.3.6

Setting Notes
The parameter BF BI MODE (XX14/CU) is used to select the supervision mode for initiation of the breaker failure protection. With setting 1-ch w/o sup, the breaker failure protection will be initiated only by the feeder-selective binary input, without time supervision. With setting 1-ch w sup, the breaker failure protection will be initiated only by the feeder-selective binary input, with time supervision. With setting 2-ch w/o sup, the breaker failure protection will be initiated after evaluation of an additional binary input ("CBF release"), without time supervision. With setting 2-ch w sup, the breaker failure protection will be initiated after evaluation of an additional binary input ("CBF release"), with time supervision. For testing purposes, Siemens recommends to set this parameter to 1-ch w/o sup or 2-ch w/o sup.

BF BI MODE

Note The operating modes "... without supervision are recommended for test purposes only.

BF OP MODE

The parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU) is used to select the operating mode for the breaker failure protection in the bay unit. The parameter setting depends on the protection concept in use. With setting non existent the breaker failure protection will be deactivated. With setting I>query the I> query mode is activated. With setting trip rep/I>quer the TRIP repetition with subsequent I> query mode is activated. With setting BZ unbalance the unbalancing mode is activated. With setting trip rep/unbal the TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing mode is activated. With setting external the breaker failure protection will be provided by an external device.

126

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

BF I<

The parameter BF I< (XX16/CU) is used to activate and deactivate the low-current mode. With setting ON the low-current mode is activated. With setting OFF the low-current mode is deactivated. The low-current mode can be used together with the following settings: BF BI MODE (XX14/CU) with and without supervision BF OP MODE (XX15/CU) Breaker failure operating mode, in the settings: I> query TRIP repetition/I> query: Unbalancing TRIP repetition/Unbalancing The low-current mode cannot be used together with the following setting external of the parameter BF OP MODE (XX15/CU).

TRIP REP. MODE

The parameter TRIP REP. MODE (XX17/CU) is used to select the operating mode for TRIP repetition with 1-pole initiation. With setting single-channel the 1-pole TRIP repetition will be generated. The feeder current of the initiating phase and the earth fault current must exceed for this the threshold I> BF-EF (XX19/CU) (ILx & IE). With setting 3pole a 3-pole TRIP repetition will be generated. The feeder current of the initiating phase and the earth fault current must exceed for this the threshold I> BF-EF (XX19/CU) (ILx & IE). A prerequisite for a TRIP repeat is that the curcuit breaker is ready for operation. That means a binary input ">CB not ready" (FNo. 7619/BU) is not active.

T-BF-1P

The parameter T-BF-1P (XX20/CU) is used to delay for 1-pole faults the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection. It is recommended for the single-stage breaker failure protection to set this parameter to twice the circuit breaker trip time. With two-stage breaker failure protection two time stages pick up: T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU) and T-BF-1P (XX20/CU). The tripping of the affected bus zone takes place after the second stage has been processed. The parameter T-BF-1P (XX20/ CU) is then to be set higher than the sum of the delay times set with parameters TTRIP repeat (XX25/CU) and Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) in order to avoid premature or unnecessary trippings of the bus zone.

T-BF-mP

The parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/CU) is used to delay for multipole faults the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection. It is recommended for the single-stage breaker failure protection to set this parameter to twice the circuit breaker trip time. With two-stage breaker failure protection two time stages pick up: T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU) and T-BF-mP (XX21/CU). The tripping of the affected bus zone takes place after the second stage has been processed. The parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/ CU) is then to be set higher than the sum of the delay times set with parameters TTRIP repeat (XX25/CU) and Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) in order to avoid premature or unnecessary trippings of the bus zone.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

127

Functions

T-BF I<

The parameter T-BF I< (XX22/CU) is used to delay for the "low-current" mode the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection. The parameter T-BF IMP (XX23A/CU) is used to delay for pulse mode the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection. The parameter T-BF CB fault (XX24/CU) is used to delay the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection if a circuit breaker malfunction is detected. The parameter T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU) is used to delay the feeder-selective repetition of the TRIP command issued by the breaker failure protection. The time for the TRIP repetition must be set to less than the delay times for the breaker failure protection T-BF-1P (XX20/CU), T-BF-mP (XX21/CU) and for the pulse mode T-BF IMP (XX23A/CU).

T-BF IMP

T-BF CB fault

T-TRIP repeat

T-BF rel sup

If the parameter BF BI MODE (XX14/CU) is set to with supervision, the the parameter T-BF rel sup (XX27/CU)is used to set the time for supervising the duration of the CBF release signal. The parameter T-BF 2chan (XX28/CU) is used to set the supervision delay during which, counting from the initiation moment, the release signals for the breaker failure protection must be issued.

T-BF 2chan

Note Many of the above mentioned parameters are also used for other functions such as Bay Unit (Chapter 5.10, page 174).

128

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

5.3.7

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 114

Setting Title BF BI MODE

Setting Options 1-ch w/o sup 1-ch w sup 2-ch w/o sup 2-ch w sup non existent external BZ unbalance trip rep/unbal I>query trip rep/I>quer ON OFF single-channel 3pole 0.10 .. 2.00 I / In 0.05 .. 2.00 I / In 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.00 .. 10.00 s 0.00 .. 10.00 s 0.02 .. 15.00 s 0.06 .. 1.00 s 0.01 .. 32.00 s released blocked

Default Setting 1-ch w sup

Comments Binary input mode / supervision BF

115

BF OP MODE

BZ unbalance

Operation mode BF

116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123A 124 125 127 128 6106 6320A

BF I< TRIP REP. MODE I> BF I> BF-EF T-BF-1P T-BF-mP T-BF I< T-BF IMP T-BF CB fault T-TRIP repeat T-BF rel sup T-BF 2chan Tmin TRIP EF charact.

OFF single-channel 0.50 I / In 0.25 I / In 0.25 s 0.25 s 0.25 s 0.50 s 0.10 s 0.12 s 15.00 s 0.06 s 0.15 s blocked

Low-current mode BF TRIP repeat mode Current threshold for BF Current threshold for BF - EF Time delay for BF with 1-pole faults Time delay for BF with multi-pole faults Time delay for BF low current mode Time delay for BF pulse mode Time delay BF after CB fault Time delay for TRIP repeat Supervision bin. input BF-release Supervision time BF start / release Minimum duration of TRIP command Earth fault characteristic switchover

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

129

Functions

5.3.8

List of Information from the Central Unit

$00, .., $03 are variables which will be automatically replaced by $00 Number of the bay unit $01 Bay name $02 Name of the switching element (e.g. isolator or circuit breaker) $03 Name of the bus zone

FNo. 10436 10437 10478 TRIP BF M BF ImpBI errorM >EF charact.

Alarm

Comments Trip command BF (group alarm) Timing error BF impulse input (g. a.) >Earth fault characteristic active Timing error BF input $00 L1 Timing error BF input $00 L2 Timing error BF input $00 L3 Timing error BF input $00 3pole Timing error BF release $00 1pole Timing error BF release $00 3pole Timing error BF impulse input $00 15V supply supervision $00 5V supply supervision $00 0V supply supervision $00 Measured value supervision I-SUM $00

176.1091 BFBIErr $00 L1 176.1092 BFBIErr $00 L2 176.1093 BFBIErr $00 L3 176.1094 BFBIErr $00 3P 176.1101 BFRlErr $00 1P 176.1102 BFRlErr $00 3P 176.1104 BFBIImpErr $00 176.1171 15V-superv $00 176.1172 5V-superv $00 176.1173 0V-superv $00 176.1175 MeasInSup $00

130

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

5.3.9

List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7617 7619 7621 7622 7632 7633 7634 7635 7639 7643 >CBF L1 >CBF L2 >CBF L3 >CBF puls >CBF release >CB OFF >CB not ready >CBF 3-pole >CBF rel.3p. CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 BB intertrip CBF TRIP L123

Alarm

Comments >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker failure pulse >Circuit breaker failure release >Circuit breaker open >Circuit breaker not ready >Circuit breaker failure start 3-pole >Circuit breaker failure release 3-pole CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Busbar protection: Intertrip CBF protection blocked by Central Unit

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

131

Functions

5.4

End Fault Protection

The function of the end fault protection is to protect the zone between the current transformer and the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker is open.

5.4.1

End Fault Protection in the Feeder

With bus-side current transformers (Figure 5-28, page 133, 1a) the zone protected by the busbar protection is normally delimited by the location of the current transformer. The end fault protection allows to extend this zone as far as the circuit breaker. In case of a fault the busbar protection can issue a trip command in very short time. Without end fault protection, the feeder protection would detect a fault, but issue no trip command. The fault could only be cleared by the circuit breaker failure protection functions, with the resulting time delay. With line-side current transformers (Figure 5-28, page 133, 1b) and 2), the end fault protection helps to avoid an overfunction of the busbar protection. If a data transmission feature is provided, it can also issue a transfer trip command to the circuit breaker at the remote end End-Flt. Trip (FNo. 7644/BU). The feeder protection would interpret such a situation as a fault in reverse direction and trip with the resulting delay. Without any transmission channels, the fault is only cleared with a distance-dependent time offset by the remote end. The logic of the end fault protection is shown in Figure 5-29, page 133. A prerequisite for activating the end fault protection is that the circuit breaker is open (>CB OFF (FNo. 7617/BU) marshalled to a binary input). Before the circuit breaker is closed and the feeder current is integrated into the busbar measurement again, the end fault protection must be blocked. Therefore the leading information of the CB CLOSE command is evaluated (>CB man.close (FNo. 7618/BU) marshalled to a binary input). The end fault protection is blocked if the monitoring of the switching status feedback (Chapter 5.5.1.10, page 148) has detected a fault. This function is only available for the bay type feeder bay; it can be activated and deactivated per feeder with the parameter End Fault Prot (XX29/CU).

Bus-side current transformers

Line-side current transformers

132

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

End Fault Protection

CT location: 1a) inside (relating to Q7) current transformers, busbar side (relating to Q0) 1b) inside (relating to Q7) current transformers, line side (relating to Q0) 2) line-side current transformers (relating to Q7)

Figure 5-28 Possible CT locations

Figure 5-29 End fault protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

133

Functions

5.4.2

Protection in the Dead Zone of the Bus Coupler

In the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection one bus coupler can be assigned either one (1-bay coupler) or two (2-bay coupler) bay units. This is mainly determined by the number of current transformers contained in the coupler, although in special cases bus couplers with only one current transformer can be allocated two bay units as well, e.g. if the bus coupler comprises more than 5 isolators. In that case the current is fed to both bay units. The treatment of the dead zone of the bus coupler, however, is the same in both versions.

Figure 5-30 Allocation of the bus coupler currents with only one bus coupler current transformer

When considering a short-circuit in the dead zone of the bus coupler, a distinction must be made between cases with closed circuit breaker and cases with open circuit breaker. 5.4.2.1 Circuit Breaker Closed In the event of a short-circuit in the dead zone of the bus coupler with the circuit breaker closed, bus zone BZ A is tripped because I1 and ICP flow towards busbar A. Bus zone BZ B remains in operation, which means that the fault continues to be fed (Figure 5-31, page 135 "(1)"). In order to interrupt the short-circuit current, the second bus zone must be isolated, too. For this purpose, the bay unit monitors the current in the bus coupler after BZ A has been tripped. If the current in the bus coupler persists after the time delay of the breaker failure protection set with the parameter T-BF-1P (XX20/CU) or T-BF-mP (XX21/CU) has elapsed, the current ICP for the measuring system BZ A and for the currently stabilized measuring system BZ B is set to zero (Figure 5-31, page 135 "(2)"). This results in an unbalancing of the measuring system BZ B, which issues a TRIP command to all affected circuit breakers. By connecting in addition the auxiliary contact "CB Open" of the coupler circuit breaker, the second busbar can be tripped even before the breaker failure protection time T-BF has elapsed (Chapter 5.4.2.2, page 135).

134

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

End Fault Protection

Tabelle 5-1

Allocation of bus coupler currents to measuring systems Meas. system BZ A BZ B ICP, I2 (ICP = 0) I2 BZ A trip BZ B stable BZ A healthy BZ A trip by special treatment Reaction

Current allocation until expiry of T-BF

ICP, I1

Current allocation after ICP = 0 delay time T-BF or after I1 =0 detection of CB TRIP

Figure 5-31 Short-circuit in the dead zone of the bus coupler with the circuit breaker closed

5.4.2.2

Circuit Breaker Open If a short-circuit occurs in the dead zone with open circuit breaker and closed isolators, the wrong bus zone (BZA) would be tripped without appropriate countermeasures (Figure 5-32, page 135). The reason for the incorrect tripping is as follows: IBZA = I (feed)BZA + ICP ISBZA = ICP > 0 ("Fault in BZA") IBZB = I (feed) BZB + ICP IBZB = 0 ("No fault in BZB") Therefore the status of the bus coupler circuit breaker must be considered to prevent erroneous tripping ">CB OFF" (FNo. 7617/BU) . With the circuit breaker open, the coupler current for measuring system BZA and for measuring system BZB is set to zero. As a result, the fault current ICP is only detected and tripped in measuring system BZB. The resulting allocation of the coupler currents with the circuit breaker open can be seen in Tabelle 5-1, page 135 "after T-BF" (Figure 5-32, page 135).

Figure 5-32 Short-circuit in the dead zone with the circuit breaker open

If the bus coupler comprises two current transformers ("2-bay coupler"), both coupler currents are set to zero with the CB open (Figure 5-33, page 136).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

135

Functions

Figure 5-33 Bus coupler with 2 CTs (overlapping measurement)

In this case, bus zone BZB is correctly tripped and bus zone BZA remains in service. Delayed recognition When after a bus fault the circuit breaker reaches its final position and the secondary CT currents decay, the breaker failure protection may be undercut. To avoid this, the coupler currents are only processed after the delay time set with the parameter T-CB open (XX26/CU) has elapsed.

5.4.2.3

CLOSE Command of the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker If the bus coupler circuit breaker is open, the current of the coupler bay is set to zero for the protection of bus zones BZA and BZB (Bild 5-34, page 136). If the bus coupler circuit breaker is closed onto a short-circuit in bus zone BZB, the protection trip may be faster than the circuit breaker status processing. This may cause spurious tripping of the healthy bus zone BZA. To avoid this, a leading contact for closing the circuit breaker integrates the current of the coupler current transformer into the protection algorithm. The circuit breaker position must be detected by the binary input >CB man.close (FNo. 7618/BU). As soon as an active signal is detected at the binary input, a time delay of 200 ms is started. After the expiration of this time delay, the auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker must no longer be in the OPEN position. The leading recognition of the coupler CT current has to be ensured for all possible applications of the CLOSE command. Possible applications may include: Manual closing control by control-discrepancy switch Possibly remote control of the bus coupler circuit breaker by telecontrol or substation control systems Reclosing by an automatic reclosing device

Bild 5-34

Switching onto an earthed busbar

136

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

End Fault Protection

5.4.3

Setting Notes
The parameter T-CB open (XX23/CU) is used to delay processing of the circuit breaker OPEN status for special treatment of the coupler currents and for the end fault protection. If the bay is configured as a feeder, the parameter End Fault Prot (XX29/CU) is used to activate and deactivate the end fault protection. For coupler bays the setting of this parameter is not relevant. The parameter T-BF-1P (XX20/CU) is used to delay for 1-pole earth faults the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection. This delay time must be set higher than the sum of delay times set with the parameters T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU) aund Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) for 2-stage CBF. Siemens recommends to set this parameter to twice the circuit breaker trip time.

T-CB open

End Fault Prot

T-BF-1P

T-BF-mP

The parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/CU) is used to delay for multipole faults the TRIP command and the transfer trip signal issued by the breaker failure protection. This delay time must be set higher than the sum of delay times set with the parameters T-TRIP repeat (XX25/CU) aund Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) for 2-stage CBF. Siemens recommends to set this parameter to twice the circuit breaker trip time.

5.4.4

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 118 119 120 121 125 126 129

Setting Title I> BF I> BF-EF T-BF-1P T-BF-mP T-TRIP repeat T-CB open End Fault Prot

Setting Options 0.10 .. 2.00 I / In 0.05 .. 2.00 I / In 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.00 .. 10.00 s 0.00 .. 10.00 s ON OFF

Default Setting 0.50 I / In 0.25 I / In 0.25 s 0.25 s 0.12 s 0.00 s OFF

Comments Current threshold for BF Current threshold for BF - EF Time delay for BF with 1-pole fault Time delay for BF with multi-pole faults Time delay for TRIP repeat Time delay for CB open End fault protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

137

Functions

5.4.5

List of Information from the Central Unit

FNo. 10477 10478 CZ release >EF charact.

Alarm Check zone released

Comments

>Earth fault characteristic active

5.4.6

List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 7617 7618 7623 7644 >CB OFF >CB man.close >CB ON. Trip End-Flt. Trip

Alarm >Circuit breaker open

Comments

>Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker closed End fault protection: Trip phase L123

138

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

5.5

Supervisory Functions
The 7SS52 V4 protection system incorporates comprehensive self-monitoring functions which cover both the hardware and the software. This guarantees a high availability and security against overfunctioning and underfunctioning as well as low demand on maintenance.

5.5.1

Functional Description
The entire protection system is cyclically monitored from the measuring inputs through the data communication between central unit and bay units up to the trip relay coils. Time monitoring functions (watchdogs) continuously check the program sequences of each processor module. Failure of a processor or malfunctions in the program sequence cause an automatic reset of the processor system. Additional plausibility checks and program runtime checks ensure that program processing errors are reliably detected. Such errors also lead to a processor reset and a system restart. After three unsuccessful restarts, the complete protection system automatically removes itself from service. In case of a malfunction in the central unit, the readiness relays 1 and 2 on the input/output module (EAZ) drop off and, being equipped with NC contacts, generate a live status annunciation Dev.operative" (FNo. 00051/CU). Each bay unit has moreover its own NC contacts which generate a live status annunciation "Dev.operative" (FNo. 51/BU). In these cases the red "ERROR" LED shines on the front panel of the central unit or of the affected bay unit.

5.5.1.1

Zone-Selective Blocking In most cases it will be desirable, in the case of external or internal faults and malfunctions of the 7SS52 protection system, to block only those measuring systems (protection zones) that are affected so that the healthy portion of the system can continue to operate. The setting of the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU) specifies whether the blocking acts selectively for a zone and perhaps a phase, or for the entire protection system.

Caution!
In the presence of a fault in a feeder which is in operation or a measuring error, the feeder current is not available for the check zone measuring system either. In such cases the release signal for tripping by the check zone measuring system is artificially generated so that in case of a busbar fault the necessary tripping conditions are fulfilled. The check zone is released with a delay adjustable via the parameter T-Idiff SUPERV. (6307/CU) and is documented with the alarm "CZ release" (FNo. 10477/CU). As selective blocking does not offer the additional security provided by the check zone, the cause of the fault should be eliminated as promptly as possible.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

139

Functions

Bay unit failure

All serial links between the bay unit and the central unit are continuously monitored in the central unit. A failure or disturbance of an operating bay unit leads to the output of an alarm but not to a system reset. The same is true for a failure or disturbance of the link between bay unit and central unit. If the connection fails, the protection is blocked in accordance with the settings of the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU), either selectively for the zone for which the respective bay unit is switched and, if required, for the phase, or completely.

Measured value errors

The analog inputs of the bay unit are cyclically monitored (Chapter 5.5.1.3, page 141). The measured value error consists of the offset monitoring and the current sum monitoring. Furthermore, the measured values read in with gain 1 and 16 are checked for plausibility to each other. If one of these errors occurs, the protection is immediately blocked - selectively or entirely - and the error is signalled. If the error has been present longer than 1 s, the blocking is permanent and can only be reset with a warm restart.

Figure 5-35 Simplified logic of the monitoring function

Isolator malfunction

Isolators are monitored with regard to runtime, isolator status plausibility and auxiliary voltage. An isolator malfunction with the parameter ISOL Malfunct (6302/CU) set to blocking and the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU) set to zone/phase causes a blocking of only the protection zone to which the feeder with the faulty isolator is connected.

140

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

5.5.1.2

Auxiliary and Reference Voltages The bay unit processor monitors the reference voltages of the measured value detection, as well as the supply voltages. The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable range; depending on the setting of the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU), the blocking is selective or complete; the deviation is reported after three scanning cycles 15V-superv $00 (FNo. 176.1171/CU), 5V-superv $00 (FNo. 176.1172/CU), 0V-superv $00 (FNo. 176.1173/ CU) (Figure 5-35, page 140). The auxiliary voltages in the central unit are monitored by the converters themselves. Faults are annunciated 15V-superv CU (FNo. 10420/CU), 24V-superv CU (FNo. 10421/CU). Failure or disconnection of the auxiliary voltage automatically takes the affected device out of service. This status is annunciated via an NC contact. Transient auxiliary voltage dips of 50 ms will not influence the unit Depending on the setting of the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU), a failure of the auxiliary voltage in a bay unit results in a selective or complete blocking of the protection system.

5.5.1.3

Measured Value Supervision The analog input circuits of the bay unit are cyclically monitored from the input transducers up to the digitalization. This is done by forming the current sum and executing the following plausibility check: I = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 + IE | I | = | IL1 | + | IL2 | + | IL3 | + | IE | The measured value monitoring picks up if | I | > 0.2 I/IN and |I|>k.|I| with k = 0.125 (stabilizing factor) The pick-up characteristic is shown in Figure 5-36, page 142. If the supervision detects that the measured values are not plausible, the analog measuring circuits are assumed to be faulty, the measured value cycle is accordingly marked and the calculation of the protection algorithms blocked for this cycle. If the fault prevails longer than 1 s time, the protection system is selectively or completely blocked and an annunciation "MeasInSup $00" (FNo. 176.1175/CU) The blocking can only be reset with a warm restart (Figure 5-35, page 140).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

141

Functions

Figure 5-36 Characteristic for measured value monitoring

Memory supervision

The memory modules of the central unit and the bay units are periodically tested for faults. A checksum is formed for the program memory (Flash EPROM) during startup and cyclically during operation. For the RAM, a data pattern is written during start-up and read again. Write and read results are compared. For the parameter and configuration data memory (EEPROM), the checksum of the stored quantities is formed and compared with the checksum calculated during each new writing process. For the dual-port RAM of the slave modules, the stored parameters and configuration data are compared with the data on the master module.

5.5.1.4

Output Trip Supervision The output trip channels of the bay unit are controlled via two trip channels and one release channel. The trip output channels are checked in connection with the cyclic protection test (Chapter 5.5.1.7, page 143).

5.5.1.5

Battery Monitoring The central unit and the bay units are equipped with buffer batteries to ensure that LED states, date and time, operational and fault events as well as fault records are maintained in case of an auxiliary power failure. As soon as the battery voltage drops below a certain threshold, an alarm "Batt. superv CU" (FNo. 10422/CU) or BattSuperv $00 (FNo. 176.1174/CU) is output.

5.5.1.6

Supervision in Maintenance Mode While a bay is in maintenance, settable with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU), there is no monitoring of the isolator status checkback signals, nor a plausibility check.

Isolator supervision

142

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

5.5.1.7

Cyclic Test The cyclic test as part of the self-diagnosis checks cyclically all measuring systems and connected bay units from the digitized measured values up to the trip relays. As this test is treated like a real fault and uses the same transmission links for measured values and TRIP commands, it yields utmost security and reliability. This test does not influence the protection functions. The test is performed only if there is no pickup of the protection. On detecting a failure, the identical test routine is repeated twice. After this a reset is performed. The following alarms are generated: Group alarms: Flt autotest M (FNo. 10429/CU) Single alarm: Flt aut $00 (FNo. 176.1190/CU)

Central unit

Bay unit

In the bay units, the trip command circuits are monitored additionally. The following alarms are generated: Group alarms: Flt autotest M (FNo. 10429/CU) Single alarms: Flt aut $00 (FNo. 176.1190/CU)

5.5.1.8

Supervision of External Current Transformer Circuits Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the main current transformers, as well as errors in the connections or in the configuration of the busbar protection, are systematically detected and reported by the system. It evaluates for this purpose the differential currents which are formed in the protection processor modules ZPS-BSZ1 to ZPS-BSZ3.

Differential current supervision

The differential current of each measuring system is individually monitored. Under nofault conditions, the differential current of each measuring system is approximately zero. If no feeders are assigned to a measuring system, the differential current and the stabilizing current are set to zero. The differential current supervision picks up if the mean value of the differential current exceeds a certain threshold within an interval set with the parameter T-Idiff SUPERV (6307/CU). This threshold can be set individually for the check zone with the parameter Id> SUPERV CZ (6309/CU), and for the selective protection with the parameter Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU). If the differential current falls below the threshold before the set time, the time delay is restarted if it occurs again. The differential current supervision can be activated and deactivated with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU). The blocking is reset by operator input Reset Id-Block or via binary input >Reset Id-Block (BI FNo. 6/CU) in the central unit. In case of a pickup of the differential current supervision, the reaction can be set individually for the check zone (with the parameter DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU)) and for the selective protection (with the parameter DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU). The following alarms are generated:

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

143

Functions

Group alarms (selective): Id-sup BZ M (FNo. 10415/CU), Id-sup BZ L1 M (FNo. 10416/CU), Id-sup BZ L2 M (FNo. 10417/CU), Id-sup BZ L3 M (FNo. 10418/CU), Id-sup $03 M (FNo. 177.1331/CU) Group alarms (check zone): Id-sup CZ M (FNo. 10410/CU), Single alarms (selective, module ZPS-BSZ2): Id-supL1-2 $03 (FNo. 177.1321/CU), Id-supL2-2 $03 (FNo. 177.1322/CU), Id-supL3-2 $03 (FNo. 177.1323/CU), Single alarms (selective, module ZPS-BSZ3): Id-supL1-3 $03 (FNo. 177.1326/CU), Id-supL2-3 $03 (FNo. 177.1327/CU), Id-supL3-3 $03 (FNo. 177.1328/CU), Single alarms (check zone): Id-sup CZ L1 (FNo. 10411/CU), Id-sup CZ L2 (FNo. 10412/CU), Id-sup CZ L3 (FNo. 10413/CU), Linearized current transformers Linearized current transformers may have angle errors. The secondary current then lags behind the primary current. In the event of a short-circuit, the CB interrupts the primary current near current zero. The secondary current, however, continues to flow and decays according to an e-function. The angle error and the time constant depend mainly of the protection burden. The angle error increases and the time constant decreases with increasing burden. When the primary current is interrupted, a current continues to flow in the CT circuit on the secondary side. The busbar protection cannot distinguish this current from a differential current. At first, erroneous tripping is prevented by the stabilizing current. The stabilizing current decays according to an e-function with a time constant of 64 ms. The zero current monitoring prevents spurious tripping after the stabilizing current has decayed. If the zero crossings of the current do not recur at the latest after 32 ms (fN = 50 Hz) or 27 ms (fN = 60 Hz), the measuring system detects a DC current and issues a selective blocking command to the protection Block ZeroCross (FNo. 10444/CU). The blocking is maintained until the current drops below the zero current monitoring threshold again. The zero current monitoring can be activated and deactivated with the parameter ZERO CR SUPERV (6312A/CU).

Zero current supervision

144

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

5.5.1.9

Isolator Status Supervision If two busbars are solidly linked via the isolators of one feeder, all feeders which are connected to the linked busbars are allocated to a preferred busbar protection measuring system. In any case, the bus zone with the lowest configured number is considered to be preferred. At the same time, the coupler bay is taken out of the allocation list with respect to the currents. If an isolator changes position, for instance from the OPEN position, it needs a certain time (isolator running time) to reach the other position. During this running time, the isolator is considered to be in the CLOSED position. This intermediate status is monitored. If after a set isolator running time ISOL TIME (6301/CU) no checkback signal is given, the isolator assumes faulty status and an alarm is created by the central unit per isolator ("FltR $01 $02" (FNo. 176.1122/CU); e.g. for isolator 2). Usually, the isolator auxiliary voltage is sub-fused in each bay. If the auxiliary voltage is missing, then all the isolators in this bay display the bit pattern 0/0 (neither OPEN nor CLOSED), and the alarm "Bay DC fail M" (FNo. 10426/CU) is output. In order to prevent erroneous annunciations, there is always a short delay of 500 ms for the response and the signalling of auxiliary voltage failure. For the distinction of isolator faults, at least two isolators are to be monitored. By cross-checking with the other isolator positions, this fault condition can be detected. The bay with the faulted isolator is either assigned the old positions according to the busbar protection (flip-flop relay characteristic) or all isolators of this bay are considered to be CLOSED. The type of treatment can be set with the parameter ISOL DC FAIL (6303/CU). In the event of short-circuits in the feeders, the busbar protection remains stable even with a wire break on the checkback signal lines for the isolator status. In that case the isolator is considered to be CLOSED. However, the so-called preferential treatment can lead to unselective tripping if all of the following conditions apply: Wire break in the checkback signal line for the isolator status Isolator is in OPEN position Fault on one busbar Second isolator of the feeder is in CLOSED position Non-selective tripping can be prevented by additional measures. Such measures could be, for instance, interlocking of the TRIP command with the integrated overcurrent query or monitoring the pick-up of the feeder protection. Wire breaks are annunciated in the central unit as isolator malfunction status individually for each feeder ("FltR $01 $02" (FNo. 176.1122/CU); e.g. for isolator 2).

Preferential treatment for busbar coupling

Isolator running status

Auxiliary voltage supply failure

Wire break

Behaviour in the case of an isolator intermediate status

The parameter ISOL ST 1/1 (6304/CU) is ised to specify which isolator status will be assumed if the status checkback signal is not plausible (at the same time OPEN and CLOSED). The meaning of the isolator status indications is shown in the following table.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

145

Functions

Tabelle 5-2 Isolator status indications

Isolator status indication CLOSED 1 0 1 0 1 1 OPEN

Meaning Isolator CLOSED Isolator OPEN Isolator status not plausible

Reaction Isolator CLOSED Isolator OPEN

Alarm Alarm "CLOSED" (FNo. 176.1110/CU) *) Alarm "OPEN" (FNo 176.1110/CU) *)

new isolator status accord- Alarm "Isol flt alarm" ing to setting 6304/CU (FNo. 10425/CU), "FltP $01 $02" (FNo. 176.1113/CU) and "Isol fit pos M" (FNo. 10428/CU) new isolator status CLOSED new isolator status according to setting 6303/CU (see Auxiliary voltage supply failure , page 145) Alarm "Isol fit run M" (FNo. 10427/CU) "Bay DC fail M" (FNo. 10426/CU) and "BayDC fail $00" (FNo. 176.1134/CU)

Isolator malfunction: runtime wire break no auxiliary voltage

*) The values such as CLOSED and OPEN of the alarm (FNo. 176.1110/CU) are variable. Depending on the isolator, the alarm is generated via FNo. 176.1110/CU, 176.1115/CU, 176.1120/CU, 176.1125/CU or 176.1130/CU. Isolators malfunctions (plausibility or runtime errors) and failure of the auxiliary voltage supply for the isolator checkback signals are not annunciated until the set isolator running time ISOL TIME (6301/CU) has elapsed. While a bay is in maintenance, there is no monitoring of the isolator status checkback signals, nor a plausibility check. Reset of isolator alarms Depending on the setting of the parameter ISOL Malfunct (6302/CU), several types of behaviour of the blocking are possible, see Figure 5-37, page 147. The function is reset with the control "Reset IsoMalBl" or by the binary input ">Reset IsoMalBl" (BI FNo. 7/CU) in the central unit.

146

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

The following applies for the isolator position: A blocking is only carried out if the bay is assigned to a busbar because of the intermediate position, i.e. the isolator is CLOSED. An alarm is generated, e.g. "$01 $02" (FNo. 176.1110/CU - 176.1113/CU). a) 1-1 Position tv = 500 ms 6304/CU is effective During the delay time tv the old isolator position is kept. b) 0-0 Exceeding of the runtime tv = 6301/CU (isolator in CLOSED position) The isolator position CLOSED is kept. c) 0-0 Auxiliary voltage failure tv = 500 ms 6303/CU is effective During the delay time tv the old isolator position is kept.
Figure 5-37 Annunciations and behaviour of the blocking in the case of isolator malfunction and acknowledgement

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

147

Functions

5.5.1.10 Supervisory of Circuit Breaker Interrogation of the feeder circuit breaker is required for the end fault protection function (Chapter 5.4, page 132) and for low-current circuit breaker failure protection mode (Chapter 5.3.5.2, page 118). Three circuit breaker signals can be recognized: CB in CLOSED position (CB CLOSED) CB in OPEN position (CB OPEN) Circuit breaker CLOSE control command (CB CLOSE command) The circuit breaker status is recognized by marshalling it to binary inputs of the bay unit. For safety reasons, we recommend an external logic link for phase-selective circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. The final position of the circuit breaker is only recognized (Bild 5-38, page 148) if all three auxiliary contacts are closed. If the CLOSED and OPEN position is continuously implausible for a longer period than set in the parameter CB SUP TIME (6315/CU), this leads to a fault annunciation (Tabelle 5-3, page 149). The setting of the runtime monitoring of the circuit breaker with the parameter CB SUP TIME (6315/CU) serves for a better adaptation of the sequences to the switching operations (e.g. single-pole AR). The duration of the CLOSE command is separately monitored because false information at the binary input would cause a deterioration of the end fault protection (Chapter 5.4.1, page 132) and/or of the function Protection in the dead zone of the bus coupler (Chapter 5.4.2, page 134).

Bild 5-38

Interrogation of circuit breaker

148

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

Tabelle 5-3

Alarms related to the circuit breaker status Binary input Status of the circuit breaker Failure Closed Closed by CLOSE command 0/1 0/1 Open Failure Alarm

CB OPEN 0 0 0 1 1

CB CLOSED 0 1 1 0 1

CB CLOSE command 0/1

CB fault $01 (FNo. 176.1136/CU) Closed CB fault $01 (FNo. 176.1136/CU) Open CB fault $01 (FNo. 176.1136/CU)

For the treatment of the dead zone in the bus coupler and for the end fault protection, a circuit breaker in the intermediate position causes the blocking of the end fault protection after the expiry of the monitoring delay time CB SUP TIME (6315/CU). For low-current mode of breaker failure protection, a circuit breaker which is in the intermediate position is assumed to be open after the expiry of the monitoring delay time CB SUP TIME (6315/CU). The low-current mode is not effective in this case. For the busbar intertripping in the bus coupler bay, only the CB OPEN is taken into account in the intermediate position. 5.5.1.11 Overview of the Supervisory Functions

Tabelle 5-4

Summary of the supervisory functions Monitoring Possible cause and response Failure of the DC-DC converter output voltages Blocking of protection and alarm "0V-superv $00" (FNo. 176.1173/CU) "5V-superv $00" (FNo. 176.1172/CU) "15V-superv $00" (FNo. 176.1171/CU) Failure of the 5 V voltage causes reset of the device failure annunciation and thus blocks the device completely. "15V-superv CU" (FNo. 10420/CU) "24V-superv CU" (FNo. 10421/CU) Failure of the 15 V or 24 V voltage of the central unit does not block the protection. Internal device error in measured value acquisition Blocking of protection and alarm "MeasInSup $00" (FNo. 176.1175/CU) "Meas sup BU M" (FNo. 10423/CU) After three unsuccessful restart attempts the protection is blocked.

Auxiliary voltage supervision

BU: (0 V)Digit (15 V)Digit

CU: 15 V 24 V

Measured value monitoring BU | I | > 0.5 . I/IN | I | > 0.125 . | I | Cyclic monitoring of the memories (BU, CU)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

149

Functions

Monitoring Permanent monitoring of the program flow by means of watchdog (BU, CU) Differential current supervision Bus zone-selective protection | I | >Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU) for T >T-Idiff SUPERV (6307/CU)

Possible cause and response After three unsuccessful restart attempts the protection is blocked. Current transformer circuit faulty Bus zone-selective blocking if the parameterDIF SUP mode BZ (6310/ CU) is set to blocking, otherwise only alarm "IdSup Lz-y $0x" (FNo. 177.1321, 177.1322, 177.1323, 177.1326, 177.1327, 177.1328/CU) Blocking if the parameter DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) is set to blocking, otherwise only alarm "Id-Sup CZ Lz" (FNo. 10411, 10412, 10413/CU) Wire break or intermediate status Alarm "FltR $01 $02" (FNo. 176.1112, 176.1117, 176.1122, 176.1127, 176.1132/CU) Feeder aux. voltage MCB tripped Alarm "BayDC fail $00" (FNo. 176.1134/CU) Alarm "FltP $01 $02" (FNo. 176.1113, 176.1118, 176.1123, 176.1128, 176.1133/CU) Blocking of the protection system and alarm after two recognitions of a transmission error "Fail Com.CU" (FNo. 7650/BU) Alarm and blocking of the binary input of the affected feeder "BF-BIErr $00 Lz" (FNo. 176.1091, 176.1092, 176.1093/CU) or "BF-BIErr $00 3P" (FNo. 176.1094/ CU); Supervision picks up if a signal is present at the BI BF-phase for the time T > 15s; Supervision picks up if both BI BF-phase and BI BF release do not arrive within the time window T = limit; Alarm and blocking of CBF "BFRlErr $01 1P" (FNo. 176.1101/CU) or "BFRlErr $00 3P" (FNo. 176.1102/CU) After three recognitions of an error blocking of the protection and alarm. "Flt aut $00" (FNr. 176.1190/CU) and "Flt autotest M" (FNr. 10429/CU) Monitoring is done phase-selectively and the alarm "Block ZeroCross" (FNo. 10444/ CU) is generated

Check zone, all except bus coupler | I | >Id> SUPERV CZ (6309/CU) for T >T-Idiff SUPERV (6307/CU)

Monitoring of isolator status Running position Isolator OPEN/CLOSED = 0/0 for T >ISOL TIME (6301/CU) Auxiliary voltage supply failure All isolator positions of one bay = 0/0 Implausible isolator status Isolator OPEN/CLOSED = 1/1 Cyclic check of the data transmission links (FO) between central unit and bay unit Monitoring of ">CBF Lx", ">CBF 3-pole" for T > 15 s ">CBF Lx", ">CBF 3-pole" and ">CBF release", ">release 3-pole" for T > T-BF 2chan (XX28/CU) ">CBF release", ">release 3-pole" for T >T-BF rel sup (XX27/CU)

Cyclic test with simulation of a fault current and monitoring of the entire signal processing from the digitized measured values to the control currents of the trip relay coils Zero current monitoring

150

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

Monitoring Battery monitoring of central units and bay units

Possible cause and response Alarm is generated for the bay unit with "BattSuperv $00" (FNo. 176.1174/CU) and for the central unit with "Batt. superv CU" (FNo. 10422/CU) and group alarm "Err PROT ACTIVE" (FNo. 10475/CU)

Cyclic monitoring of the parameter/configu- A fault buffer entry is made and a restart carration data of the central units and bay units ried out. After two unsuccessful attmpts: fault Monitoring of CB-feedback no plausible State CB OPEN/CLOSED = 0/0 or 1/1 Alarm: "CB fault $01 (FNo. 176.1135/CU) Blocking or low-current circuit breaker failure protectiont

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

151

Functions

5.5.2

Setting Notes
The parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU) is used to select the blocking mode of the busbar and breaker failure protection in the event of Measured value errors Failure of a bay unit Isolator malfunctions (6302/CU) With setting zone/phase 3-pole or 1-pole blocking is only performed on the protection zone allocated to the bay unit. If zone-selective blocking is performed on a 1-bay coupler, both affected protection zones will be blocked. With setting protection the protection will be blocked completely.

BLOCKING MODE

DIFF SUPERV

The parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU) is used to activate and deactivate the differential current supervision. With setting ON the differential current supervision will be activated. In normal mode the differential current supervision must remain ON. With setting OFF the differential current supervision will be deactivated. The differential current supervision may be deactivated for testing (e.g. for establishing the characteristic).

T-Idiff SUPERV

The parameter T-Idiff SUPERV (6307/CU) is used to set the delay time for blocking or alarm after a pickup of the differential current supervision. The parameterId> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU) is used to set the threshold I/Ino for selective differential current supervision. The parameter Id> SUPERV CZ (6309/CU) is used to set the threshold I/Ino for differential current supervision in the check zone. The monitoring limit value should be set as low as possible, generally to the double maximum differential current in fault-free condition. Please note that due to the fault characteristic of the current transformers, there usually occur more severe faults under weak-infeed conditions than under rated load.

Id> SUPERV BZ

Id> SUPERV CZ

DIF SUP mode BZ

The parameter DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU) is used to set the response of the protection after pickup of the differential current supervision. With setting alarm only a pickup of the differential current supervision causes only an alarm and not a blocking of the protection. With setting block./release the protection will be blocked for the duration of the malfunction. Phase- and bus zone-selective blocking is performed if the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU) is set accordingly. With setting blocking the blocking of the affected phase and zone is treated as with block./release. It differs from the setting block./release in that the protection is released by an operator input Reset Id-Block or a binary input >Reset IdBlock (BI FNo. 6/CU) as soon as the malfunction is eliminated.

152

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

DIF SUP mode CZ

The parameter DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) is used to set the response of the protection after pickup of the differential current supervision. With setting alarm only a pickup of the differential current supervision causes only an alarm and not a blocking of the protection. You should select this setting if you want to set the protection to maximum selectivity. With setting block./release the protection will be blocked for the duration of the malfunction. If a malfunction occurs in the check zone, the corresponding phase of the protection is blocked completely. The blocking is released as soon as the value that initiated it drops below the pickup threshold. With setting blocking the blocking of the affected phase and zone is treated as with block./release. It differs from the setting block./release in that the protection is released by an operator input Reset Id-Block or via a binary input >Reset Id-Block (BI FNo. 6/CU) as soon as the malfunction is eliminated.

ZERO CR SUPERV

When an external fault is tripped by an external protection device, linearized current transformers with TPZ cores may carry during the demagnetizing phase a DC component that mimicks a fault in the protection zone. In order to avoid spurious tripping, the differential current may be monitored for the presence of a pure DC component. For this purpose the zero crossing supervisionZERO CR SUPERV (6312A/CU) must be activated. With setting ON the zero crossing supervision will be activated. With setting OFF the zero crossing supervision will be deactivated.

I> ZERO CR

The parameter I> ZERO CR (6313A/CU) is used to set the threshold of the differential current for the zero crossing supervision. Set this limit value to 50% of the corresponding limit value for the differential current in the parameters Id> BZ (6102/CU) and Id> CZ (6104/CU), or Id> BZ - EF (6109A/CU) or Id> CZ - EF (6111A/CU), using the earth fault characteristic. The DC component monitoring is performed for each measuring system. The differential current of the selective protection zones and of the check zone is compared with the set threshold. f the zero crossings of the current do not recur at the latest after 32 ms (fN = 50 Hz)or 27 ms (fN = 60 Hz), the measuring system assumes a DC current and issues a selective blocking command to the protection. The blocking is maintained until the current drops below the threshold again.

ISOL TIME

The parameter ISOL TIME (6301/CU) is used to set the threshold for the isolator runtime monitoring. If no final position checkback signal is received for an isolator after this time, the protection assumes the isolator to be faulty and issues an alarm. This threshold is determined by the longest isolator runtime to be expected.

ISOL DC FAIL

The parameter ISOL DC FAIL (6303/CU) is used to choose the isolator status which will be assumed by the isolator replica if the auxiliary voltage for the isolator status checkback signal has failed. With setting OLD the old status will be assumed. With setting ON the isolator will be assumed to be CLOSED.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

153

Functions

ISOL ST 1/1

The parameter ISOL ST 1/1 (6304/CU) is used to choose the isolator status which will be assumed if the checkback signal is not plausible (at the same time OPEN and CLOSED). With setting OLD the old status will be assumed. With setting ON the isolator will be assumed to be CLOSED.

ISOL Malfunct

The parameter ISOL Malfunct (6302/CU) is used to select the response of the protection to isolator malfunctions (runtime or plausibility error, auxiliary voltage failure). With setting alarm only isolator malfunctions will only lead to the output of an alarm. The protection will not be blocked. With setting blocking isolator malfunctions will lead to the output of an alarm and to a blocking of the protection system as set in the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/ CU). The blocking is automatically cleared as soon as the isolator malfunction has been eliminated. With setting block./acknow. isolator malfunctions will lead to the output of an alarm and to a blocking of the protection system as set in the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU). The blocking will be maintained until the malfunction has been eliminated and the blocking has been selectively reset by the operator input Reset IsoMalBl or via the binary input ">Reset IsoMalBl" (BI FNo. 7/CU). With setting block./release isolator malfunctions will lead to the output of an alarm and to a blocking of the protection system as set in the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU). The blocking will be cancelled even if the malfunction persists if it has been selectively reset by the operator input Reset IsoMalBl or via the binary input ">Reset IsoMalBl" (BI FNo. 7/CU). In this case a warning "IsoProhib/ fault" (FNo. 10470/CU) will be output. The entry in the operational event buffer will reflect the actual presence of the isolator malfunction.

154

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

5.5.3

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 112

Setting Title Bay status

Setting Options out of service in service maintenance 0.02 .. 15.00 sec 0.06 .. 1.00 sec 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino

Default Setting in service Bay status

Comments

127 128 6102 6104 6109A 6111A 6312A 6301 6302

T-BF rel sup T-BF 2chan Id> BZ Id> CZ Id> BZ - EF Id> CZ - EF

15.00 sec 0.06 sec 1.00 I/Ino 1.00 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino Ein 7.00 sec alarm only

Supervision bin. input BF-release Supervision time BF start / release Diff-current threshold - selective Diff-current threshold check zone Diff-current threshold - selective - EF Diff-current threshold - check zone - EF Zero crossing supervision Limit value isolator time Reaction on isolator malfunction

ZERO CR SUPERV ON OFF ISOL TIME ISOL Malfunct 1.00 .. 180.00 sec alarm only blocking block./release block./acknow. OLD ON OLD ON zone/phase protection ON OFF 1.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.05 .. 0.80 I/Ino 0.05 .. 0.80 I/Ino alarm only blocking block./release alarm only blocking block./release 1.00 .. 180.00 sec

6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310

ISOL DC FAIL ISOL ST 1/1 BLOCKING MODE DIFF SUPERV T-Idiff SUPERV Id> SUPERV BZ Id> SUPERV CZ DIF SUP mode BZ

OLD OLD zone/phase ON 2.00 sec 0.10 I/Ino 0.10 I/Ino blocking

Treatment isolator status on DC fail Treatment isolator status not plausible Blocking mode on failure Differential current supervision Time delay for diff-current supervision Limit value diff-current supervision -BZ Limit value diff-current supervision -CZ Diff-current supervision mode -BZ Diff-current supervision mode -CZ CB supervision time

6311

DIF SUP mode CZ

alarm only

6315

CB SUP TIME

7.00 sec

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

155

Functions

5.5.4

List of Information from the Central Unit

FNo. 10410 10411 10412 10413 10415 10416 10417 10418 10420 10421 10422 10423 10424 10425 10426 10427 10428 10429 10444 10470 Id-sup CZ M

Alarm

Comments Diff-current superv. CZ (group alarm) Diff-current supervision Check Zone L1 Diff-current supervision Check Zone L2 Diff-current supervision Check Zone L3 Diff-current superv. BZ (group alarm) Diff-current superv. BZ L1 (group alarm) Diff-current superv. BZ L2 (group alarm) Diff-current superv. BZ L3 (group alarm) 15V supply supervision central unit 24V supply supervision central unit Battery supervision central unit Measured value superv. BU (group alarm) Supply voltage superv. BU (group alarm) Isolator fault alarm Failure of isolator aux. voltage (g. a.) Isolator fault: run time (group alarm) Isolator position faulty (group alarm) Failure in auto testing (group alarm) Blocking by supervision zero crossing Isolator oper. prohibitted (isol.fault) Timing error BF input $00 L1 Timing error BF input $00 L2 Timing error BF input $00 L3 Timing error BF input $00 3pole Timing error BF release $00 1pole Timing error BF release $00 3pole $01 Isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02

Id-sup CZ L1 Id-sup CZ L2 Id-sup CZ L3 Id-sup BZ M

Id-sup BZ L1 M Id-sup BZ L2 M Id-sup BZ L3 M 15V-superv CU 24V-superv CU Batt. superv CU Meas sup BU M Supply sup BU M Isol flt alarm Bay DC fail M Isol flt run M Isol flt pos M Flt autotest M Block ZeroCross IsoProhib/fault

176.1091 BFBIErr $00 L1 176.1092 BFBIErr $00 L2 176.1093 BFBIErr $00 L3 176.1094 BFBIErr $00 3P 176.1101 BFRlErr $00 1P 176.1102 BFRlErr $00 3P 176.1110 $01 $02 176.1112 FltR $01 $02 176.1113 FltP $01 $02 176.1117 FltR $01 $02 176.1118 FltP $01 $02 176.1122 FltR $01 $02 176.1123 FltP $01 $02

156

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervisory Functions

FNo. 176.1127 FltR $01 $02 176.1128 FltP $01 $02 176.1133 FltP $01 $02 176.1171 15V-superv $00 176.1172 5V-superv $00 176.1173 0V-superv $00 176.1174 BattSuperv $00 176.1175 MeasInSup $00 176.1190 Flt aut $00 177.1321 Id-supL1-2 $03 177.1322 Id-supL2-2 $03 177.1323 Id-supL3-2 $03 177.1326 Id-supL1-3 $03 177.1327 Id-supL2-3 $03 177.1328 Id-supL3-3 $03 177.1331 Id-sup $03 M

Alarm

Comments Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 15V supply supervision $00 5V supply supervision $00 0V supply supervision $00 Battery supervision $00 Measured value supervision I-SUM $00 Failure in automatic testing $00 Id-sup $03 L1-2 Id-sup $03 L2-2 Id-sup $03 L3-2 Id-sup $03 L1-3 Id-sup $03 L2-3 Id-sup $03 L3-3 Id-sup $03 M

5.5.5

List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 51 143 145 161 7650 Device OK Failure 15V Failure 0V I supervision Fail Com.CU

Alarm

Comments Device is Operational and Protecting Failure of internal 15 VDC power supply Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply Measured value supervision of currents Failure in communication w.Central Unit

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

157

Functions

5.6
5.6.1

Oscillographic Fault Recording

Mode of operation

Note A description of the bay unit's fault recording function is provided in Chapter 5.13, page 179. Reading out of oscillographic fault recording data is described in Chapter 6.2.3, page 215. During a fault event, the instantaneous measured values are stored at intervals of 1 ms (fN = 50 Hz) and 833 s (fN = 60 Hz) in a buffer of the central unit. A fault record is initiated by a trip from an internal protection function, a binary input with the annunciation ">Trig.Wave.Cap." marshalled to it, or a test fault record request entered via DIGSI or the central unit front panel. Oscillographic fault recording covers the differential and restraint currents of each phase for all bus zones and the check zone. After initiation of the fault recording, the data are stored in a range from max. 500 ms before the TRIP command to max. 500 ms after it. The period for the fault recording is max. 5s. Up to 8 fault records can be viewed in the central unit. New fault records are always entered in the fault record data buffer. As soon as the fault record data buffer is full, new fault data overwrite the older data. Fault recording is initiated, for instance, by a busbar short-circuit, by binary nput 2 marshalled to (">Trig.Wave.Cap." (FNo. 4/CU) or by the parameter ReleasFltRecBuf. (8300/CU). The data can be read out to a PC and evaluated by the DIGSI communication software. The fault record data buffer SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 is protected against data loss in case of power failures.

158

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Oscillographic Fault Recording

5.6.2

Setting Notes
The parameter fault rec mode (6401A/CU) is used to specify the conditions under which oscillographic fault records will be stored. With setting global storage, initiation by CU, fault records will be stored in the central unit and in all bay units if one storage criterion is fulfilled in the central unit. On pickup of the backup protection, the fault records are stored locally. This is the most common setting. With setting global storage, local initiation, fault records will be stored in the central unit and in all bay units if one storage criterion is fulfilled in the central unit or in any of the bay units. The storage criterion is set with the parameter INITIATION (7402/BU) in the bay unit (Chapter 5.13.2, page 179). With setting local storage, local initiation, fault records will be stored in the central unit and in the bay unit in which one storage criterion is fulfilled. The storage criterion is set with the parameter INITIATION (7402/BU) in the bay unit (Chapter 5.13.2, page 179).

fault rec mode

MAX. LENGTH

The parameter MAX. LENGTH (6404/CU) is used to set the maximum time available for one fault record. The parameter PRE. TRIG. TIME (6405/CU) is used to set the pre-trigger time for fault recording. The pre-trigger time starts at the specified time before the storage criterion for fault record storage is fulfilled. The parameter POST REC. TIME (6406/CU) is used to set the post-fault time for fault recording. The post-fault time begins as soon as the storage criterion for fault record storage has disappeared. The parameter BinIn CAPT.TIME (6407/CU) is used to set the capture time of the oscillographic fault record when the fault recording is initiated from DIGSI, from the central unit front panel or through a binary input. To set the capture time to infinite, enter .. Even so the capture time cannot exceed the time set with the parameter MAX. LENGTH (6404/CU), which specifies the maximum available length of a fault recording.

PRE. TRIG. TIME

POST REC. TIME

BinIn CAPT.TIME

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

159

Functions

5.6.3

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 6401A

Setting Title fault rec mode

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments

global storage, local initiation global storage, ini- Mode of fault recording global storage, initiation by tiation by CU CU local storage, local initiation 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; 2.00 sec 0.20 sec 0.20 sec 0.40 sec Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input

6404 6405 6406 6407

MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME

5.6.4

Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 7402

Parameters INITIATION

Setting Options STORAGE BY FD. STORAGE BY TRIP START WITH TRIP

Default Settings

Comments

STORAGE BY FD. Start/storage criterion for fault recording

5.6.5

List of Information from the Central Unit

FNo. 4

Alarm >Trig.Wave.Cap.

Comments >Trigger Waveform Capture

160

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Device

5.7
5.7.1

Device
Mode of operation
This section summarizes those annunciations which are not associated with any protection function.

5.7.2

Annunciations
Annunciation: The device has performed a start-up. Relevant information: On Annunciation: The device has performed an initial restart. All buffers have been reset. The parameter settings are unaffected. (Information supplied with the Reset Device annunciation) Relevant information: On Annunciation: The device has performed a restart. Only internal buffers have been reset. Operational event, fault events, fault records and the parameter settings are unaffected. (Information supplied with the Reset Device annunciation) Relevant information: On Annunciation: Device is operational and protecting. With this annunciation, the readiness relay picks up, and the Error LED goes out. Relevant information: On Annunciation: Setting calculation is running. Relevant information: On, the function is occupied by the parameter setting process. Relevant information: Off, the function has been released again. Annunciation: the device is checking the new parameters (on-line parameter setting). Relevant information: On, check has begun. Relevant information: Off, the test is completed, i.e. the device is either operative again, or the new parameters have been saved in a non-volatile memory, or no settings check is running. This annunciation is output as On as soon as the parameter set loaded with DIGSI has been changed by an on-line parameter setting and the device is operating with the new parameters. The annunciation is Off as long as the parameter set loaded with DIGSI is not changed, or output as Off again after a parameter set has been completely reloaded and the device is operating with these parameters. The event log information of this annunciation (On/Off) is maintained in case of an initial or restart. Relevant information: On, parameter changes on-line from the device or through a parameter setting command. Relevant information: Off, parameter set completely reloaded.

Reset Device

Initial start

Resume

Device OK

Setting Calc.

Settings Check

Level-2 change

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

161

Functions

Reset LED

Acknowledgement that LEDs were reset. Relevant information: On This operating mode is used for device tests during commissioning or maintenance. In test mode, all information in monitoring direction is marked with the UBF test bit. This ensures that events caused by testing do not trigger undesirable reactions (acoustic alarms, derived commands and annunciations) in higher-level system components (DIGSI). This operating mode can be activated and deactivated with a tagging command on site or via DIGSI. Relevant information: On/Off Data transmission stop for annunciations, metered and measured values. With data transmission stop on, all information in monitoring direction is marked with the Transmission block bit. The actual transmission blocking is performed in the control center. Relevant information: On/Off Hardware test mode This operating mode is turned on by DIGSI when the user activates in commissioning mode functions such as setting of binary inputs, setting of output relays, setting of annunciations. DIGSI turns the hardware test mode off when the commissioning mode is left. After the Off command, the annunciation Hardware test Off is output, and an initial restart of the device is initiated after 5 seconds. Relevant information: On/Off Input for the external minute pulse. Relevant information (fleeting): On Reset following a clock synchronization. Relevant information (fleeting): On Annunciation: Device switched over to daylight saving time. Relevant information: On, the date/time management has received a request for time synchronization with daylight saving time. Relevant information: Off, the date/time management has received a time synchronization command without daylight saving time. Annunciation: Clock synchronization error. Relevant information: On, no synchronization received within parameterized tolerance time. Relevant information: Off, synchronization received again. Annunciation: Not all annunciations generated by the device could be stored in the buffer. The cause is probably a buffer overflow. Relevant information (fleeting): On Annunciation: Not all annunciations generated by the device which are defined as fault record flags could be stored in the buffer. The cause is probably a buffer overflow. Relevant information: On

Test mode

DataStop

HWTestMod

Time Synch

Synch-Clock

DayLight SavTime

Clock SyncError

Event Lost

Flag lost

162

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Device

UnlockDT

The interlocking of this flag with binary input >Data Stop (FNo. 16/CU) is generated via CFC. The flag UnlockDT (Unlock data transmission via BI) has the following meaning: A data transmission stop which has been initiated via binary input may only be reset again by binary input. Relevant information: On/Off

5.7.3

List of Information from the Central Unit

FNo. 16 >DataStop

Alarm >Stop data transmission

Comments

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

163

Functions

5.8
5.8.1

Power System Data

Mode of operation
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection needs the data of the power system to match its functions to these data.

5.8.2

Setting Notes
The parameter FREQUENCY (5104/CU) is used to set the rated system frequency. Note The parameter FREQUENCY (7899/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. The value entered in the central unit for the parameter FREQUENCY (5104/CU) is not changed by this. With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten. The default setting of 50 Hz need only be changed in power systems with a rated frequency of 60 Hz. Note A device version with a rated frequency of 16.7 Hz is available under a separate ordering code (MLFB).

FREQUENCY

5.8.3

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 5104

Setting Title FREQUENCY 50 Hz 60 Hz

Setting Options

Default Setting 50 Hz

Comments Nominal frequency

5.8.4

Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 7899

Parameters FREQUENCY 50 Hz 60 Hz

Setting Options

Default Settings 50 Hz

Comments Rated system frequency

164

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Protection General

5.9

Protection General
This section summarizes general information required by the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection.

5.9.1

Current-Controlled TRIP Reset

For a reset of the TRIP command, it must be ensured that the tripped circuit breaker has actually been opened and that the trip circuit of the bay unit has been interrupted by the circuit breaker auxiliary contact. If the trip relay interrupts the tripping current prematurely, its contacts are overloaded and destroyed. A TRIP command from the busbar protection is only transmitted to the circuit breaker of the faulted feeder if the feeder current exceeds the current threshold for TRIP release I>TRIP (XX13/CU).

Minimum duration of TRIP command

The relays for the TRIP command and the transfer trip command are reset if after the time Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) the feeder current drops below the threshold I> BF (XX18/CU) or I> BF-EF (XX19/CU).

Figure 5-39 Minimum duration of TRIP command

5.9.2

Local Control of the Bay Unit

If you want to ensure that the operating status of the bay units set with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) and the function keys F1 and F3 cannot be changed in the bay units, you can block the local control of the bay units with the parameter CTRL REL BU (6318/CU).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

165

Functions

5.9.3

Operating States "Bay Out of Service", "Maintenance Mode"

The parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) is used to select the operating status of the bay unit.

Bay out of service / in service

The allocation of a feeder current to a selective measuring system (= bus zone) takes place due to the disconnector image ("isolator replica"). The service function "bay out of service" causes that this allocation is generally cancelled. In 2-bay couplers, this status is automatically assumed for both coupler bay units. Therefore the disconnectors of the affected bay unit in the internal disconnector image are processed as open. Further the disconnector supervision of the bay and resulting messages are blocked. Even if all disconnectors of a feeder are open, the allocation of the feeder to the check zone (=disconnector-independent measuring system) remains however, as long as the bay unit is switched on.

Caution!
Switching a bay unit into the condition "bay out of service" requires that the feeder is actually primary out of operation, i.e. no current flow can take place in the feeder. The service function "bay out of service" can naturally be used, if for the test of the feeder protection, which uses the same transducer core, a test current will be injected. If for example a busside isolator remains closed and only the circuit breaker and the line side isolator (without beeing monitored by the bus bar protection) are open, a test current would be assigned to a measuring system. With "bay out of service" a processing of this test current (by the selective measuring systems) and thereby a possible false tripping is prevented. That test current remains in the check zone measuring system and may lead to a pick up of the "differential current supervision of the check zone". Therefore it is recommended to set the reaction on a pick up of the "differential current supervision of the check zone" to "alarm only". Additionally, the binary inputs for the breaker failure protection are no longer processed. An inadvertent tripping of a busbar, e.g. in the operating mode "Externer SVS", (XX15/CU), is thus prevented. "Bay out of service" represents thus a precautionary measure for the bus bar protection with secondary work in the bay and no test function of the bus bar protection, particularly the bay unit. A bay unit in condition "bay out of service" is to be left switched on if possible. The safety function of the check zone is thus still available. Switching off is only necessary with defect of the bay unit or the optical fiber connection. The bay is thus taken out of the protection completely and resulting annunciations or blockings prevented. As preparation the feeder has to be switched off primary and be faded out by "bay out of service" from the bus bar protection. If the switching off happens without previous "bay out of service", a blocking according to the selected settings of the bus bar protection takes place.

166

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Protection General

Caution!
Bus bar protection with transfer bus The transfer bus condition is characterized by the status: Line disconnector Q9 open, respectively all bus bar disconnectors open and transfer bus disconnector Q7 closed. If the feeder is in transfer busbar operation, the feeder must not be put "out of service".

Maintenance mode

During disconnector revisions the feedback does not correspond to the switching status of the disconnectors (e.g. with maintenance of the auxiliary contacts or switched off power supply for disconnector position signal). In such a case, the existing isolator status is frozen during maintenance and maintained until the maintenance function is finished. The start of the maintenance mode and the switching off of the isolator status indication are usually done simultaneously. To prevent erroneous annunciations, there is a short delay of 0.5 s for the responses and the signalling of auxiliary voltage failure. The protection function, however, remains fully operational. It is also possible to exclude individual switchgear of a bay unit from the maintenance mode via the parameters Maint. Iso or Maint. CB (XX51A/CU to XX56A/CU). The main points to observe for maintenance mode are: In 2-bay couplers, maintenance must be selected for one coupler bay only. To ensure a selective functioning of the protection, the isolator status must not be changed during maintenance mode; this is because the individual protection zones are managed on the basis of the frozen isolator replica. The circuit breaker monitoring and the isolator status monitoring are closed. A warning annunciation IsoProhib/Maint (FNo. 10471/CU) is output throughout the maintenance work.

5.9.4

Overcurrent-Controlled TRIP command

The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection provides the possibility, in the event of a busbar short-circuit, to disconnect only those feeders which carry currents exceeding a set level. This threshold can be set individually for each bay with the parameter I>TRIP (XX13/CU) (Figure 5-39, page 165).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

167

Functions

5.9.5

Feeder-Selective Trip Release

The 7SS52 provides the possibility, in the event of a busbar short-circuit, to trip only those feeders for which an additional external criterion is fulfilled. Such a TRIP command release can be provided, for instance, by a pickup of the feeder protection. The TRIP release must be marshalled to a binary output >TRIP release (FNo. 7616/BU) in the bay unit. In the event of a busbar TRIP the breaker failure protection time delay (CBF time delay) is started. If TRIP release is not given within the CBF time delay, no trip command is generated and the statusmissing TRIP release is indicated for the feeder concerned. The missingTRIP release does not influence the internal CBF processing.

5.9.6

Testing the Tripping Circuits and the Circuit Breakers

You can test the tripping circuits and the circuit breakers under live conditions by initiating a CB test trip from the bay unit. The CB test live trip can be performed with DIGSI or directly from the bay unit operator panel. The following conditions must be met: The required test trip commands have been marshalled to the trip relays during configuration. The feeder current must not exceed the threshold set in I> MAN TRIP (6316/CU). As Figure 5-40, page 168 shows, the circuit breaker test live trip can be initiated from the bay unit by one of the following: Pressing function key F2 (3-phase), via binary input>CB Test (FNo. 1156/BU) (3-phase), with the parameter CB TEST LIVE TRIP (4400/BU) (1-/3-phase). The CB test trip command is cancelled after a fixed time of 2 s.

Figure 5-40 CB test live trip function

168

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Protection General

5.9.7

Busbar Tripping via an External Signal

Apart from the tripping of bus zones by the busbar protection itself, there is the option of tripping individual bus zones via an external signal. With enclosed switchgear, for example, the output signal of a so-called arc barrier can be coupled in the central unit via a binary input and be used to trip the faulty zone. For safety reasons the coupling is carried out via one binary input per bus zone with an additional common release via another binary input. The alarm ">TRIP-Release" (FNo. 10487/CU) is generated for the release and ">Trip $xx" (FNo. 177.1360.xx/CU) is generated for each triggering. This is followed by the confirmation alarm "Trip BI $nn" (FNo. 177.1363.xx/ CU) and the group alarm "Device trip M" (FNo. 10445/CU). In this, xx or $nn indicates the bus zone. The monitoring of the inputs is done the same way as with the breaker failure protection. The active signals are time monitored individually. An alarm is generated in the event of an excess for more than 15 s. The monitoring time between triggering and release is set with the parameter T-BF 2chan (128/BU). If the protection picks up, the following alarm is generated: "TripBIErr $03" (FNo. 177.1361.xx/CU), the group alarm "TripRelErr" (FNo. 10486/CU) and the further processing of the binary input is blocked. If there is no TRIP release, the following alarm is generated: (FNo. 177.1362.xx/CU) "noTripRel $03".

5.9.8

Setting Notes
The parameter Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) is used to set the minimum time that must elapse before the TRIP command is reset. This time is started with the output of a TRIP command. In general, a TRIP command is reset via the current flow control (see Chapter 5.9.1, page 165). If non-energized feeders, e.g. radial feeders, are tripped without any feedback, a safe reset of the TRIP command to the circuit breaker trip coil can instead be ensured with the parameter Tmin TRIP (6106/CU). The setting must be higher than the maximum circuit breaker closing time. Note The parameter T TRIP (1141/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. If the bay unit is connected with the central unit, the setting of this parameter is overwritten by the central unit Tmin TRIP (6106/CU). With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten.

Tmin TRIP

Local control of BU

The parameter CTRL REL BU (6318/CU) is used to release or block changes of the bay unit parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) locally on the bay units. This applies only to the feeder settings out of service and maintenance. It affects also the possibility to change the operating status by means of the function keys F1 and F3 on the bay unit operator panel.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

169

Functions

With setting released, changes of the bay unit parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) from the bay units is released. With setting blocked, changes to the bay unit parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) locally from the bay units are blocked. Attempts to take a bay unit locally out of service are rejected as NOT PERMITTED. PROT TR BUS The parameter PROT TR BUS (5401/CU) is used to activate and deactivate the selective protection of a transfer busbar. The basic setting is NO. With setting released the protection of the transfer busbar will be on. This setting only makes sense in configurations with external current transformers. With setting blocked the protection of the transfer busbar will be off. AUT LED ACK The parameter AUT LED ACK (5103/CU) is used to activate and deactivate the automatic acknowledgement of LED indications. With setting YES the LED indications will be refreshed with each new TRIP command. With setting NO the LED indications will not be automatically refreshed. The LED status is latched and must be reset via DIGSI, a binary input or from the operator panel. Test mode SK The parameter Test mode SK (5108A/CU) is used to activate and deactivate the test mode for the ZPS-SK module (Chapter 8.2.4, page 287). Siemens recommends to block all TRIP commands. With test mode ON, the protection is blocked. The parameter Language BU (5111A/CU) is used to select the UI language of the bay units. The language of the annunciations displayed in the central unit is set via the configuration of the central unit. If the bay unit is operated without a central unit, the language is set locally via a parameter (7101/BU). With the setting Deutsch, the menus in the bay unit display and the parameters and annunciations in DIGSI are displayed in German. With the setting English, French, Italian, Russian or Spanish the menus in the bay unit display and the parameters and annunciations in DIGSI are displayed in the selected language. Independent of the above mentioned remarks on the device operation, for DIGSI, the language settings of the DIGSI Device Manager apply. I> MAN TRIP The parameter I> MAN TRIP (6316/CU) is used to set the threshold of the feeder current for the circuit breaker test. The feeder current that is allowed to flow during the test must be less than this threshold. Thus, an unintentional tripping of a feeder in operation can be prevented. The parameter I>TRIP (XX13/CU) is used to set the threshold of the feeder current for the trip release. The setting of the parameter depends on the lowest short-circuit current to be expected.

Language BU

I>TRIP

170

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Protection General

A TRIP command will be performed selectively for each feeder as soon as the feeder current exceeds this threshold. The set value refers to the rated CT current. If you set a feeder to 0, this feeder will be tripped without an I>query. Bay status The parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) is used to select the operating status of the bay unit. With setting in service the bay unit will be in service. With setting out of service the bay unit will be out of service. With setting maintenance the bay unit will be in maintenance mode. In that, the isolator replica is frozen in this operating state. Note The setting of the bay status can only be changed back at the unit where it was first set. Possible are, for example, binary inputs, control panel or settings via DIGSI.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

171

Functions

5.9.9

Settings for the Central Unit

Addr. 112

Setting Title Bay status

Setting Options out of service in service maintenance 0.00..25.00 I / In non existent external BZ unbalance trip rep/unbal I>query trip rep/I>quer 0.10..2.00 I / In 0.05..2.00 I / In YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO OFF ON German English French Spanish Italian Russian 0.01.. 32.00 s 0.00 .. 2.50 I/In; released blocked

Default Settings in service

Comments Bay status

113 115

I> TRIP BF OP MODE

0.00 I / In BZ unbalance

Current threshold for TRIP release Operation mode BF

118 119 151A 156A 5103 5401 5108A 5111A

I> BF I> BF-EF Maint. Iso1 Maint. CB AUT LED ACK PROT TR BUS Test mode SK Language BU

0.50 I / In 0.25 I / In YES YES YES YES OFF English

Current threshold for BF Current threshold for BF - EF Maintenance for Isolator 1 Maintenance for CB Automatic acknowledgement of LED Selective protection for transfer busbar Test mode for module SK Language of bay units

6106 6316 6318

Tmin TRIP I> MAN TRIP CTRL REL BU

0.15 s 0.05 I/In released

Minimum duration of TRIP command Limit value for circuit breaker test Control release for bay units

172

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Protection General

5.9.10 List of Information from the Central Unit

$00, .., $03 are variables which will be automatically replaced on entry in the event buffer by $00 Number of the bay unit $01 Bay name $02 Name of the switching element (e.g. isolator or circuit breaker) $03 Name of the bus zone

FNo. 10471 10478 10486 10487 IsoProhib/Maint >EF charact. TripRelErr >TRIP-Release

Alarm

Comments Isolator oper. prohibitted (maintenance) >Earth fault characteristic active Timing error trip release >TRIP-Release for external command $01 circuit breaker $02 >Trip command for $03 Timing error external Trip command $03 No release of Trip command $03 Trip command by BI for $03

176.1135 $01 $02 177.1360 >Trip $03 177.1361 TripBIErr $03 177.1362 noTripRel $03 177.1363 Trip BI $03

5.9.11 Settings for the Bay Unit

Addr. 128 1141 7101

Setting Title T-BF 2chan T TRIP LANGUAGE

Setting Options 0.06 .. 1.00 s 0.01..32.00 s integrated operator control

Default Setting 0.06 s 0.15 s DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANCAIS ESPANOL ITALIANO PYCCK.

Comments Supervision time BF start / release Minimum trip command duration ENGLISH

5.9.12 List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 1156 1174 1181 7616 >CB test CB in Test CB Test Trip >TRIP release Alarm >CB test start Circuit breaker test in progress Circuit breaker test: General trip >Trip release Comments

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

173

Functions

5.10

Bay Unit

5.10.1 Functional Description

For the functional description of feeder-specific parameters, please refer to the chapters: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Chapter 5.3, page 113) Characteristics for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Chapter 5.3.1, page 113) Operating States "Bay Out of Service", "Maintenance Mode" (Chapter 5.9.3, page 166) Triggering and Releasing the Breaker Failure Protection (Chapter 5.3.5.1, page 116) Circuit Breaker Failure Protection during a Feeder Short-Circuit (Chapter 5.3.5.2, page 118) Circuit Breaker Failure Protection for Busbar Faults (Chapter 5.3.5.3, page 124) Failure of the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker (Chapter 5.3.5.4, page 125) Circuit Breaker Not Ready (Chapter 5.3.5.5, page 125) End Fault Protection (Chapter 5.4, page 132) End Fault Protection in the Feeder (Chapter 5.4.1, page 132) Protection in the Dead Zone of the Bus Coupler (Chapter 5.4.2, page 134) Protection General (Chapter 5.9, page 165) Current-Controlled TRIP Reset (Chapter 5.9.1, page 165) Local Control of the Bay Unit (Chapter 5.9.2, page 165) Overcurrent-Controlled TRIP command (Chapter 5.9.4, page 167)

5.10.2 Setting Notes

Note Parameters that are not stated here have already been described before. For that, please refer to the corresponding cross-references e.g. as above, chapter Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Chapter 5.3, page 113).

174

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Integrated Operation of the Bay Unit

5.11

Integrated Operation of the Bay Unit

5.11.1 Functional Description

This section summarizes those parameters by which you choose the UI language of the bay unit and specify the measured values to be displayed in the standby display.

5.11.2 Setting Notes

LANGUAGE The parameter LANGUAGE (7101/BU) is used to set the UI language of the bay unit. Note The parameter LANGUAGE (7101/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. The value entered in the central unit for the parameter Language BU (5111A/ CU) is not affected by this. With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten. With the setting DEUTSCH the menus in the display of the bay unit appear in German. With the setting ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESPANOL, ITALIANO, PYCCK. the menus in the display of the bay unit appear in the respective target language. OPER.1st L. OPER.2nd L. OPER.3rd L. OPER.4th L. The parameters OPER.1st L. (7120/BU), OPER.2nd L. (7122/BU), OPER.3rd L. (7124/BU) and OPER.4th L. (7126/BU) are used to select the measured value which will be displayed in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th line of the standby display in 4-line mode. You can choose from: The currents of the three phases IL1, IL2, IL3 The earth fault current IE The differential currents of the three phases IdL1, IdL2, IdL3 The stabilizing currents of the three phases IsL1, IsL2, IsL3 OPER.1st L. OPER.2nd L. OPER.3rd L. OPER.4th L. The parameters OPER. 1st L. (7121/BU), OPER.2nd L. (7123/BU), OPER.3rd L. (7125/BU) and OPER.4th L. (7127/BU) are used to select the mode of display for the measured value in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th line of the standby display in 4-line mode. With setting PRIMARY, the measured value will be displayed as primary value, i.e. with the unit Ampere (A). With setting SECONDARY, the measured value will be displayed as secondary value, i.e. in percent of the rated current. With the setting NORMALIZED, the measured value will be displayed as normalized value, i.e. referring to the same reference current. The reference current is set in the plant configuration.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

175

Functions

5.11.3 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 7101

Setting Title LANGUAGE

Setting Options DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANCAIS ESPANOL ITALIANO PYCCK. IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALIZED IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALIZED IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALIZED IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALIZED

Default Settings ENGLISH

Comments Operating language

7120

OPER.1st L.

IL1

Display of measured values in the 1st line of the quiescentstate indication in 4-line mode

7121

OPER.1st L.

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 1st line as primary or secondary (percent) values Display of measured values in the 2nd line of the quiescentstate indication in 4-line mode

7122

OPER.2nd L.

IL2

7123

OPER.2nd L.

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 2nd line as primary or secondary (percent) values Display of measured values in the 3rd line of the quiescentstate indication in 4-line mode

7124

OPER.3rd L.

IL3

7125

OPER.3rd L.

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 3rd line as primary or secondary (percent) values Display of measured values in the 4th line of the quiescentstate indication in 4-line mode

7126

OPER.4th L.

IE

7127

OPER.4th L.

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 4th line as primary or secondary (percent) values

176

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

PC Port of the Bay Unit

5.12

PC Port of the Bay Unit

5.12.1 Functional Description

The device is equipped with an operating interface integrated in the front panel, the so-called PC port. Communication through this port is subject to certain agreements concerning the transmission formation and the transmission rate. The data entered must match the connected device.

5.12.2 Setting Notes

FUNCT. TYP With the parameter FUNCT. TYP (7208/BU) you set the compatible functions type for the transmission of your device with IEC61870-5-103. The function type 160 (definite time mode) must be selected for the bay units. PC INTERF. The parameter PC INTERF. (7211/BU) is used to select the format for transmitting data from the front port (PC port) to the device connected to it. With setting DIGSI V3, the data are transmitted in a format which is used by DIGSI V3. With setting ASCII, the data are transmitted in ASCII format. PC BAUDRATE The parameter PC BAUDRATE (7215/BU) is used to select the rate at which data will be transmitted from the front port (PC port) to the device connected to it. With setting 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 BAUD, the data will be transmitted at the selected rate. PC PARITY The parameter PC PARITY (7216/BU) is used to select the parity for transmission of data from the front port (PC port) to the device connected to it. With setting DIGSI V3, the data are transmitted with a parity used by DIGSI V3. With setting No parity, 2 stopbits, data are transmitted without parity and with 2 stop bits. With setting No parity, 1 stopbit, data are transmitted without parity and with one stop bit.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

177

Functions

5.12.3 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 7208 7211 7215

Parameters FUNCT. TYP PC INTERF. PC BAUDRATE

Setting Options 1 .. 254 DIGSI V3 ASCII 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud DIGSI V3 No parity,2 stopbits No parity,1 stopbit

Default Settings 160 DIGSI V3 9600 Baud

Comments Function type in accordance with VDEW/ZVEI Data format Transmission rate for PC poirt

7216

PC PARITY

DIGSI V3

Parity of transmission telegrams

178

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Fault Recording in the Bay Unit (Local Fault Recording)

5.13

Fault Recording in the Bay Unit (Local Fault Recording)

5.13.1 Functional Description

Note A description of the central unit's fault recording function is provided in Chapter 5.6, page 158. Reading out of oscillographic fault recording data is described in Chapter 6.2.3, page 215. The instantaneous measured values are stored at intervals of 1 ms (fN = 50 Hz) and 833 s (fN = 60 Hz) in a buffer of the bay unit. The instantaneous currents are measured for each phase. A fault record is initiated by a protection or trip from an internal protection function, a start from DIGSI, from the central unit front panel or via a binary input with the annunciation >Trig.Wave.Cap. marshalled to it. A total of 5 s max is available in the bay unit for oscillographic fault recording. This interval allows to store up to 8 fault records. New fault records are always entered in the fault record data buffer. The oldest fault record data are overwritten by the new data. An oscillographic record can be triggered by a change in status of a binary input, or by an input at the integrated keypad, or through the PC port.

5.13.2 Setting Notes

INITIATION

The parameter INITIATION (7402/BU) is used to set the reference instance and the storage criterion for fault recording. With setting STORAGE BY FD. the storage criterion is defined to be the fault detection by the device. The reference instant for fault recording is the fault detection by the device. With setting STORAGE BY TRIP the storage criterion is defined to be the device trip. The reference instant for fault recording is the fault detection by the device. With setting START WITH TRIP the storage criterion is defined to be the device trip. The reference instant for fault recording is the device trip.

T-MAX

The parameter T-MAX (7410/BU) is used to set the maximum time period available for one fault record. The parameter T-PRE (7411/BU) is used to set the pre-trigger time for starting the fault recording. The pre-trigger time starts at the specified time before the storage cri-

T-PRE

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

179

Functions

terion for fault record storage is fulfilled. The storage criterion is selected with the parameter INITIATION (7402/BU). T-POST The parameter T-POST (7412/BU) is used to set the post-fault time for stopping the fault recording. The post-fault time begins as soon as the stop criterion for fault record storage is fulfilled. The parameter T-BINARY IN (7431/BU) is used to set the storage time when fault recording is initiated via a binary input. The total storage time is the sum of this parameter plus the pre-trigger and the post-fault time. With this parameter set to infinite, the fault recording runs for as long as the binary input is energized. It cannot, however, run for longer than the maximum storage time. To set the parameter to infinite, increment the value for this parameter with the arrow keys until the symbol appears. The parameter T-KEYBOARD (7432/BU) is used to set the storage time when fault recording is initiated from the membrane keyboard on the operator panel.

T-BINARY IN

T-KEYBOARD

5.13.3 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 7402

Parameters INITIATION

Setting Options STORAGE BY FD. STORAGE BY TRIP START WITH TRIP 0.30 .. 5.00 s 0.05 .. 0.50 s 0.05 .. 0.50 s

Default Settings STORAGE BY TRIP 2.00 s 0.20 s 0.20 s

Comments Start/storage criterion for fault recording Maximum time period available for one fault record Pre-trigger time for fault recording Post-fault time for stopping the fault recording after the fault criterion disappears Storage time when fault recording is initiated via a binary input Storage time when fault recording is initiated via the membrane keyboard

7410 7411 7412

T-MAX T-PRE T-POST

7431 7432

T-BINARY IN T-KEYBOARD

0.10 . .5.00 s infinite 0.10 .. 5.00 s

0.40 s 0.40 s

180

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Scope of Protective Functions in the Bay Unit

5.14

Scope of Protective Functions in the Bay Unit

5.14.1 Functional Description

An optional overcurrent protection is provided as a backup protection in the bay units. This protection works independently of the busbar protection function and remains active even if the link to the central unit is interrupted or if the bay unit is set with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) to bay out of service. The overcurrent protection function is described in Chapter 5.16, page 185. The overcurrent protection can be set to either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic. This section summarizes those parameters which select the functions for treating the phase and earth currents. In this case the bay units need the specification of the rated system frequency.

5.14.2 Setting Notes

CHARAC. PH The parameter CHARAC. PH (7812/BU) is used to set the characteristic for the phase currents of the overcurrent protection. With setting DEFINITE TIME, a definite time characteristic will be used for the phase current overcurrent protection (Chapter 5.16.1, page 185). With setting INVERSE TIME, an inverse time characteristic will be used for the phase current overcurrent protection (Chapter 5.16.1, page 185). CHARAC. E The parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is used to set the characteristic for the earth currents of the overcurrent protection. With setting DEFINITE TIME, a definite time characteristic will be used for the earth current overcurrent protection (Chapter 5.16.1, page 185). With setting INVERSE TIME, an inverse time characteristic will be used for the earth current overcurrent protection (Chapter 5.16.1, page 185). FREQUENCY The parameter FREQUENCY (7899/BU) is used to set the rated system frequency. Note The parameter FREQUENCY (7899/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. The value entered in the central unit for the parameter FREQUENCY (5104/CU) is not affected by this. With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten. The default setting of 50 Hz need only be changed in power systems with a rated frequency of 60 Hz.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

181

Functions

5.14.3 Settings of the Central Unit

Addr. 112

Setting Title Bay status

Setting Options out of service in service maintenance 50 Hz 60 Hz

Default Settings in service

Comments Bay status

5104

FREQUENCY

50 Hz

Nominal frequency

5.14.4 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 7812 7815 7899

Setting Title CHARAC. PH CHARAC. E FREQUENCY

Setting Options Definite time INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME 50 Hz 60 Hz

Default Settings Definite time DEFINITE TIME 50 Hz

Comments O/C protection characteristic for phase currents O/C protection characteristic for the earth current Rated system frequency

182

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Power System Data of the Bay Unit

5.15

Power System Data of the Bay Unit

5.15.1 Functional Description

With the bay unit running in stand-alone mode, the user can set the current transformer starpoint and the minimum time which must elapse before the TRIP command is reset.

5.15.2 Setting Notes

CT STARPNT

The parameter CT STARPNT (1101/BU) is used to select the orientation of the CT starpoint. The reference point is the current transformer itself. Note The parameter CT STARPNT (1101/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. As long as there is a connection with the central unit, the parameters (1101/BU, 1105/BU, 1141/BU) are managed and set by the CU and are therefore hidden in DIGSI and in the LCD. The parameter settings in the central unit are not affected by this. With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten. With setting TOWARDS LINE, the CT starpoint is oriented towards the line. With setting TOWARDS BUSBAR, the CT starpoint is oriented towards the busbar.

In PRIMARY

With the parameter In PRIMARY (1105/BU) you inform the device of the primary rated CT current . Note The parameter In PRIMARY (1105/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in stand-alone mode. The parameter settings in the central unit are not affected by this. With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

183

Functions

T TRIP

The parameter T TRIP (1141/BU) is used to set the minimum time which must elapse before the TRIP command is reset. This time is started with the output of a TRIP command. Note The parameter T TRIP (1141/BU) can only be set with the bay unit running in standalone mode. The value entered in the central unit for the parameter Tmin TRIP (6106/CU) is not affected by this. With the bay unit linked to the central unit, the setting of this parameter is transmitted from the central unit to the bay units. The local setting in the bay units is overwritten.

5.15.3 Settings of the Central Unit

Addr. 5104 6106

Setting Title FREQUENCY Tmin TRIP 50 Hz 60 Hz

Setting Options

Default Settings 50 Hz 0.15 sec

Comments Nominal frequency Minimum duration of TRIP command

0.01 .. 32.00 sec

5.15.4 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 1101 1105 1141

Setting Title CT STARPNT In PRIMARY T TRIP

Setting Options TOWARDS LINE TOWARDS BUSBAR 10 .. 50000 A 0.01 .. 32.00 sec

Default Settings TOWARDS LINE 400 A 0.15 sec

Comments Current transformer polarity Primary rated current Minimum TRIP command duration

184

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

5.16

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

5.16.1 Functional Description

An optional overcurrent protection is provided as a backup protection in the bay units of the distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4. This protection works independently of the busbar protection function and remains active even if the link to the central unit is interrupted or if the bay unit is set with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) to bay out of service. The overcurrent protection function can be activated and deactivated for phase currents and earth current separately by the parameters O/C PHASES (1201/BU) or O/ C EARTH (1501/BU). Likewise, the associated parameters can be set separately for phase currents and earth current. The overcurrent protection function can be blocked from the central unit as well as from the bay unit (Figure 5-44, page 198). Additionally, individual function elements can be blocked selectively via the binary inputs of the bay unit (Figure 5-41, page 186 and Figure 5-42, page 186). The overcurrent protection can be set to either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic. For the inverse time characteristic of the overcurrent stage there are three types according to IEC 255-3 (Figure 9-1, page 310): Normal inverse, acc. to IEC 255-3 (type A) Very inverse, acc. to IEC 255-3 (type B) Extremely inverse, acc. to IEC 255-3 (type C) The characteristic is set with the parameters CHARAC. PH (7812/BU) for the overcurrent stage of the phase currents, and CHARAC. E (7815/BU) for the overcurrent stage of the earth current. The characteristic of the inverse-time O/C protection is selected with the parameter CHARACTER. (1211/BU) or (1511/BU). The selected overcurrent characteristic curve can be superimposed by a high-set stage I>> (1202/BU) or IE>> (1502/BU) that works always with a current-independent command time. The principle of the overcurrent protection for phase currents and earth current is shown in Figures 5-41, page 186 and 5-42, page 186. All stages can be set individually and independently of one another. For the selection of threshold values and delay times, the interaction of the bay unit with the busbar protection should be considered. If a circuit breaker is manually closed onto a fault current, it can be re-opened immediately. It is possible to override the delay time for either the overcurrent stages with the parameters MAN.CLOSE (1221/BU) or (1521/BU), or for the high-set current stages with the binary input >CB man.close (FNo. 7618/BU). In that case an undelayed trip command is issued if a fault is detected on the respective stage.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

185

Functions

Figure 5-41 O/C protection for phase currents

Figure 5-42 O/C protection for the earth current

186

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

Definite-time overcurrent protection

For the overcurrent stage and/or the high-set current stage, thresholds for the phase current can be set with the parameters I> (1212/BU) or I>> (1202/BU) respectively Each phase current is compared individually with these thresholds, and a phase-selective signal is issued if these thresholds are exceeded. After the corresponding delay times TI> (1213/BU) or TI>> (1203/BU) respectively have elapsed, the TRIP command is issued. The TRIP command is available individually for the overcurrent and for the high-set stage. For the earth fault stages, the thresholds for the phase currents are set with the parameters IE> (1512/BU) or IE>> (1502/BU) respectively. The earth fault is compared with the thresholds. As soon as one of these thresholds is exceeded, the delay time TIE> (1513/BU) or TIE>> (1503/BU) respectively is started. After this delay has elapsed, a TRIP command is issued.

Inverse-time overcurrent protection

For the overcurrent and the high-set stage, thresholds for the phase current can be set with the parameters Ip (1214/BU) or I>> (1202/BU) respectively. Each phase current is compared individually with these thresholds. For both stages, the thresholds for the earth current can be set with the parameters IEp (1514/BU) or IE>> (1502/BU) respectively. The earth fault is compared with the thresholds. If the Ip or the IEp threshold is exceeded, the time to trip is calculated and started. The time to trip is calculated on the basis of the flowing fault current, and depends on the selected trip time multiplier. The time multiplier is set with the parameters TIp (1215/BU) or. TIEp (1515/BU) respectively. If the thresholds for the high-set stage of the phase or earth current are exceeded, a TRIP command is always issued as soon as the current-independent trip time has elapsed. This happens regardless of the tripping characteristic set for Ip and/or IEp. In inverse-time overcurrent protection, the parameters RMS FORMAT (1216/BU) or (1516/BU) respectively are used to specify whether the currents will be evaluated as r.m.s. values, or on the basis of their fundamental wave obtained by means of digital filtering.

5.16.2 Setting Notes

O/C PHASES

The parameter O/C PHASES (1201/BU) is used to activate and deactivate the O/C protection for the phase currents. With setting ON, the O/C protection for the phase currents is active. With setting OFF, the O/C protection for the phase currents is deactivated.

I>>

In a first step, the high-set stage I>> is set (1202/BU to 1206/BU). This stage is often used for current grading before high impedances such as transformers, motors or generators. The high-set current stage I>> is always a definite time stage, regardless of the tripping characteristic set for the I> stage. It is set such that it picks up on shortcircuits into this impedance. All set times are pure delay times which do not include the operating times of the protection (measuring time, dropout time). If the I>> stage is not required, the time TI>> (1203/BU) is set to infinite. The parameter I>> (1202/BU) is used to the threshold for the phase currents in the high-set stage (definite-time).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

187

Functions

TI>>

The parameter TI>> (1203/BU) is used to set the trip time delay for tripping of the high-set current stage (definite-time). The delay time is started when the threshold for the phase currents is exceeded. This threshold is set with the parameter I>> (1202/ BU). The parameter MEAS.REPET. (1206/BU) is used to select whether a repetition of the measurement will be performed for the phase currents in the high-set stage. With setting YES the measurement of the phase currents in the high-set stage will be repeated. With setting NO the measurement of the phase currents in the high-set stage will not be repeated.

MEAS.REPET.

CHARACTER.

The parameter CHARACTER. (1211/BU) is used to select the characteristic of the inverse-time O/C protection for the phase currents. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. P (7812/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. With setting NORMAL INVERSE, a characteristic according to IEC 255-3 (type A) will be used. With setting VERY INVERSE, a characteristic according to IEC 255-3 (type B) will be used. With setting EXTREMELY INVERSE, a characteristic according to IEC 255-3 (type C) will be used.

I>

I> (1212/BU) and TI> (1213/BU) are only relevant for the definite time mode (CHARAC. P = DEFINITE TIME (7812/BU), Chapter 5.14, page 181). For the setting of the overcurrent stage I> the most relevant factor to be considered is the maximum operating current that can occur. A pick-up caused by overload must be excluded, since, in this mode, the device operates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. If the I> stage is not required, the time TI> (1213/BU) is set to infinite. The parameter I> (1212/BU) is used to set the threshold for the phase currents in the overcurrent stage. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. P (7812/BU) is set to DEFINITE TIME.

TI>

The parameter TI> (1213/BU) is used to set the trip time delay for tripping of the overcurrent stage. The delay time is started when the threshold for the phase currents is exceeded. This threshold is set with the parameter I> (1212/BU). This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. P (7812/BU) is set to DEFINITE TIME.

Ip

Ip (1214/BU) and TIp (1215/BU) are only relevant for the inverse-time characteristics (CHARAC. P = DEFINITE TIME (7812/BU), (Chapter 5.14, page 181). Please note that in accordance to IEC regulations a safety factor of about 1.1 has been included between the pick-up value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. If the Ip stage is not needed, the time TIp is set to infinite. With setting 0 the protection trips after the inherent operating time.

188

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

The parameter Ip (1214/BU) is used to set the threshold for the phase currents in the overcurrent stage of the inverse-time O/C protection. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. P (7812/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. TIp The parameter TIp (1215/BU) is used to set the trip time delay (time multiplier) for the overcurrent stage of the inverse-time O/C protection. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. P (7812/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. RMS FORMAT The parameter RMS FORMAT (1216/BU) is used to select the format in which the currents will be evaluated for the current calculation of the overcurrent stage. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. P (7812/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. With setting FUNDAMENTAL the fundamental wave of the currents will be evaluated. With setting TRUE RMS the r.m.s. value of the currents will be evaluated. MAN.CLOSE The parameter MAN.CLOSE (1221/BU) is used to set whether the trip time delay for the overcurrent or high-set current stage for the phase currents will be overridden if the circuit breaker is manually closed. With setting I>> UNDELAYED the delay time set with the parameter TI>> (1203/BU) will be disregarded. With setting I> /Ip UNDELAYED. the delay time set with the parameter TI> (1213/ BU) will be disregarded. With setting INEFFECTIVE the delay times set with the parameters TI>> (1203/BU) or TI> (1213/BU) respectively are not disregarded. O/C EARTH The parameter O/C EARTH (1501/BU) is used to activate and deactivate the O/C protection for the earth current. With setting ON, the O/C protection for the earth current is active. With setting OFF, the O/C protection for the earth current is deactivated. IE>> In a first step, the high-set stage IE>> is set (1502/BU to 1506/BU). For the settings, similar factors as for the stages I>> and I> have to be considered. If the IE>> stage is not needed, the time TIE>> (1503/BU) is set to infinite. The parameter IE>> (1502/BU) is used to set the threshold for the earth current in the high-set stage (definite-time). TIE>> The parameter TIE>> (1503/BU) is used to set the trip time delay for tripping of the high-set current stage (definite-time). The delay time is started when the threshold for the earth current is exceeded. This threshold is set with the parameter IE>> (1502/ BU).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

189

Functions

MEAS.REPET.

The parameter MEAS.REPET. (1506/BU) is used to select whether a repetition of the measurement will be performed for the earth current in the high-set stage. With setting YES the measurement of the earth current in the high-set current stage will be repeated. With setting NO the measurement of the earth current in the high-set current stage will not be repeated.

CHARACTER.

The parameter CHARACTER. (1511/BU) is used to select the characteristic of the inverse-time O/C protection for the earth current. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. With setting NORMAL INVERSE, a characteristic according to IEC 255-3 (type A) will be used. With setting VERY INVERSE, a characteristic according to IEC 255-3 (type B) will be used. With setting EXTREMELY INVERS, a characteristic according to IEC 255-3 (type C) will be used.

IE>

For earth faults the pickup values and delay times can be set individually. This allows to use a different grading with shorter delays for earth faults. IE> (1512/BU) and TIE> (1513/BU) are only relevant for the definite-time mode (CHARAC. E = DEFINITE TIME (7815/BU), Chapter 5.14, page 181). For setting the overcurrent stage IE> the most relevant factor to be considered is the lowest earth fault current that can occur. If the IE> stage for earth faults is not to be active at all, the delay time TIE> (1513/ BU) can be set to infinite. The parameter IE> (1512/BU) is used to the threshold for the earth current in the overcurrent stage. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is set to DEFINITE TIME.

TIE>

The parameter TIE> (1513/BU) is used to set the trip time delay for tripping of the overcurrent stage. The delay time is started when the threshold for the earth current is exceeded. This threshold is set with the parameter IE> (1512/BU). This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is set to DEFINITE TIME.

IEp

IEp (1514/BU) and TIEp (1515/BU) are only relevant for the inverse-time characteristics (CHARAC. E = DEFINITE TIME (7815/BU), Chapter 5.14, page 181). This allows to use a different grading with shorter delays for earth faults. Please note that in accordance to IEC regulations a safety factor of about 1.1 has been included between the pick-up value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. If the IEp stage for earth is not to be active at all, the delay time TIEp can be set to infinite. If the IEp stage is not needed at all, the time TIEp is set to infinite. With setting 0 the protection trips after the inherent operating time. The parameter IEp (1514/BU) is used to set the threshold for the earth current in the overcurrent stage of the inverse-time O/C protection.

190

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. TIEp The parameter TIEp (1515/BU) is used to set the trip time delay (time multiplier) for the overcurrent stage of the inverse-time O/C protection. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. RMS FORMAT The parameter RMS FORMAT (1516/BU) is used to select the format in which the currents will be evaluated for the current calculation of the overcurrent stage. This parameter is only displayed if the parameter CHARAC. E (7815/BU) is set to INVERSE TIME. With setting FUNDAMENTAL the fundamental wave of the currents will be evaluated. With setting TRUE RMS the r.m.s. value of the currents will be evaluated. MAN.CLOSE The parameter MAN.CLOSE (1521/BU) is used to set whether the trip time delay for the overcurrent or high-set current stage for the earth current will be overridden if the circuit breaker is manually closed. With setting IE>> UNDELAYED the delay time set with the parameter TIE>> (1503/ BU) will be disregarded. With setting IE> /IEp UNDELAYED. the delay time set with the parameter TIE> (1513/BU) will be disregarded. With setting INEFFECTIVE the delay times set with the parameters TIE>> (1503/ BU) or TIE> (1513/BU) respectively are not disregarded.

5.16.3 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 1201 1202 1203 1206 1211

Setting Title O/C PHASES I>> TI>> MEAS.REPET. CHARACTER. ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Settings ON 2.00 IN 0.10 s NO NORMAL INVERSE 1.00 IN 0.50 s

Comments O/C protection for phase currents Pick-up value of the phase currents for the high-set stage Trip time delay of the high-set stage for phase currents Option to set a measurement repetition Tripping characteristic for the phase current Pick-up value of the phase currents for the overcurrent stage Trip time delay of the overcurrent stage for phase currents

0.05 .. 25.00 IN 0.00 .. 60.00 s; +* YES NO NORMAL INVERSE VERY INVERSE EXTREMELY INVERS 0.05 .. 25.00 IN 0.00 .. 60.00 s; +* infinite

1212 1213

I> TI>

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

191

Functions

Addr. 1214 1215 1216 1221 Ip TIp

Setting Title

Setting Options 0.10 .. 4.00 IN 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0; +* FUNDAMENTAL TRUE RMS I>> UNDELAYED I> /Ip UNDELAYED INEFFECTIVE ON OFF 0.05 .. 25.00 IN 0.00 .. 60.00 s; +*

Default Settings 1.00 IN 0.50 s FUNDAMENTAL I>> UNDELAYED

Comments Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage Ip> for the phase currents Time multiplier for phase currents RMS format for inverse time O/C protection Overcurrent stage valid for phase currents when the circuit breaker is manually closed O/C protection for the earth current Pick-up value of the earth current for the high-set stage Trip time delay of the high-set current stage for the earth current Option to set a measurement repetition Tripping characteristic for the earth current Pick-up value of the earth current for the overcurrent stage Trip time delay of the overcurrent stage for the earth current Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage IEp for the earth current Time multiplier for earth current RMS format of the earth current for inverse time O/C protection

RMS FORMAT MAN.CLOSE

1501 1502 1503

O/C EARTH IE>> TIE>>

ON 0.50 IN 0.50 s

1506 1511

MEAS.REPET. CHARACTER.

YES NO NORMAL INVERSE VERY INVERSE EXTREMELY INVERS 0.05 .. 25.00 IN 0.00 .. 60.00 s; +* 0.10 .. 4.00 IN 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0; +* FUNDAMENTAL TRUE RMS IE>> UNDELAYED IE> /IEp UNDELAYED INEFFECTIVE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS

NO NORMAL INVERSE 0.20 IN 0.50 s 0.10 IN 0.50 s FUNDAMENTAL

1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1521

IE> TIE> IEp TIEp RMS FORMAT MAN.CLOSE

IE>> UNDELAYED Overcurrent stage valid for earth current when the circuit breaker is manually closed DEFINITE TIME DEFINITE TIME Characteristic O/C protection phases Characteristic O/C protection earth

7812 7815

CHARAC. PH CHARAK. E

192

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

5.16.4 List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1815 1825 1833 1836 1839 7618 >I>> block >I> block >Ip block >IE>> block >IE> block >IEp block I > Trip Ip Trip IE>> Trip IE> Trip IEp Trip >CB man.close

Alarm

Comments >Overcurrent protection: block stage I>> >Overcurrent protection: block stage I> >Overcurrent protection: block stage Ip >Overcurrent protection: block stage IE>> >Overcurrent protection: block stage IE> >Overcurrent protection: block stage IEp O/C protection I> phase trip O/C protection Ip phase trip O/C protection IE>> earth trip O/C protection IE> earth trip O/C protection IEp earth trip >Circuit breaker manual close

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

193

Functions

5.17

User-Defined Annunciations

5.17.1 Functional Description

The bay unit has four annunciations which you can define yourself and allocate them to alarm relays, LEDs or trip relays. Each annunciation is allocated to a delay time. The delay times are set with the parameters T-Annunc.1 to T-Annunc.4 (2801/BU, 2802/BU, 2803/BU, 2804/ BU). Each of these four delay times can be started by its own binary input >Annunc. 1 .. 4 (FNo. 11, 12, 13, 14/BU). After the delay time has elapsed and if the parameter "ANNUN1byCU" .. "ANNUN4byCU" (2811/BU, 2812/BU, 2813/BU, 2814/BU) is set to NO, the user-defined annunications "Annunc. 1" .. 4 (FNo. 7696, 7697, 7698, 7699/BU) are issued. If the parameter "ANNUN1byCU" .. is set to YES, the annunciation is transferred to the central unit. The following figure shows a simplified schematic.

Figure 5-43 User-define annunciations

CFC functionality of the bay unit

In order to be able to use the advantages of the CFC functionality available in the central unit for the bay units, the following procedure can be chosen. Each of these annunciations is transferred to the central unit and can optionally be linked via CFC and sent back to the respective bay unit and processed. For that, you use a CFC input annunciation (BU FXX user-def. annunciation 1/I) and a CFC output annunciation (BU FXX user-def. annunciation 1/O) each in the central unit for every user-definable bay unit annunciation. With DIGSI, you can rename these annunciations to self-explanatory designations. A further option for processing the user-defined annunciations in the bay unit is to use them for the generation of binary input annunciations. For that, a parameter ANN1Fct.Nr to ANN4Fct.Nr (2821/BU .. 2824/BU) exists for each of the four userdefined annunciations to enter the annunciation number of the binary input annuncia-

194

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

User-Defined Annunciations

tion to be generated. So, when the respective user-defined annunciation is displayed as ON in the bay unit, at the same time it seems as if a binary input to which this binary input annunciation is configured was activated by a binary signal. Chapter A.10, page 372 gives an overview of the configurable input functions with the corresponding function numbers (FNo.).

5.17.2 Setting Notes

T-Annunc.1 T-Annunc.2 T-Annunc.3 T-Annunc.4 The parameters T-Annunc.1 (2801/BU), T-Annunc.2 (2802/BU), T-Annunc.3 (2803/BU) and T-Annunc.4 (2804/BU) are used to set the delay times for the user-defined annunciations 1, 2, 3 and 4.

5.17.3 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 2801 2802 2803 2804 2811 2812 2813 2814 2821 2822 2823 2824

Parameters T-Annunc.1 T-Annunc.2 T-Annunc.3 T-Annunc.4 ANNUN1byCU ANNUN2byCU ANNUN3byCU ANNUN4byCU ANN1Fct.Nr ANN2Fct.Nr ANN3Fct.Nr ANN4Fct.Nr

Setting Options 0.00..10.00 s 0.00..10.00 s 0.00..10.00 s 0.00..10.00 s NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES 0..9999 0..9999 0..9999 0..9999

Default Settings 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s NO NO NO NO 0 0 0 0

Comments Delay time for 1st user defined annunciation Delay time for 2nd user defined annunciation Delay time for 3rd user defined annunciation Delay time for 4th user defined annunciation Processing of annunciation 1 by central unit Processing of annunciation 2 by central unit Processing of annunciation 3by central unit Processing of annunciation 4 by central unit Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.1 Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.2 Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.3 Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.4

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

195

Functions

5.17.4 List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 11 12 13 14 7696 7697 7698 7699 >Annunc. 1 >Annunc. 2 >Annunc. 3 >Annunc. 4 Annunc. 1 Annunc. 2 Annunc. 3 Annunc. 4

Alarm

Comments >User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 User defined annunciation 1 User defined annunciation 2 User defined annunciation 3 User defined annunciation 4

196

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Backup Breaker Failure Protection in the Bay Unit

5.18

Backup Breaker Failure Protection in the Bay Unit

5.18.1 Functional Description

If an overcurrent protection function is provided as backup protection in the bay unit, and if the backup breaker failure protection function of the bay unit has been activated with the parameter BackUp CBF (3901/BU), a separate breaker failure protection can be initiated by the bay unit. As an alternative, the binary inputs of the bay unit can be used to activate >b.u. CBF on (FNo. 1401/BU) and deactivate (>b.u. CBF off (FNo. 1402/BU)) this breaker failure protection function. The annunciation b.u. CBF act. (FNo. 1453/BU) signals that the function is active. With the function turned off, the annunciation b.u. CBF off (FNo. 1451/BU) will appear. The various blocking options for the backup breaker failure protection are shown in Figure 5-45, page 199 and Figure 5-45, page 199. The backup breaker failure protection works independently of the busbar protection function and remains active even if the link to the central unit is interrupted or if the bay unit is set with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) to feeder out of service. The breaker failure protection picks up as soon as the O/C protection issues a trip command, and one or more of the 3 phase currents have reached the current threshold. This threshold can be set with the parameter B.U.CBF-I (3911/BU). The TRIP command CBF Trp.rp.3p (FNo. 7632/BU) of the breaker failure protection is issued as soon as the delay time B.U.CBF-T (3912/BU) has expired. If the pickup of the breaker failure protection is cleared before this time has elapsed, no TRIP command is issued. The pickup is cleared if the current drops below the threshold. If the TRIP command issued by the breaker failure protection does not result in disconnection of a system fault, and if the bay unit is linked with the central unit, the main CBF protection function is initiated after the delay time T-BF-mP (XX21/CU) has elapsed. This allows to issue a transfer trip command to all feeders of the faulted bus zone, provided that the tripping conditions for the configured operating mode are fulfilled. 3 binary inputs are provided for phase-selective initiation of the CBF protection, and one binary input for 3-pole initiation. Phase-selective initiation is only possible if exactly one of the phase-selective binary inputs is active. If several phase-selective binary inputs are active, a single-pole start is carried out. Each initiation starts an individual time stage. After this time stage has elapsed, the TRIP command is issued. The delay time is set independently of the type of initiation with the parameter B.U.CBF-T (3912/BU) as well. After the TRIP command, the CBF main protection function is initiated, just as in the case of initiation by the overcurrent protection. Please note that the delay time for this is always set with the parameter T-BF-mP (XX21/CU), even if the first initiation was single-phase. To provide more security when the CBF protection is initiated by binary input, signals at the release inputs are required for a successful initiation. These release inputs are identical with those used for the CBF main protection function. There is one release input for 1-phase initiation, and one release input for 3-phase initiation. Note Release inputs that are not marshalled are disregarded.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

197

Functions

Figure 5-44 Blocking mechanism for the backup breaker failure protection and backup time overcurrent protection

198

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Backup Breaker Failure Protection in the Bay Unit

Continuation for (1) and (2) see Figure 5-22, page 120
Figure 5-45 CBF protection function of the backup protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

199

Functions

5.18.2 Setting Notes

BackUp CBF The parameter BackUp CBF (3901/BU) is used to activate and deactivate the breaker failure protection of the bay unit. The parameter B.U.CBF-I (3911/BU) is used to set the current threshold for the breaker failure protection of the bay unit. In the case of a circuit breaker malfunction, the TRIP repetition of the backup breaker failure protection is zero. When setting this parameter, you should also consider the corresponding parameter of the breaker failure protection in the central unit, so that the two protection functions complement each other in a meaningful way. Siemens therefore recommends to match the value in the bay unit to its counterpart in the central unit. B.U.CBF-T The parameter B.U.CBF-T (3912/BU) is used to set the delay time for the breaker failure protection of the bay unit. When setting this parameter, you should also consider the corresponding parameter of the breaker failure protection in the central unit, so that the two protection functions complement each other in a meaningful way. Siemens therefore recommends to match the value in the bay unit to its counterpart in the central unit.

B.U.CBF-I

5.18.3 Settings of the Central Unit

Addr. 114

Setting Title BF BI MODE

Setting Options 1-ch w/o sup 1-ch w sup 2-ch w/o sup 2-ch w sup non existent external BZ unbalance trip rep/unbal I>query trip rep/I>quer 0.05 .. 10.00 s 0.00 .. 10.00 s

Default Settings 1-ch w sup

Comments Binary input mode / supervision BF

115

BF OP MODE

BZ unbalance

Operation mode BF

121 124

T-BF-mP T-BF CB fault

0.25 s 0.10 s

Time delay for BF with multi-pole faults Time delay BF after CB fault

200

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Backup Breaker Failure Protection in the Bay Unit

5.18.4 List of Information from the Central Unit

FNo. 10490 >Block BF of BU 10491 Block BF of BU 10492 Blkd BF of BU 10493 >Block O/C BU 10494 Block O/C BU 10495 Blkd O/C BU

Alarm

Comments >Blocking back-up breaker fail.prot. BU Blocking back-up breaker fail.prot. BU Back-up breaker fail.prot. of BU blocked >Blocking O/C protection of BU Blocking O/C protection of BU O/C protection of BU blocked

5.18.5 Settings of the Bay Unit

Addr. 3901 3911 3912

Setting Title BackUp CBF B.U.CBF-I B.U.CBF-T ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Settings OFF 0.50 I/In 0.12 s

Comments State of back-up circuit breaker failure protection function Current threshold of back-up breaker failure protection Time delay of the back-up breaker failure protection

0.10 .. 4.00 I/In 0.06 .. 60.00 s; +*

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

201

Functions

5.18.6 List of Information from the Bay Unit

FNo. 1401 1402 1403 1451 1452 1453 1455 1471 1704 1714 1752 7615 7619 7625 7626 7627 7628 >b.u. CBF on >b.u. CBF off >b.u.CBF blk. b.u. CBF off b.u. CBF blk. b.u. CBF act. b.u. CBF flt. b.u. CBF Trip >O/C Ph block >O/C E block O/C Ph block >CBF release >CB not ready >b.u.CBF L1 >b.u.CBF L2 >b.u.CBF L3 >b.u.CBF 3pol

Alarm

Comments >Switch on back-up breaker fail. prot. >Switch off back-up breaker fail. prot. >Block back-up breaker failure protect. Back-up breaker fail.prot. switched off Back-up breaker failure prot. blocked Back-up breaker failure prot. is active Back-up breaker fail. protect.: fault det. Trip by back-up breaker failure prot. >Block overcurrent protection phases >Block overcurrent protection earth Overcurrent prot. phase is blocked >Circuit breaker failure release >Circuit breaker not ready >Back-up breaker failure start phase L1 >Back-up breaker failure start phase L2 >Back-up breaker failure start phase L3 >Back-up breaker failure start 3-pole

202

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Control During Operation

You will learn in this chapter how to monitor and operate the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection. You can use the DIGSI Plant Visualization to visually monitor the substation during operation. The Plant Visualization enables the measured values and switch states to be displayed in on-line mode. During operation you can also read out annunciations, operational values, and fault data, influence single functions and annunciations. As a prerequisite the plant must be configured as described in Chapter 4, page 45 and the input and output functions must be allocated. Please note that the examples given are held in a general context and may deviate in word and in detail from the devices you are using. It is also possible that not all functions are available depending on the model variant used.

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6

Overview Reading Out Information Controlling Device Functions Feeder Shutdown and Commissioning Maintenance Mode Plant Visualization

204 206 218 236 239 241

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

203

Control During Operation

6.1

Overview
You can use the 7SS52 V4 for the central operation of the bay units. Central operation means that you can employ DIGSI to manage also the bay units via the central unit. The operating options are listed in Table 6-1, page 204. The central operation of your plant requires a PC with DIGSI installed on it to be connected to the central unit. The connection can be made either via the PC port or via the service port. Furthermore, DIGSI enables you to connect your PC either directly to the central unit or to a bay unit to handle your components individually. As another option you can operate your components via the operator panel of the device. The bay unit 7SS525 does not have a control panel and can only be operated via DIGSI. The description of the operating options in this chapter will mainly focus on the central operation using DIGSI. The other operating options will only be mentioned in such exceptional cases where central operation is not possible.
Table 6-1 Overview of the operating options and control options DIGSI logically to CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU BU CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU CU, BU BU CU CU opera- BU operator panel tor panel Chapter

Operating option

Reading out information: Operational events Fault events General interrogation Spontaneous annunciation Statistical counters Reading out measured values: Reading out fault data: Controlling device functions: Generate oscillographic record Block TRIP command (also selectively) Block breaker failure protection (also selectively) Save annunciations Delete annunciations Circuit breaker test Reset blocking of differential current supervision Reset blocking of isolator status supervision Busbar blocking - selective Trigger initial start and restart Read and set date and time Feeder in/out of service

X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

6.2.1.1, page 208 6.2.1.2, page 209 6.2.1.4, page 211 6.2.1.5, page 212 6.2.1.6, page 212 6.2.2, page 213 6.2.3, page 215 6.3.1, page 218 6.3.2.1, page 219 6.3.2.2, page 222 6.3.3.1, page 225 6.3.3.2, page 226 6.3.4, page 227 6.3.5.1, page 229

CU CU CU CU, BU

X only BI X X

X X

6.3.5.2, page 230 , page 225 6.3.6, page 230 6.3.7, page 231 6.4, page 236

204

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Overview

Table 6-1

Overview of the operating options and control options DIGSI logically to CU, BU CU BU CU opera- BU operator panel tor panel X X X Chapter

Operating option

Maintenance mode Plant visualization Current transformer polarity reversal

6.5, page 239 6.6, page 241 7.5.1, page 279

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

205

Control During Operation

6.2

Reading Out Information

The SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection provides the following information for on-site retrieval or readout via DIGSI: Annunciations, Operational measured values, Fault data. In this chapter we will introduce each of these information types and explain how you can retrieve them, save them to your PC, and acknowledge them.

Note If the bay unit and central unit are operated via the same COM port, a bay unit can only be opened with DIGSI when the central unit is closed.

6.2.1

Annunciations
Annunciations give an overview of important fault data, of the function of the protection system and they are a means of controlling functional sequences during test and commissioning. During operation they also give information on switching operations, the states of measured data and on the protection system itself. The annunciations which are generated in the central unit are divided into annunciation groups and you can access them as follows: Annunciations of the central unit and of the bay units are displayed in DIGSI. In this case, the PC is linked to the central unit via the PC port or via the service port. Annunciations of individual bay units are displayed via DIGSI. In this case, the PC is linked to the central unit and communicates directly with the bay unit or the PC is connected to a bay unit. The annunciations are forwarded to a control center (if available) via the serial system port of the central unit. Annunciations are displayed via the display of the central unit or of the bay units. Annunciations are indicated via light-emitting diodes (LED) of the central unit or of the bay units. Binary outputs (pilot relay/command relay) of the central unit or of the bay units. The event buffer will be preserved in the event of an auxiliary supply failure if a buffer battery exists. The appendix contains a complete list of all 7SS52 V4 annunciations with the corresponding information number (FNo.). There it is also indicated to which destination each annunciation can be reported. If certain functions are not available for a model with reduced functional scope or if they are configured disabled, their annunciations will not be displayed. No password is required for retrieving annunciations.

206

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Reading Out Information

Displaying event buffers with DIGSI

To display event buffers of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Open the central unit in the DIGSI Manager. Click the folder Online in the navigation window of the DIGSI Device Configuration. This will open the directory containing the operating functions of the device (see Figure 6-1, page 207). Double-click Annunciations. The function selection now shows the individual event buffers. The individual event buffers will be described in more detail in the following subsections.

Figure 6-1 Annunciation groups in the DIGSI Device Configuration

To display event buffers of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Click Annunciation. The function selection shows the submenu for Annunciation and Measurement. Double-click the entry Annunciation. The Select annunciation window shows the individual event buffers. The individual event buffers will be described in more detail in the following subsections. Light-emitting diodes on the front panel The green LED labelled RUN lights permanently during normal operation. The red LED labelled ERROR indicates that the processor system has detected an internal error. The device is not ready when the red LED flashes during operation. Chapter 8, page 281 provides information on how to proceed in such a case. The other LEDs on the device indicate the annunciations which are allocated according to Chapter 4, page 45. After you have allocated the LED, write down its meaning on the labeling strip. Stored indications for LEDs (e.g., protection trip) can be deleted via the pushbutton LED or via DIGSI. This pushbutton serves also as functional check for the LEDs. All LEDs must be lit while you apply this pushbutton. Output relays Annunciations which are allocated to the potential-free output relays according to Chapter 4, page 45 can be output as latched annunciations. The memories of the output relays can also be reset by applying the LED. button.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

207

Control During Operation

6.2.1.1

Operational Annunciations Operational annunciations are information items which the device produces during operation. Up to 200 operational events (central unit) and up to 50 operational events (bay units) are stored in the device in chronological order. When the maximum capacity of the memory has been reached, the oldest event will be erased. The appendix contains a tabular list with all available operational events and their explanation. Only the relevant annunciation will be displayed in the concrete situation. It is also indicated whether the annunciation is only coming (C for events) or whether it is coming and going (C/G for states).

from the PC with DIGSI

To read out operational events of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Event log. A list appears in the data window (right section of the window), (Figure 6-2, page 208). Double-click an entry in the list view. The corresponding contents of the annunciation group is displayed in another window (Figure 6-3, page 208).

Figure 6-2 Overview of operational events in DIGSI Example

Figure 6-3 Examples of operational annunciations in DIGSI

208

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Reading Out Information

To display operational events of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Open the window Select annunciations (Figure 6-4, page 209). Double-click Operational annunciations. The corresponding contents of the operational annunciation is displayed in another window. Note Operational annunciations, fault indications and measured values can also be retrieved via the operator panel of the central unit. If you want to know more, please read the System Description /1/.

Figure 6-4 Select annunciation window in DIGSI of the bay unit

Figure 6-5 Operational annunciations window DIGSI Example

6.2.1.2

Fault events In the event of a fault the display switches automatically over to the spontaneous annunciations display. The first line is assigned to the annunciation Device trip M (FNo. 10445/CU) and the second line to the annunciation Transf. Trip M (FNo. 10433/CU). If an annunciation is signaled as coming, it will be displayed in the row reserved for it as shown in Figure 6-6, page 210.

Spontaneous annunciations

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

209

Control During Operation

Device Trip M Transf. Trip M

Figure 6-6 Display of spontaneous annunciations on the display of the central unit Example

Press the LED button to acknowledge spontaneous annunciations. Following the acknowledgment you will see the default display. Retrievable annunciations Fault events in the power system are indicated by Power System faultand by the fault number and are stored in the fault event buffer. The oscillographic record (Chapter 6.2.3, page 215) contains detailed information on the behaviour of the power system fault. You can retrieve the annunciations of the last 8 power system faults of the central unit and of the last 8 power system faults of the bay unit. A power system fault is thus defined that each fault will be considered a power system fault until it is settled beyond doubt. The central unit can store up to 8 faults with a maximum of 80 fault events each, and each bay unit can store 8 faults with a maximum of 100 fault events each. If more events are generated, the oldest are overwritten in the order of their generation. The Appendix contains a tabular list with all available fault events and their explanation. Only the relevant annunciations will be displayed in the concrete situation. from the PC with DIGSI To read out fault events of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Trip log. The data window shows a list of power system faults. Double-click an entry in the list view. The corresponding contents of the power system fault is displayed in another window. The entries are sorted chronologically according to date and time with the most recent event first.

Figure 6-7 Trip log window in DIGSI Example

To display fault events of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in DIGSI Manager. Open the Select annunciations window. Double-click Fault annunciations. The window with the overview of the fault annunciations appears.

210

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Reading Out Information

Double-click an entry in the overview. You can also click an entry and then Show.... The corresponding contents of the fault event is displayed on another window. If the bay unit is operated without any central unit, the first fault has the number 900. 6.2.1.3 Alarm List When a bay unit fails, the error LED of the bay unit concerned is lit. Additionally, the corresponding alarm text is registered in the alarm list. Note The alarm list can be called up by pressing the function key F1 on the central unit.

An alarm is not only issued if a bay unit fails but also if the protection-internal communication fails. For more information on the analysis of the protection-internal communication please refer to Chapter 8.2.4, page 287.

6.2.1.4

General Interrogation You can use the general interrogation to find out about the current status of the SIPROTEC devices. Note You need DIGSI to read out the results of the general interrogation.

from the PC with DIGSI

To read out the results of the general interrogation of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click General Interrogation. The right section of the window shows date and time of each general interrogation. Double-click an entry in the right section of the window. The General Interrogation window opens. It shows all annunciations that are subject to general interrogation with their current value. To read out the result of the general interrogation of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit), proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Open the Select annunciation window. Double-click General Interrogation. The corresponding contents of the annunciation subject to general interrogation is displayed on another window.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

211

Control During Operation

6.2.1.5

Spontaneous Annunciation You can use Spontaneous Annunciations to view the log file of incoming current annunciations. Note You need DIGSI to read out the spontaneous annunciations.

from the PC with DIGSI

To read out spontaneous annunciations of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Spontaneous annunciation. The right section of the window shows date and time of each spontaneous annunciation. Double-click an entry in the right section of the window. The Spontaneous annunciation window opens. Each new incoming annunciation will appear immediately, i.e. the user does no have to wait for or trigger an update. To read out spontaneous annunciations of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Open the Select annunciations window. Double-click Spontaneous annunciation. The Spontaneous annunciation window appears.

6.2.1.6

Statistics Note Statistics annunciations are only available for the bay units.

from the PC with DIGSI

To read out statistics annunciations of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Open the Select annunciation window. Double-click Statistic. The corresponding contents of the statistics is displayed on another window.

212

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Reading Out Information

6.2.2

Reading Out Measured Values

The processing system determines operational measured values in the background. The operational measured values can be retrieved from the display, read out via the PC port using the PC, or they can be transmitted to a central station via the system port. No password is required for retrieving the measured values. After a few seconds the values will be updated cyclically. The possible measured value representation - as primary quantities or referenced to the nominal value - are stated in Table 6-2, page 213.

Table 6-2

Operational Measured Values Measured values primary A Hz I % Ino % Ino % Ino IN % % %

IdL1, IdL2, IdL3 IsL1, IsL2, IsL3 IL1, IL2, IL3 fN

Differential currents Restraint currents Feeder currents System frequency (display only in the bay units)

Note The percentages Ino refer to the normalized currents of the station, the percentages IN refer to the respective rated feeder current.

from the PC with DIGSI

To retrieve operational measured values of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Measurement. In the navigation window you can now see the different groups of measured values in the subdirectory of Measurement (Figure 6-1, page 207). The measured values are subdivided into the following groups and subgroups: Operational values, primary with Bay currents, primary values Operational normalized percent with Bus Zone Id, Is Check Zone Id, Is Bay currents, percentage relating to the standard normalized current Ino of the station; Operational percent with Bus Zone Id, Is Check Zone Id, Is Bay currents, percentage relating to the rated feeder current IN; 3 dots (...) are displayed instead of the measured value if a measured value is not available. If a value is indeterminate (e.g., fN, if no current is flowing), 3 dashes (---) are shown. 3 asterisks ( ) are displayed in the case of a fault in the bay unit.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

213

Control During Operation

Click the desired measurement group e.g., Operational values primary. The next subgroup is shown. Click the desired subgroup e.g., Bay currents, primary values (Figure 6-1, page 207). Double-click an entry in the list view in the right section of the window. The window with the contents of the corresponding measured value group opens (Figure 6-8, page 214).

Figure 6-8 Metering window DIGSI Example

To read out operational measured values of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Click Annunciations in the navigation window. Double-click Measurement in the function selection. The Select measured values window opens (Figure 6-9, page 214). Click an entry in the list view and then click Show.... Upon that the corresponding entry is displayed on another window (Figure 6-10, page 215).

Figure 6-9 Select measured values window in DIGSI

214

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Reading Out Information

Figure 6-10 Window of the operational measured values DIGSI Example

6.2.3

Reading Out Fault Data

The fault data of the bay units are stored in the bay units and the fault data of the central unit are stored in the central unit. To retrieve and record the fault data from these locations, you need one of the SIGRA programs in addition to DIGSI (optionally available to DIGSI) or the Comtrade Viewer (included in DIGSI). As a prerequisite for recording the fault data, the corresponding parameters such as the length, the pre-trigger time and the post-fault time of the fault recording must be set according to the Chapters 5.6, page 158 and 5.13, page 179.

from the PC with DIGSI

To read out fault data centrally (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Oscillographic Records in the navigation window. The subdirectory of the Oscillographic Records now shows the item Oscillographic Fault Records in the navigation window (Figure 6-1, page 207). The list view in the right section of the window gives an overview of all available fault records. The fault records are displayed with the network fault number, a fault record number and date and time. The numbers for network fault and fault record are always identical for 7SS52 V4 and for each fault in the power system they are numbered starting from 1 upwards.

Figure 6-11 Reading out fault data in DIGSI Example

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

215

Control During Operation

Note When you retrieve the fault data centralized via DIGSI, the following fault records will not appear in the list view: If a local fault record is triggered via the backup protection of a bay unit or by the trip of an external breaker failure protection in a bay unit, it will depend on the setting of the parameter fault rec mode (6401A/CU) where additional fault records are created in the system (Chapter 5.6.2, page 159). A system event buffer is always created regardless of this fact. Fault records, which are not transmitted to the central unit, must be retrieved from the bay unit by means of DIGSI. Fault records of a bay unit running in stand-alone mode are not transmitted to the central unit and must be retrieved from the bay unit by means of DIGSI. For each system event these fault records are numbered starting from 900 upwards. Double-click an entry in the list view in the right section of the window. The window for selecting the oscillographic records opens. The list view gives an overview of all available bay units. They are displayed with the number and the name you have assigned them in DIGSI Manager. The column indicating the status shows whether and how the corresponding bay unit is involved in the fault event

Figure 6-12 Selection of oscillographic records in DIGSI Example

In the column Transfer activate the checkboxes of the bay units you wish to read out. The checkboxes of the bay units with the states with participation/ with tripping and with participation/ without tripping are already active. Regardless of whether you have selected bay units for the transmission, the fault data of the central unit are always transmitted. Then click OK. The fault data are read out and saved. One of the above mentioned programs is started and the fault data are loaded (see also the DIGSI Manual Operation, Subsection 8.3.3). SIGRA 4 opens the fault data of the central unit and of the bay units in a window. The SIGRA 4 system program helps you analyze fault events in the power system. SIGRA 4 processes the data recorded during a fault and presents them graphically. From the recorded measured values it calculates additional measured quantities such as time signals or r.m.s. values which help you evaluate the fault record.

216

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Reading Out Information

Please read the SIGRA Manual /4/ i f you want to know more about the numerous option SIGRA 4 offers. To retrieve fault data of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Click Fault values in the navigation window. Double-click Fault recording. The Select fault window opens (Figure 6-13, page 217). Click SIGRA.... The fault data are retrieved and saved. SIGRA opens and the fault data are loaded (see also the DIGSI Manual Operation, Subsection 8.3.3).

Figure 6-13 Select fault window in DIGSI

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

217

Control During Operation

6.3

Controlling Device Functions

You have several options for interfering with the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection during operation to influence individual functions and annunciations. This includes creating an oscillographic fault record (see Chapter 6.3.1, page 218) blocking the TRIP command (see Chapter 6.3.2.1, page 219) blocking the breaker failure protection (see Chapter 6.3.2.2, page 222) blocking of individual busbar sections (see Chapter 6.3.2.3, page 224) saving and erasing annunciations (see Chapter , page 225) circuit breaker test (see Chapter 6.3.4, page 227) resetting the blocking of the differential current supervision (see Chapter 6.3.5.1, page 229) resetting the blocking of the isolator status supervision (see Chapter 6.3.5.2, page 230) triggering an initial start and a restart (see Chapter 6.3.6, page 230) reading and setting date/time (see Chapter 6.3.7, page 231)

6.3.1

Creating an Oscillographic Record

The oscillographic record is usually triggered by the TRIP command of the busbar protection, of the breaker failure protection or via the tripping of the overcurrent protection and it ends when they are cleared. Not every fault event triggers a fault record (see also Chapter 5.13, page 179). After starting the fault recording, the data are stored in a range from max. 500 ms before the TRIP command to max. 500 ms after it. When the memory is full, each new fault event overwrites the oldest fault event stored in the device. You can also trigger the fault recording via DIGSI during operation.

from the PC with DIGSI

To trigger the fault recording at the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Open the DIGSI Manager of the central unit. Click the folder Online in the navigation window of the DIGSI Device Configuration. This will open the directory containing the operating functions of the device. Click Test. The function selection now shows the individual test functions. Double-click Start Oscillographic Fault Recording. The fault recording is started. For further information on the setting of the parameters for fault recording, please read Chapter 5.6, page 158 and Chapter 5.13, page 179. The data can be read out to a PC and evaluated by the DIGSI communication software (see Chapter 6.2.3, page 215). To trigger the fault recording of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows:

218

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

Click Device Trigger test fault recording... on the menu bar. The window Fault Record Length opens (Figure 6-14, page 219). Enter the desired fault record length and click OK. The fault recording starts. The fault record length must be within the specified limits.

Figure 6-14 Fault Record Length dialog box in DIGSI

Note You can also trigger the fault recording via the operator panel of the central unit. If you want to know more on this topic, please read the System Description /1/.

6.3.2
6.3.2.1

Blocking
Blocking the TRIP Command The TRIP commands can be blocked for the entire protection or busbar-selectively. With the TRIP command blocked all device-internal protection functions (central unit, bay unit) remain active. However, a TRIP command is not initiated i.e., the TRIP command relays configured in the bay units are not activated. This is useful e.g., during the commissioning phase.

Blocking the TRIP command entire protection

The blocking of the TRIP command for the entire protection is blocked with the tagging TRIP blocking (FNo. 10441/CU) or via a binary input >TRIP blocking (FNo. 10440/CU). The blocking is indicated by the annunciation TRIP blocked (FNo. 10442/CU). The busbar-selective blocking of the TRIP command can be done at the central unit for the connected bay units as well as at the bay units directly via DIGSI, binary input or local operation The blocking via the central unit is done via $03 BlkTrip (FNo. 177.1337/CU) or a binary input >Blk Trip $03 (FNo. 177.1336/CU) is indicated by the annunciation "$03 BlkdTrip" (FNo. 177.1338/CU) or "TRIP blocked" (FNo. 10442/ CU). The blocking via the bay unit is done via >Blk.BB TRIP (FNo. 7629/BU) or >Blockage (FNo. 4201/BU) is indicated by the annunciation "BB TRIP block" (FNo. 7657/BU). The system will always be reset when the blocking is deactivated in order to completely terminate the processes triggered by tests and checks (e.g. CBF).

Blocking the TRIP command busbar-selectively

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

219

Control During Operation

In the case of a restart or a power failure, the tagging TRIP blocked is retained. The tagging is deleted in the case of an initial start. When blocking exists, changes in the isolator of the blocked bus section are not permitted. The message "IsoProhib/Maint" (FNo. 10471/CU) is outputted. The following figure gives an overview of these function:

BF+: CU command (system port, DIGSI, locally) Pr.: BU test function (DIGSI, locally) K: ON G: OFF *) the BI ">AUS Freigabe" of the BU is only observed if it has been configured.

Figure 6-15 Logic for the blocking of the TRIP command

220

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

from the PC with DIGSI

To block the TRIP command via the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Control in the navigation window. Double-click Tagging in the function selection. The Tagging window opens (see Figure 6-16, page 221). To block the TRIP command, click the command button ON in the corresponding row. To reset the blocking of the TRIP command, click the command button OFF. Next a security prompt takes place. While the Tagging window is opened, there will be no further security prompts when you change the tagging status. Click Yes to apply the command. The blocking of the TRIP command can be protected by the password for switching/selecting/updating. If you have activated this password, you will be prompted to enter it before the command is executed since a connection was first established. A dialog box opens for this purpose. Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the command will be executed.

Figure 6-16 Tagging window in DIGSI

Note You can also block the TRIP command via the operator panel of the central unit. If you want to know more on this topic, please read the System Description /1/.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

221

Control During Operation

6.3.2.2

Blocking the Breaker Failure Protection The external trip of the breaker failure protection can be blocked for the entire protection or busbar-selectively With the external trip of the breaker failure protection blocked, all device-internal protection functions (central unit, bay unit) remain active. However, there is no trip of the breaker failure protection inititated, i.e. the breaker failure protection relays configured in the bay units are not activated. This is useful e.g. during the commissioning phase.

Blocking Breaker Failure Protection entire protection

The blocking of the breaker failure protection for the entire protection is blocked via the tagging Blocking BF (FNo. 10431/CU) or via a binary input >Blocking BF (FNo. 10430/CU). The blocking is indicated by the annunciation TRIP blocked (FNo. 10432/CU). The busbar-selective blocking of the breaker failure protection can be done at the central unit for the connected bay units as well as at the bay units directly via DIGSI, binary input or local operation. The blocking via the central unit is done via $03 BlkBF (FNo. 177.1347/CU) or via a binary input >Blk BF $03 (FNo. 177.1346/CU) and is indicated by the annunciation "$03 BlkdBF" (FNo. 177.1348/CU) or "BF blocked" (FNo. 10432/ CU). The blocking via the bay unit is done via >Blk.BF of BB (FNo. 7690/BU) or Blockage (FNo. 4301/BU) is indicated by the annunciation "SVS SS block." (FNo. 7658/BU). In the case of a restart or a power failure the tagging Blocking BF is retained. The tagging is erased in the case of an initial start. When blocking exists, changes in the isolator of the blocked bus section are not permitted. The message "IsoProhib/Maint" (FNo. 10471/CU is outputted. The following figure gives an overview of these functions:

Blocking Breaker Failure Protection busbar-selectively

222

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

BF+: CU command (system port, DIGSI, locally) Pr.: BU test function (DIGSI, locally) K: ON G: OFF *) The enable input is only observed if the operating mode "BF 2-channel" has been configured (param. XX14 BF BI mode).

Figure 6-17 Logic for the blocking of the external breaker failure protection tripping

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

223

Control During Operation

from the PC with DIGSI

To block the breaker failure protection via the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Control in the navigation window. Double-click Tagging in the function selection. The Tagging window opens (see Figure 6-16, page 221). To block the breaker failure protection, click the command button ON in the corresponding row. To reset the blocking of the breaker failure protection, click the command button OFF. Next a security prompt takes place. Click Yes to apply the command. The blocking of the TRIP command can be protected by the password for switching/selecting/updating. If you have activated this password, you will be prompted to enter it before the command is first executed after a connection was established. A dialog box opens for this purpose. Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the command will be executed. Note You can also block the breaker failure protection via the operator panel of the central unit. If you want to know more on this topic, please read the System Description /1/.

6.3.2.3

Blocking of Individual Busbar Sections Individual busbar sections can be blocked for special conditions or for test purposes. To do so, binary inputs of the central unit have to be configured ">Blk $03 (FNo. 177.1334/CU). The blocking is done for every three phases and is retained beyond a device restart. The differential protection of respective bus bars is affected by the blocking. All of the self-monitoring functions and the check zones stay active. In case of an error on the blocked bus bar, the tripping of the selective measuring module is inhibited. The check zone outputs its trip command. The blocking is indicated by the annunciation "$03 blocked BI (FNo. 177.1335/CU)..

Caution!
The blocking is not "commuted", e.g. in the case of the preference of a measuring system by inserting a sectionalizer fork (connection of two busbars via an isolator).

224

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

6.3.3

Saving and Deleting Annunciations

Events are stored in the event buffers inside the SIPROTEC device. The same applies for the fault records corresponding to the fault events. Spontaneous indications, to the contrary, are transmitted directly to the computer without buffering in the SIPROTEC device. Normally, you do not have to erase the event buffer of the device during operation as new events will automatically overwrite the oldest annunciations when there is not enough memory space available. Erasing the buffers may, however, be sensible so that they contain only information of new fault events e.g., following a plant inspection. The buffers are reset separately for the different annunciation groups. Note When deleting fault events also the fault event buffers are cleared and all corresponding counters are reset to zero. If, however, you delete fault records (see subsection 7.1.4), the fault annunciations remain unaffected.

6.3.3.1

Saving Annunciations To save annunciations of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click the desired annunciation group (see Chapter 6.2.1.1, page 208). The corresponding buffer contents of the annunciation group appears in the right window. Fault annunciations are displayed with the number of the network fault and with date and time. Double-click the desired entry. The list view of the annunciations is displayed. Right-click in the list view to open the context menu and click Save. The annunciations are saved. Proceed analogously to save further entries. You can also save entire annunciation groups. For this purpose, select the desired annunciation group and click File Save on the DIGSI menu bar. Next you see a security prompt demanding whether to save all process data (annunciations and operational measured values). Confirm with Yes. DIGSI automatically creates a folder provided it does not already exist and saves the desired annunciation group together with the process data to this folder. For more information see also section 9.4 on device operation in the DIGSI Manual. To save events of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in DIGSI Manager. Click the desired annunciation group. The corresponding buffer contents of the annunciation group appears on another window. Fault annunciations are displayed with the number of the network fault and with date and time. Double-click the desired entry. The list view of the annunciations is displayed.

from the PC with DIGSI

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

225

Control During Operation

Figure 6-18 Saving annunciations Example

Click Save. The annunciations are saved. Proceed analogously to save further entries. You cannot save entire annunciations groups for the bay units as is possible for the central unit.

6.3.3.2

Deleting Annunciations To delete annunciations of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Annunciations in the navigation window.(see e.g. Chapter 6.2.1.1, page 208). The annunciation groups are shown in the function selection. Right-click the desired annunciation group in the navigation window. Click Delete in the context menu. Next a security prompt takes place. Click Yes to delete the data. Note When deleting fault events the corresponding fault records are also erased. And the counters for the network fault number and the fault record number are reset to zero. If, however, you delete fault records, the fault record numbers and both counters remain unaffected. To delete annunciations of a single bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in the DIGSI Manager. Click Control in the navigation window and select the entry General Device Settings in the function selection. The OTHER OPTIONS window opens.

from the PC with DIGSI

226

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

Figure 6-19 Deleting annunciations of a bay unit in DIGSI.

Click RESETTING STORED DATA. Click Execute. Next a security prompt takes place. Click Yes to delete the data.

6.3.4

Circuit Breaker Test

You can test the trip circuits and circuit breakers during operation by applying an onoff circuit via the corresponding bay unit. You can also use DIGSI to test the circuit breakers or directly via the operator panel of the bay unit. The following prerequisites must be met: The necessary test commands CB Test L1 to CB Test L3 (7636/BU to 7638/BU) have been configured to the command relays. The feeder current must not exceed the set limit I> MAN TRIP (6316/CU)

DANGER!
A successfully launched test cycle may cause the circuit breaker to close if an external automatic reclosing device exists! As is shown in Figure 6-20, page 228, the circuit breaker test of the bay unit can be triggered by the following actions: by applying the F2 function key (3-phase), via binary input >CB Test (FNo. 1156/BU) (3-phase), via the parameter CB TEST LIVE TRIP (4400/BU) (1- and 3-phase). The command for the circuit breaker test is reset after a fixed time of 2 s.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

227

Control During Operation

Figure 6-20 Trip test including circuit breaker

from the PC with DIGSI

To perform the circuit breaker test with a bay unit (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in DIGSI Manager. Click Test in the navigation window and select the entry Test in the function selection. The Tests window opens.

Figure 6-21 Tests window in DIGSI

Click the entry CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST : TRIP COMMAND and click Run... The window 4400 CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST : TRIP COMMAND opens.

Figure 6-22 Window 4400 CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST : TRIP COMMAND in DIGSI

228

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

Click an entry in the list and click Run.... Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the circuit breaker test will be executed.

6.3.5
6.3.5.1

Reset Blocking
Reset Blocking of Differential Current Supervision Use the parameters DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU) and DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) to specify the behaviour of the protection for a pick-up of the differential current supervision (Chapter 5.5.1.8, page 143). The blocking is reset by applying Reset Id-Block or via binary input >Reset Id-Block (BI-FNo. 6/CU) in the central unit.

from the PC with DIGSI

To reset the blocking of the differential current supervision at the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Control in the navigation window.(see Figure 6-23, page 229). Double-click Rest blocking of diff.-current superv. in the function selection. The resetting of the blocking can be protected by the password for the parameter set. If you have activated this password, you will be prompted to enter it before the command is executed. A dialog box opens for this purpose. Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the blocking will be reset.

Figure 6-23 Reset blocking of differential current supervision using DIGSI

Note If the parameters DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU) and DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) are set to alarm only, the function Reset blocking of diff.-current superv. is not available.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

229

Control During Operation

6.3.5.2

Reset Blocking of Isolator Fault Depending on the setting of the parameter ISOL Malfunct (6302/CU), there are different options of how the blocking will behave (Kapitel 5.5.1.9, Seite 145). The function is acknowledged by applying Reset IsoMalBl or via binary input >Reset IsoMalBl (BI-FNo. 7/CU) in the central unit.

from the PC with DIGSI

To reset the blocking of the isolator fault at the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Control in the navigation window.(see Figure 6-23, page 229). Double-click Reset blocking of isolator fault in the function selection. The resetting of the blocking can be protected by the password for the parameter set. If you have activated this password you will be prompted to enter it before the command is first executed since a connection was established. A dialog box opens for this purpose. Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the blocking will be reset. Note If the parameter ISOL Malfunct (6302/CU) is set to alarm only, the function Reset blocking of isolator fault is not available.

6.3.6

Trigger Initial Start and Restart

In case of an initial start will be cleared - fault records - fault annuciation buffer - operational event buffer - alarm list buffer The device settings are contained in the parameter set and these are not changed in case of an initial start. The restart, to the contrary, is equivalent to switching 7SS52 V4 off and on. In case of a restart operational annunciations, fault events, fault records, and the setting are retained. Annunciations that are subject to general interrogation are retrieved and the connection to the bay units is re-established.

Caution!
Executing the commands Reset or Resume will clear all device buffers and Oscillographic Records. Before initial start you may want to back-up the settings and buffer contents by means of the DIGSI Device Configuration.

230

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

from the PC with DIGSI

To initiate an initial start or a restart of the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Device Reset or click Device Resume on the menu bar. Activating an initial start or restart can be protected by the password for testing and diagnostics. If you have activated this password you will be prompted to enter it before one of the two commands will be executed. A dialog box opens for this purpose. Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the command will be executed.

6.3.7

Read and Set Date / Time

You have already decided in Chapter 4.6.2, page 75 on date and time management whether to set the internal clock and which synchronization source to use.Usually, a plausible time is already displayed during the device start. The time is either set automatically by the connected synchronization source or manually. Until the synchronization takes place and sets a valid time, different time displays may appear on the device. They are as follows: The bay units are automatically synchronized via the central unit. For the operation without a central unit, the time for the bay units can be set via DIGSI or via local operation.

Clock status

Besides the display of date and time also the clock status is indicated. The text of the status display may look as follows for regular states of the time management:
Table 6-3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Clock status Status text -- -- -- --- -- -- ST -- -- ER--- -- ER ST -- NS ER--- NS-- -not synchronized synchronized Status

The identifiers of the clock status (status bits) have the following meaning:
NS Not set Clock was not set manually or synchronized after start. If the synchronization is performed via the system port, the transferred time value is marked invalid but the cyclical synchronization continues. There is no cyclic synchronization at present within the scope of the tolerance time (time may jump) The synchronization time last received has delivered a daylightsaving time bit (Central European Daylight-Saving Time)

ER ST

Error Daylight-saving time

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

231

Control During Operation

The status is correct when text no. 1 or text no. 2 according to Table 6-3, page 231 are displayed. Time display The DATE/TIME picture and also all other indications containing date and time may have different time displays. They are determined by the value of the year and the status identifier not set and error. The possible display types and their causes are explained in the following table.
Table 6-4 No. Display types of date and time Display (example) Date 1 2 3 4 5 **.**.**** 04.09.1998 04?09.1998 04.09.1998 **?**.**** Time 15?07:15 15?07:15 15?07:15 15:07:15 15?07:15 1990<Year<2090 Year = 1990 Yes Yes No No irrelevant No Yes No Yes Year Error Not Set

Display type no. 1 occurs if the real-time clock has failed to deliver a valid time during startup. The annunciations in the event buffer have the date 01.01.1990. Remedy: Set date and time manually (see margin heading Time management). Display type no. 2 occurs if the real-time clock has been set but not synchronized. This may happen: temporarily during device start, during synchronization failure i.e. if the cyclical synchronization was interrupted for longer than the specified tolerance time (Fault indication after). Remedy: If you are using external synchronization, check its function and correct connection. Display type no. 3 is shown if the real-time clock has delivered a valid time value but the time has not been set manually nor synchronized afterwards. Remedy: Set date and time manually or wait until the cyclic synchronization takes effect. Display type no. 4 indicates that the clock is synchronized cyclically according to its operating mode (normal status). Display type no. 5 occurs if the synchronization takes place via the system port and the transferred time value has been marked not set. Time management You can modify the clock: by manually setting the clock via the integrated operation or via DIGSI, by modifying the parameters for the clock management. You can set date and time manually during operation provided this feature has been enabled in the configuration of the clock management and after you have entered the password no. 5 (single parameters).

232

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

You can set the clock in the operating mode Internal Clock and also in External Impulse via Binary Input mode. The time step involved is indicated via the operational annunciations "Clock SyncError on and "Clock SyncError off. In the mode External Impulse via Binary Input the annunciation "Clock SyncError off appears as soon as a pulse edge has been received after the time was changed. In the other operating modes manual setting is only accepted if the synchronization is currently considered faulty i.e., the identifier ST is set in the clock status. This is to avoid time steps. IRIG B is special since it allows the year to be changed at any time. This is accompanied by the annunciationsClock SyncError on and "Clock SyncError off, respectively. The setting of date and time can also be relative ( 23:59:59) via the Diff.-time input panel. This input option must not be confounded with the parameter Offset (see chapter 5) which influences the synchronization time of the radio clock receiver. from the PC with DIGSI To enter date and time at the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Device Set Date & Time (see Figure 6-24, page 233). The dialog box Set clock & date in device opens. The displayed values show the actual date and about the actual time. The day is determined automatically from the date and cannot be edited.

Figure 6-24 Selecting the Set date & time command

Enter date and time in the corresponding boxes. Observe the correct notation (see Figure 6-25, page 234). Click OK to transfer the specified values into the device. The existing values are modified and the current dialog box closes.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

233

Control During Operation

Figure 6-25 Set clock & date in device dialog box

If you want to change the time offset or the tolerance time of the clock signal in the event of a fault, click Settings (Figure 6-26, page 234). The setting groups are shown in the function selection.

Figure 6-26 Selecting the time synchronization function

Double-click Time Synchronization. The Time Synchronization & Time Format dialog box opens (Figure 6-27, page 235). Change the time delay of the annunciation under the heading Monitoring (Fault indication after:) and the time offset in the box Offset to time signal.

234

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Controlling Device Functions

Figure 6-27 Time Synchronization & Time Format dialog box in DIGSI

Note Date and time can also be set via the operator panel of the central unit. If you want to know more on this topic, please read the System Description /1/.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

235

Control During Operation

6.4

Feeder Shutdown and Commissioning

For additional information have a look at Chapter 5.9.3, page 166. The bay unit can be put into service or shut down via DIGSI at the central unit with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU). via the operator panel of the central unit with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU). via the operator panel of the bay unit with the F1 function key. If the feeder has already been shut down, applying the F1 key will put the feeder into service. via the operator panel of the bay unit with the parameter COMM CU (4501/BU). via the binary input ">Bay o.of ser (FNo. 7620/BU) at the bay unit. Note A feeder can only be put into service at the same place where it was shut down. For controlling the function "bay out of service" on the bay unit, the controls on the bay unit have to be initially enabled on-site via the FE Control parameter CTRL REL BU (6318/CU). For this purpose, only the corresponding parameter of the executing device is modified. A logic OR operation of the two parameters from the central unit and the bay unit delivers the actual status of the bay unit.

from the PC with DIGSI

To shut down a bay for the busbar protection or put it into service at the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Settings in the navigation window. The setting groups are shown in the function selection. Double-click Bay units in the function selection. The Bay units window opens (Figure 6-28, page 237). Double-click the desired bay unit. The window Bay Unit BU 01 opens (Figure 6-29, page 237). You can also click Customize.... To put the bay for the busbar protection out of service, click the tab General and select out of service from the drop-down list in the right column. To put the bay for the busbar protection into service, click the tab General and select in service from the drop-down list in the right column. Click DIGSI Device to transfer the parameter into the device. You can also click OK or Apply to include the parameter in DIGSI and transfer it into the device later. Click Device on the menu bar and then the menu item DIGSI Device to transfer the parameter into the device. You will then be prompted to enter password No. 7 (parameter set). After you have entered the password and confirmed it with OK, the data will be transmitted and take effect when the transmission to the central unit or the bay units is finished.

236

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Feeder Shutdown and Commissioning

Figure 6-28 Bay units window Example

Figure 6-29 Bay status window Example

To put a single bay for the busbar protection out of or into service at the bay unit (PC linked to central unit or to bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in DIGSI Manager. Click Test in the navigation window. Double-click Test in the function selection. The Tests window opens (Figure 6-21, page 228). Click the entry COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL UNIT and then click Run.... The window Test - 4500 COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL UNIT opens (Figure 6-30, page 238).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

237

Control During Operation

Figure 6-30

Window Test - 4500 COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL UNIT

To put the bay for the busbar protection out of service, click the function Switching bay out of service and click Run.... Next a password prompt takes place. To take the bay for the busbar protection into service, click the function Switching bay in service and click Run.... Next a password prompt takes place. Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the bay will be put out of service.

Note A warm restart normally takes place after the reconnection of a branch. During the shutdown, the warm restart is omitted as long as the connection continually exists and if the parameters of the central processing unit and the field unit continue to coincide.

238

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Maintenance Mode

6.5

Maintenance Mode
For additional information have a look at Chapter 5.9.3, page 166. The maintenance mode can be performed individually for each feeder as follows: via DIGSI at the central unit with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU). via the operator panel of the central unit with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU). via the operator panel of the bay unit with the F3 function key. If the feeder is already in maintenance mode, applying the F3 key will put the feeder into service. via the operator panel of the bay unit with the parameter Com. CU (4503/BU). via the binary input >Maintenance (FNo. 7624/BU) at the bay unit. Note The maintenance mode can only be deactivated at the same place where it was activated. For controlling the function "bay out of service" on the bay unit, the controls on the bay unit have to be initially enabled on-site via the FE Control parameter CTRL REL BU (6318/CU).

from the PC with DIGSI

To put a bay unit into maintenance mode at the central unit (PC linked to central unit) proceed as follows: Click Settings in the navigation window. The setting groups are shown in the function selection. Double-click Bay units in the function selection. The Bay units window opens (Figure 6-28, page 237). Double-click the desired bay unit. The window Bay Unit BU01 opens (Figure 6-29, page 237). You can also click Customize.... To put the bay unit to maintenance mode, click the tab General and select in maintenance from the drop-down list in the right column. Click DIGSI Device to transfer the parameter into the device. To put a single bay unit into maintenance mode (PC linked to central unit or bay unit) proceed as follows: Open the corresponding bay unit in DIGSI Manager. Click Test in the navigation window. Double-click Test in the function selection. The Tests window opens (Figure 6-21, page 228). Click the entry COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL UNIT and then click Run.... The window Test - 4500 COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL UNIT opens (Figure 6-30, page 238). Click the entry Switching bay in maintenance and then click Run.... Next a password prompt takes place.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

239

Control During Operation

Enter the correct password in the box named Password and then click OK. If the password is wrong, you will receive an error message. When the password is correct, the bay will be put into maintenance.

240

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Visualization

6.6
General

Plant Visualization
The switchgear diagram you have created with the DIGSI Plant Configuration (see Chapter 4.3, page 49) is interpreted and the data set is produced as a result. Furthermore, it serves for the visual monitoring of the substation during operation. After the Plant Visualization has been started, the current switchgear diagram is loaded and displayed. The Plant Visualization enables an on-line presentation of the measured values, switch states, and assignment to busbars. Note For a detailed instruction on how to use the Plant Visualization, please refer to the corresponding on-line help. This section describes the basic method for the visual supervision of a substation.

DIGSI at the CU

To use DIGSI for starting the Plant Visualization via a PC connected to the central unit, proceed as follows: Open the central unit in the DIGSI Manager in on-line mode. Click Monitoring in the navigation window. Double-click Substation data in the function selection. The DIGSI plant visualization opens. Alternatively, you can right-click Substation data and then select Open object in the context menu.

Figure 6-31 Start screen of the module Plant Visualization

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

241

Control During Operation

Note The Plant Configuration and the Plant Visualization cannot run simultaneously. Close the Plant Configuration before you start the Plant Visualization. User interface After the Plant Visualization has been started, you see the current switchgear diagram in the application window. The structure of the switchgear diagram is static and cannot be modified i.e. clicking into the application window will not have any effect. The following objects change in dependence of the actual on-site conditions: values in the measured value boxes status of isolator switches and circuit breakers colours of busbars, lines and isolator switches static object if they are linked to lines or busbars The following object are not subject to a change in colour: text measured value boxes circuit breakers current transformers Display of the current switch states The current status of isolator switches and circuit breakers is represented by the corresponding circuit symbols as shown in Figure 6-32, page 242.

Figure 6-32 Circuit symbols of a circuit breaker

242

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Plant Visualization

Display of the measured values

Measured value boxes are displayed for the busbars and current transformers each consisting of three fields (phases L1, L2, L3) of the phase currents and always display the current measured value. The first line of each measured value box shows the name of the busbar or of the current transformer. Measured value boxes for current transformers show the current in percent. Note The percentages for the differential and restraint currents are referred to the rated current of the base CT. The percentages for the feeder currents refer to the rated transformer current of the corresponding feeder.
.

Note In the fault record, the current values are displayed from the protection's point of view, i.e. after the algorithmic processing, for an easier analysis of the protection behaviour. This means that, for example, the stabilization factor k in the restraint current is taken into account. A special feature is the restraint current of the check zone: In the extreme case (busbar fault with all currents directed to the busbar), the resulting restraint current of the check zone is even zero since the current flowing out is zero. Each bus zone has one measured value box for the 3 differential currents and one for the 3 restraint currents. Note The measured value boxes for the bus zones can only be displayed in the Plant Visualization if you have set the measured values to visible in the DIGSI Plant Configuration under the object properties of the busbar. Further information on setting the object properties can be found in the on-line help of the DIGSI Plant Configuration. Note If 2 busbars are connected via a sectionalizer forkbus, only those measured value boxes of the busbar are visible that are in the upper section of the Plant Visualization or more to the left-hand side. The measured value boxes of a current transformer show the actual feeder current and also the long text of the logic group (bay name) to which the transformer is assigned. You can show or hide the measured value boxes. To show the measured value boxes: Click View Measured Value Boxes on the menu bar. Alternatively, you can click the button on the toolbar. The measured value boxes are displayed as you have specified in the DIGSI Plant Configuration. With the measured value boxes shown, the menu item View Measured Value Boxes is checked off and the command button is active.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

243

Control During Operation

To hide the measured value boxes, proceed analogously. With the measured value boxes hidden, the menu item View Measured Value Boxes is not checked off and the command button is not active. The setting for the display of the measured value boxes is saved and restored after the restart of the Plant Visualization. Check zone You can also show or hide the measured value boxes for the differential current and for the restraint current of the checkzone. The measured values are displayed as percentages. The assignment of the feeders to a busbar is indicated by a certain colour. This means that the line and the switchgear symbols are in the same colour as the corresponding busbar. If a busbar isolator, or a set of two isolators connected to the same feeder but to different busbars, is closed, the colour of the left or upper bus zone has the priority and takes possession of the right or lower bus zone (preference).

Colour-coded assignment

244

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Installation and Commissioning

The installation and commissioning may only be made by experienced commissioners. They have to be familiar with the commissioning of protection and control systems, with the management of power systems and with the relevant safety rules and guidelines. This chapter tells you how to install and connect the central unit and the bay units of the distributed busbar and beaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 in addition this chapter tells you which tests with secondary values should be made in order to put the system into operation with primary values.

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

Installation and Commissioning Checking the Connections Commissioning Checks With Secondary Values Checks With Primary Values Final Check of the Protection

246 251 252 270 279 280

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

245

Installation and Commissioning

7.1

Installation and Commissioning

Pay attention to the operating conditions according to VDE 0100/ 5.73 and VDE 0105 part 1/7.83.

Caution!
The modules of digital protection equipment contain electrostatically endangered components. These must not be withdrawn or inserted under live conditions! The modules must be handled with care so that any possibility of damage due to static discharges is prevented. Pay attention to the EED regulations (handling of electrostatically endangered devices) when you handle single modules. The modules are not endangered when plugged in.

7.1.1

Central Unit
To provide a secure stand you must fix the cubicle sufficiently to the floor. Provide solid low-ohmic and low-inductive earthing for the cubicle. The cubicle must be connected to the earth via the screw terminal with the earth symbol. If several cubicles are put up connect them among each other also in a solid low-ohmic and low-inductive way. Make the further installation as in section Panel flush mounting.

Cubicle mounting

Panel flush mounting

Mount the subrack ES902c with at least 4 screws on the panel. The fixing flanges at both sides must be in full contact with the surface (Figure 9-2, page 319). Mount a solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operational earthing on the lateral earthing surface. For this earthing strips DIN 72333 Form A are suitable. Connect the strip to the protective earth of the panel. Connect the electric lines via the double-leaf-spring crimp contacts or the screw terminals of the modular terminal blocks on the back of the central unit. Pay attention to the identification of the modular terminal blocks. (Bild 2-6, page 22). Connect the central unit to the bay units by fiber-optic cables For this, use fiber-optic cables with prefabricated ST plugs. Provide a suitable strain relief. When the fibreoptic cables are connected, the configured order of the bay units must be followed. The connections on the back of the central unit are marked. (Bild 2-6, page 22).

Panel surface mounting

Mount the surface-mounted housing of the central unit with 4 screws each on the panel (for mechanical dimensions see Chapter 9.3.1, page 319). Mount a solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operational earthing on the lateral earthing surface with at least a M4 screw. For this earthing strips DIN72333 Form A are suitable. Connect the strip to the protective earth of the panel. Connect the electric lines via the screw terminals. You can use solid conductors or stranded conductors with end sleeves. Connect the central unit to the bay units by fibre-optic cables. For this, use fiberoptic cables with prefabricated ST plugs. Provide a suitable strain relief. When the

246

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Installation and Commissioning

fiber-optic cables are connected to the central unit, the configured order of the bay units must be followed. The connections on the back of the central unit are marked (Bild 2-6, page 22). The surface-mounted housing has bulkhead cable glands. These can be found at the underside of the housing. The bulkhead cable glands correspond to the degree of protection of the housing and provide strain relief for the cables.

7.1.2

Bay Unit
Swing the two labeling strips at the housing cover open. That exposes the 4 elongated holes in the mounting bracket. Insert the bay unit into the panel cutout or the cubicle frame and secure it with four mounting screws (see mechanical dimensions in Chapter 9.3.2, page 322 to 324). Connect a solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operational earthing on the lateral earthing surface with at least a M4 screw. For this earthing strips DIN 72333 Form A are suitable. Connect the strip to the protective earth of the panel. Connect the electric lines via the double-leaf-spring crimp contacts or the screw terminals of the modular terminal blocks on the back of the bay unit. Pay attention to the identification of the modular terminal blocks. (Figure 2-8, page 24). Connect the bay units to the central unit by optical fibres. For this, use optical fibres with prefabricated ST plugs. Provide a suitable strain relief.

Panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting

Panel surface mounting

Mount the bay unit 7SS523 with 4 screws each to the panel (for mechanical dimensions see Chapter 9.3.2, page 322). Connect a solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operational earthing on the lateral earthing surface with at least a M4 screw. For this earthing strips DIN72333 Form A are suitable. Connect the strip to the protective earth of the panel. Connect the electric lines via the screw terminals. You can use solid conductors or stranded conductors with end sleeves. Connect the bay units to the central unit by fiber-optic cables. For this, use fiberoptic cables with prefabricated ST plugs. Provide a suitable strain relief.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

247

Installation and Commissioning

7.1.3
7.1.3.1

General Information on the 2-Bay Bus Coupler

General The coupler bay with the type "2-bay"-coupler is implemented with 2 bay units of the 7SS52. This is necessary when the IO capability of the bay unit (one current transformer, five isolators) is not sufficient for processing as 1-bay coupler. To ensure that all functions of the coupler operate correctly, it must be ensured that the connection of the measuring inputs, binary inputs and outputs to the bay units comply with certain requirements.

Measuring inputs (current transformers)

The currents must be measured by both bay units separately. On couplers with only one set of primary CTs the CT measuring inputs of the two bay units must be connected in series, with 180 phase rotation with respect to each other. The phase rotation is required as only one CT polarity can be set, and the current flows in exactly the opposite direction in the second part of the coupler. Tripping contacts and inter-tripping signals must be connected in parallel on both bay units, as each bay unit obtains its own command from the central unit.

Tripping contacts and inter-tripping signals Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (CB aux)

The so-called "grey zone" (fault between CB and CT) is protected by using the CB aux. When the CB is open, the current in the coupler is inverted so that the fault immediately appears on the feeding busbar section. As each of the bay units is separately measuring the currents, the CB aux must be connected in parallel to both bay units. To provide this functionality, the switching status information "CB open" (>CB OFF) is sufficient. Unwanted tripping due to incorrect switching status feed-back signalling is prevented by the check zone. For increased security, the option to also check the plausibility of the switching state with the feed-back information "CB closed" (>CB ON) via binary input may also be used. For this purpose, the corresponding binary inputs on both bay units must be configured accordingly. By means of the binary input "CB manual close" (>CB man. close) the current reversal described above in connection with CB aux is applied immediately - despite the switching state feed-back information still indicating that the CB is open. This ensures that in the event of delayed opening of the CB aux contact the current appearing will already be allocated to the correct busbar section. The logic is implemented in each bay unit and must be connected in parallel. Due to the selective current measurement, the binary input for the breaker-failure protection is also selective, i.e. with the operating mode "bus zone unbalance" each bay unit reverses its own current. The binary inputs of both bay units must be connected in parallel. Note: The operating mode "bus zone unbalance" only makes sense in conjunction with the mode "transfer bus operation", as the check zone would otherwise prevent tripping. If the breaker failure protection function is required, then the operating mode "current query" can be applied. In this case the check zone is not part of the tripping decision logic.

CLOSE-command

Breaker-failure protection / Breakerfailure initiation

248

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Installation and Commissioning

Maintenance of bay

This function is applied during isolator maintenance when the isolator feed-back signals do not correspond with the isolator switching state (e.g. when testing the auxiliary contacts or when the auxiliary supply for isolator status signals is switched off). The feeder remains in service during this time and consequently is part of the busbar protection measurement. "Maintenance of bay" results in a freeze of the current isolator switching state in this bay. The further isolator monitoring in this bay and resulting signals are blocked. A signal "Isolator operation prohibited" is generated. The maintenance mode is activated in each bay unit. There is always one binary in out by means of which the corresponding bay unit can switch the maintenance mode for the configured isolator on or off. Individual switchgear (isolators, circuit breakers) can be excluded from the maintenance mode by means of a setting parameter. For the function "Bay out of service", the binary inputs of the two bay units are combined by a logical OR, i.e. the connection to one binary input is sufficient.

Bay out of service

7.1.3.2

2-Bay Bus Coupler With 2 Current Transformers With a 2-bay bus coupler with 2 current transformers, each bay unit is connected to its corresponding current transformer (usually overlapping).

7.1.3.3

2-Bay Bus Coupler With one Current Transformer If more than 5 isolators have to be monitored, in the DIGSI plant Configuration a coupler must also be equipped at the distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 with two bay units. Distribute the isolators of the bay to 2 bay units (see also Configuration notes in Chapter 4.8, page 81).

7.1.3.4

Connection If you have couplers with one transformer, connect the current inputs of the bay units in series per phase (Figure 7-1, page 250). Record the isolator positions according to the configuration via the binary inputs of the single bay units. Connect the TRIP command and transfer trip contacts of both bay units in parallel. In this case also connect further binary input functions (e.g. CBF initiation, CBF release, TRIP release) in parallel.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

249

Installation and Commissioning

Figure 7-1 Connection of the current inputs of the bay units in bus couplers with only one current transformer.

250

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Checking the Connections

7.2

Checking the Connections

The operational preparations according to Chapter 7.1, page 246 must be completed.

Warning!
The following inspection steps are performed in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements and precautionary measures may perform these steps. The connection assignments are shown in Chapter A.3, page 334. The allocating possibilities of the binary inputs and outputs are described in Chapter A.10, page 372. Before switching the protection system on, check that the following external electrical and optical links are correctly connected. Check the continuity and connections of all current transformer circuits against the plant and connection diagrams: Are the current transformers correctly earthed? The polarity of a single phase of a current transformer must be consistent. The polarity of the current transformers of different bay units can be different. But it must correspond to the parameterized polarity in the DIGSI system projection. Is the phase relationship of the current transformers consistent? Check the fiber-optic connections between central unit and bay units. Check the tripping lines to the circuit breaker. The auxiliary voltage must not yet be switched on: Check the control wiring to and leading from other devices. Check the signal circuits. Check the auxiliary voltage at the cubicle terminals. Check its polarity and the polarity of the digital input connection. Check magnitude of the supply voltage. Check whether the binary inputs are set to the correct voltages. When the connections are connected correctly, switch on the miniature circuit breaker for the supply voltage. If you have already installed the communication between the central unit and the bay units (Chapter 3.5, page 39) load the parameters into the central unit and into the bay units. How to analyze faults in the internal protection communication, can be found in Chapter 8.2.4, page 287. A faulty bay unit appears in the alarm list. The alarm list can be called up by pressing the function key F1 on the central unit. After the protection system has run up successfully, the red LED (ERROR) goes out and the green LED (RUN) lights up on the central unit as well as on each connected bay unit.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

251

Installation and Commissioning

7.3

Commissioning

WARNING!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is not handled properly. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. The main points to observe are: The device is to be earthed to the substation earth before any other connections are made. Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged. After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly established before the device is re-energized. The limit values given in Technical Data must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor during commissioning. When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected and that the TRIP command lines and possibly the CLOSE command lines to the circuit breakers are interrupted.

Danger!
The output terminals of the current transformers must be short-circuited on the transformers themselves before the power supply lines to the device are disconnected. Where a test switch is available that short-circuits automatically the output lines of the current transformer, it will be sufficient to set it to Test position, provided that the short-circuiters have been checked in the first place. During the commissioning procedure, switching operations will be carried out. It is assumed for the tests described here that this is possible without danger. Therefore, these tests are not intended for checks during operation

WARNING!
Primary tests may only be carried out by qualified persons who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, with the management of power systems and the relevant safety rules and guidelines (switching, earthing etc.)

252

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

7.3.1

How to Proceed
Note This manual cannot take into account all possible aspects of the commissioning procedure. The responsibility for a successful commissioning lies with the person who performs it. The following sections lead you through the essential steps of the commissioning. We recommend to commission the protection system and all its functions centrally with DIGSI. Note A prerequisite for this is that the plant configuration was made according to Chapter 4.3, page 49. First, put all feeders out of operation (see Chapter 6.4, page 236). Then commission the bay units one by one. In DIGSIthe configuration of the bus bars, the bay types and the transformer data have to be determined in such a way, that they match the plant data. Make the allocations of the binary inputs, relays and LEDs of the central unit according to the settings of your customer. Check the current transformer circuits. The check includes the correct wiring, the polarity the transformation ratio and the position of the earthing. Check the isolator replica. The check includes the correct acquisition of the isolator feedbacks in the bay units and the central unit as well as the correspondence with the plant configuration. It makes sense to perform this check of the binary inputs and the LEDs of the bay units and the central unit (see Chapter 7.3.3, page 262). The check is made in connection with the feeder protection devices, if possible. Check the functions circuit breaker failure protection, releases and additional functions. With the circuit breaker check carry out a function control of the TRIP command and transfer trip contacts of the bay units (see Chapter 6.3.4, page 227). With the circuit breaker check a 1 or 3 pole circuit breaker TRIP command check at the bay units is possible. It is a prerequisite that the set threshold for the feeder current I> MAN TRIP (6316/CU) is not exceeded. Furthermore the functions CB Test L1,L2,L3 (FNo. 7636, 7637, 7637/BU) must be allocated to the trip contacts. To test the annunciation transfer TRIP command allocate, if necessary, one of these functions to the corresponding output relay. Carry out a function check of the information of the central unit (see Chapter 7.3.4, page 266).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

253

Installation and Commissioning

7.3.2

Web Monitor
The Web Monitor makes possible the display of parameters, data and measuring values during installation or during operation. For this it uses Internet technology. The SIPROTEC Web Monitor provides several functions for all devices, the others are available depending on the device. For the 7SS52, this is specific information on the bay units. Among general installation notes, this manual also describes functions of the SIPROTEC Web Monitor which are specific for 7SS52 only. The general functions are available in the Help file on DIGSI-CD (as from version DIGSI V4.60). The display is made by a Web Browser, e.g. Internet Explorer. The Web browser allows, for example, a quicker display of the operational annunciations. The combination data, device data, master data, combination structure and process data can be displayed.

Prerequisites

The Web-Monitor runs on the operator PC and requires only standard software. The following software programs / operating systems must be installed: Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft Windows ME, Microsoft Windows 98 Internet browser: Netscape Communicator Version 4.7, Netscape Communicator Version 6.x or higher, or Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5.0 or higher. Java must be installed and activated. Long-distance data transmission network: The required software component is included in Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 98. This component is only needed if the device is connected through a serial interface. Network adapter: The required software component is integrated into Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 98. This component is only needed when connecting the device via an Ethernet interface (possible for devices with EN100 interface).

7.3.2.1

General During installation, the device parameterization created must be controlled in devices and their functions checked. The Web Monitor supports you during the simple and clear determination and display of important measuring values. Discrepancies in the wiring or the parameterisation can be found and solved quickly. To run the Web-Monitor, a link from the operator PC to the protection device via its front and rear operator interface (service interface) is necessary. This can be made directly by the 9-pole DIGSI cable by means of an existing long-distance data connection. Remote access via a modem is possible as well. An Internet browser must be installed on the operator PC (see paragraph on system requirements). DIGSI 4 is usually installed on the operator PC as well. Please make sure that DIGSI 4 and the Web-Monitor do not use the same operator interface at the same time. A serial simultaneous access would lead to data collisions. This means that either DIGSI 4 OR the Web-Monitor can use a device interface. Before the Web-Monitor is started, DIGSI 4 must be exited or you should at least have finished making the settings and allocations in DIGSI 4. It is possible to simultaneously

254

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

operate DIGSI 4 at the front operator interface via a COM port of the operator PC and the Web-Monitor at a second interface via an other COM port of the operating PC. The Web-Monitor is composed of HTML pages containing Java applets which are stored in the EEPROM of the SIPROTEC 4 device. It is an integral part of the SIPROTEC 4 device firmware and need not be separately installed. All that needs to be created on the operator PC is a long-distance data transmission network used for selection and communication. After the link has been successfully established through the data transmission network, the browser is started and the TCP-IP address of the protection device entered in it. The server address of the device, which is its homepage address, is transmitted to the browser and displayed as an HTML page. This TCPIP address is set at the front and service interface using DIGSI 4, or directly on the device using the integrated operator interface. Note The process can only be monitored. Control the process through the data transmission link is only possible after a control feature has been set up and established. You can, either directly on the device or with DIGSI 4, modify a parameter in such a way that the device control feature contained in the Web-Monitor allows also the input of numerical values. You can then modify in the Web-Monitor parameters which are normally set only directly on the device, because passwords can now be entered from the keyboard.

7.3.2.2

Functions

Basic functionality

The basic functionality designates functions that are generally available, i.e. not
device-dependent. These include: Device operation Annunciations Measured value overview Diagnosis Device file system CFC A function description can be found in the Online Help of DIGSI as from version V4.60. Note The long distance data connection previously set up for the IBS tools can be continued to be used under the same conditions (interface and baud rate). The code word for the link connection is 000000 instead of x. For more help in setting up the long distance data connection refer to www.siprotec.de "Applications" "Tips + Tricks".

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

255

Installation and Commissioning

Figure 7-2 Web-monitor - Basic display

The above figure of the device operation view shows a device connected through the data transmission link with its control (keyboard) and display elements (display, LEDs, inscriptions). The device can be operated with the keys shown in the display in the same way as with the sealed keypad on the device. It is recommended to access via the Web monitor with read only rights. This can be achieved by allowing "Read only" access for the interface through which the Web browser accesses the device. You can receive this parameter in DIGSI via "Interfaces - Operator Interface at the Device" (for access via serial interface) or via "Interfaces Ethernet at the device" (for access via Ethernet interface, refer to the following Figure).

256

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

Figure 7-3 Setting the authorization for the Web Monitor for an access via Ethernet interface

Device-specific functionality

In addition to the general basic functionality, the Web-Monitor for the 7SS52 offers the option of displaying the firmware version of the bay units and for the modules of the central unit. In addition, the HDLC status (HDLC = High Level Data Link Control) of the internal serial interfaces can be called. With the Web monitor you can calle the firmware status of central units (Figure 7-6, page 259) and bay units (Figure 7-7, page 259), call the HDLC status (HDLC = High Level Data Link Control) of the internal serial interfaces (Figure 7-5, page 258), and remotely control the keybord on the operator panel of the central unit (Figure 7-8, page 260) and further functions such as access to the device file system. The access point for the isolator replica files is: \\DISTURBLST for disturbance cases and \\ISOLATORLST for the system and protection view. The measured values of the currently displayed bay units can be stored in the measured value overview. For more details, please refer to the corresponding Online Help. The following figures show some examples. The annunciations from the operational annunciation buffer of the device are displayed in the form of a list here. These annunciations are displayed with their short text stored in the device.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

257

Installation and Commissioning

Figure 7-4 Example for the display of operational annunciations

Figure 7-5 Example for the display of the HDLC status of the internal serial interfaces

258

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

Figure 7-6 Example for the display of the firmware version for the modules of the central unit

Figure 7-7 Example for the display of the firmware version for the modules of the bay units

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

259

Installation and Commissioning

Figure 7-8 Remote control of the central unit

7.3.2.3

Operating Modes The Web-Monitor works in the following operating modes set between the operator PC and the SIPROTEC 4 device:

Direct serial link

Direct link between the device's front or rear service interface and the serial interface of the operator PC. For this link the 9-pin cable must be used that is supplied as an accessory with DIGSI. Serial connection of the rear service port of the device with a modem in the system. This connection can be electrically implemented via RS232 (over short distance) or via fibre optics. The connection to the system modem is established from the office or from any other system using a switched line. DIGSI-Remote can also be carried out using this connection. Thus, parameters of a remote device can also be changed during the installation. Connection between the device's rear service interface and a star coupler using a direct optical link. Connection of the operator PC's serial interface to a star coupler. In

Dial-up donnection through a modem

Operation with a star coupler

260

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

this way several devices can be operated within the system; the existing installation can be used for central operation of protection devices. Operation with Ethernet Link through an Ethernet interface. This type of connection requires an EN100 communication module inside the device, and a connection of that module to a local network. For more information of the basic functionality, the installation and the operating system-specific configuration please refer to the Web-Monitor online help provided on the DIGSI CD. Access regulation for Web Monitor The Web Monitor access rights are assigned with DIGSI using the Interfaces entry. For this purpose, Siemens recommends to allow Read authorization; in doing so, neither the event list can be deleted, nor a command output, nor a saved LED reset via the Web Monitor. The passwod (000000 for read access) can be assigned via DIGSI under the entry "Passwords". The default setting is 000001 for restricted operation. If you specify the Full access level, all these operating actions can also be carried out through the Web Monitor.

Note The stage No access has no effect yet, i.e. the user has complete access.

Note The front operator interface has the IP address http://192.168.1.1 The service interface has the IP address http://192.168.2.1

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

261

Installation and Commissioning

7.3.3

Checking the Switching States of the binary Inputs/Outputs

With DIGSI you can purposeful selectively control individual binary inputs, output relays and LEDs of the central unit and the bay unit. In this way you can check, e.g. during the commissioning, the correct connections to the system.

Danger!
A changing of switching states by means of the test function causes a real change of the operating state at the SIPROTEC device. The switchgear (e.g. circuit breakers) can be switched by this!

7.3.3.1

Central Unit

vom PC mit DIGSI

The hardware test can be made with DIGSI in the operational mode Online: Double-click the directory Online. The operating functions for this device will appear. Click Test. The available functions are displayed on the right. Double-click in the list Test device inputs and outputs. The dialog box with this name is opened (see Figure 7-9, page 263).

Structure of the dialog box

The dialog box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, BO for binary outputs and LED for LEDs. On the left of each group is an accordingly labelled panel. By double-clicking these panels you can show or hide the individual information of the selected group. In the column Actual the current status of the particular hardware component is displayed. by symbols The actual states of the binary inputs and outputs are displayed by the symbol of opened and closed switch contact those of the LEDs by a symbol of an dark or shining LED. The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Nominal. The display is made in plain text. The column on the far right displays commands or annunciations which are allocated to the particular hardware component.

262

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

Figure 7-9 Dialog box devices in/outputs Example

Changing the operating state

To change the operating state of a hardware component, click the corresponding panel in the column Nominal. Before executing the first change of the operating state the password No. 6 is demanded (provided that it has been activated). After entering the correct password, the operating state change is executed. Further state changes remain released until the dialog box is closed.

Testing the output relays

You can energize every single output relay to check the wiring between the output relay of the central unit and the system without having to create the alarm allocated to it. As soon as you have initiated the first state change for any output relay, all output relays are disconnected from the functionality of the device and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that e.g. a TRIP command coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator panel to an output relay cannot be executed. Make sure that the operations initiated by the output relays can be made without any dangers. Test every output relay via the corresponding Nominal box of the dialog box. Finish the tests (see margin title below Finishing the process), so that during further testing no unwanted switching operations are initiated.

Testing the binary inputs

To check the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the central unit, you must create in the plant itself the cause for an external and read out the effect at the device itself. To do so, open the dialog box Test devices in and outputs again to view the physical position of the binary input. The password is not yet necessary. Activate in the plant each of the functions which cause an external trip signal at the binary inputs Check the reaction in the Actual column of the dialog box. To do so you must update the dialog box. You will find the possibilities below under the margin heading Updating the display.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

263

Installation and Commissioning

If you want to check the effects of a binary input without actual switching operations in the plant, you could do so by controlling individual binary inputs with the hardware test. As soon as you have initiated the first state change for any binary input and have entered the password No. 6, all binary inputs are disconnected from the device and can only be operated by the hardware test functions. Finish the testing (see margin heading below Finishing the process). Checking the LEDs You can check the LED in the same way like the other in/output components. As soon as you have initiated the first state change for any LED, all LEDs are disconnected from the functionality of the device and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means e.g.that no LED is illuminated anymore by a protection function or by pressing the LED reset button. During the opening of the dialog box Test devices in and outputs the operating states of the hardware components which are current at this time are read in and displayed. An update is made: for the particular hardware component, if a command for the change on a other state was successful. for all hardware components by clicking the box Update, for all hardware components by cyclic updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) by highlighting the option Automatic Update Finishing the process To finish the process, click Close The dialog box is closed. The hardware components are again reset to the original operating state determined by the plant conditions. The device is not ready for operation for a short time during the following start-up.

Updating the display

Caution!
Executing the commands Reset or Resume will clear all device buffers and Oscillographic Records. Before initial start you may want to back-up the settings and buffer contents by means of the DIGSI Device Configuration (see Chapter 6.2, page 206).

7.3.3.2

Bay Unit With the bay units, the display of their input/output states or the activation/deactivation of relays can be done via DIGSI or via the integrated operation. In the operator tree of the bay units, under the tests, the operator addresses for the test sequence are stated, in the block as of 4700 for the binary inputs and as of 4800 for the relay control. For the binary inputs, the physical states are stated: 0: not activated, 1: activated. There are two operator addresses per relay for controlling the relays one for the activation, e.g. 4801, and one for the deactivation, e.g. 4802. Entering the password F3F1F3F1F3F1 is required for this function.

264

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

Operator address

The binary input states (physical states) are displayed by selecting the corresponding operator address and its confirmation.

4700 STATE OF BINARY INPUTS

Input sequence for determining the state of binary input 1 Physical state: 0: not activated 1: activated

4701 BI1-STATE - SHOW?

E key or J/Y key ->

4701 BI1-STATE 0

Input sequence for determining the state of binary input 2

4702 BI2-STATE - SHOW?

E key or J/Y key ->

4702 BI2-STATE 0

Physical state: 0: not activated 1: activated

The states of the other binary inputs are stated in the operator tree under the addresses 4703 up to 4710 (7SS525) and 4720 (7SS523) respectively. Relay control After having entered the operator address and its confirmation (E key), the password is requested. After having entered the password, the question for the control of the relay appears again. After having confirmed again with the E key, the action is carried out. If a relay could not be deactivated, for example because an annunciation configured to it is active, this is acknowledged with a negative feedback.

4800 CONTROL OF RELAYS

Input sequence for activating trip relay 1

4801 TRIP RELAY1 - SWITCH ON?

Entry of the password

E key ->

ENTER PASSWORD:

Password F3,F1,F3,F1,F3,F1 ->

4801 TRIP RELAY1 - SWITCH ON? 4801 TRIP RELAY1 In the event of a negative SUCCESSFUL feedback: not successful

E key ->

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

265

Installation and Commissioning

Input sequence for deactivating trip relay 1

4802 TRIP RELAY1 - DEACTIVATE?

Entry of the password

E key ->

ENTER PASSWORD:

Password F3,F1,F3,F1,F3,F1 ->

4802 TRIP RELAY1 - DEACTIVATE? 4802 TRIP RELAY1 In the event of a negative SUCCESSFUL feedback: not successful

E key ->

The operator addresses for the control of the other relays are stored on the subsequent addresses. In the case of an operation via the membrane keyboard, a once entered password is memorized until the address block is left. In the case of an operation via DIGSI, the password has to be entered again for each control action (relay on or off).

7.3.4

Testing the System Port

If the device has a system port and uses this for communicating with a control center, you can test with the DIGSI device operation whether indications are correctly transmitted. You must avoid to use this test possibility during live operation.

Preliminary remarks

Danger!
The sending or receiving of annunciations via the system port by means of the test function is a real information exchange between SIPROTEC and the control center. This information would execute the corresponding functions (e.g. follow-up commands) in the control center. The port test is made in the DIGSI mode Online: Double-click the directory Online. The operating functions for this device will appear. Click Test. In the right pane of the picture the available functions appear. Double-click in the list Generate Indications. The dialog box Generate Indications is opened (see Figure 7-10, page 267).

266

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

Structure of the dialog box

In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system port in the matrix. In the column Setpoint status you determine a value for the indications that shall be tested. Depending on each indication type for this several input boxes are offered (e.g. ON / OFF). By clicking on one of the buttons you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.

Figure 7-10 Dialog box Testing the system port Example

Changing the operating state

By clicking one of the buttons in the column Action you will be asked for the password No. 6 (for hardware test menus) After you have entered the password correctly you now can send the indications individually. For this, click the button Send in the corresponding line. The corresponding indication is now sent and can be read out both in the operational events of the SIPROTEC device and in the control center of the plant. Further tests remain released until the dialog box is closed.

Test in alarm direction

For all information to be transmitted to the control center, test the offered possibilities in the pull-down menu under Setpoint status. Make sure that the switching operations which may be caused by the tests, can be made without any dangers. Click in the function to be tested send and check whether the corresponding information reaches the control center and possibly shows the expected effect.

Finishing the process

To finish the test of the system port click Close. The dialog box is closed, the device is not ready for operation during the following start-up

Caution!
Executing the commands Reset or Resume will clear all device buffers and Oscillographic Records. Before initial start you may want to back-up the settings and buffer contents by means of the DIGSI Device Configuration (see Chapter 6.2, page 206).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

267

Installation and Commissioning

Test in alarm direction

Information in alarm direction must be given by the control center. The correct reaction in the device has to be checked.

7.3.5

Control of the Isolator Replica

For test purposes, the isolator positions of all available feeders can be preset independent of the state of the binary inputs. For this purpose, the system is to be set to test mode via DIGSI. At the beginning of the test mode, the actual binary input positions of the isolator apply. The setting of the isolator position during the test mode is made in the dialog box "Generate indications" as desired. The following isolator status indications can be generated and transmitted to the protection device: OPEN position CLOSED position

Figure 7-11 Isolator status indications

268

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Commissioning

7.3.6

Switching the Test Mode and the Transmission Block On and OFF.
If the central unit is linked to a central control or storage facility you can influence in some of the available protocols the information which are transmitted to the control center (see table Protocol Dependent Functions in the Appendix). When the test Test mode is switched on, the annunciations sent by a SIPROTEC4 device to the control center are marked with an additional test bit, so that they can be recognized as not being annunciations of real faults. Furthermore it can be determined by activating the Transmission block that no annunciations at all are transmitted via the system port during a test mode. Please pay attention that in DIGSI Device Configuration the operating mode Online is the prerequisite for the use of these test functions. Moreover, the command output is blocked via relays during the test mode depending on the parameter OutEn BU-TEST (5112A/CU) - or not. To switch on the test mode click in the menu bar DIGSI Device Configuration Device Test mode. To activate the transmission block click in the menu bar DIGSI Device Configuration Device Transmission Block.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

269

Installation and Commissioning

7.4
7.4.1

Checks With Secondary Values

General
The operational preparations according to Chapter 7.2, page 251 must be completed.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is not handled properly. Only qualified personnel may work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. The main points to observe are: The device is to be earthed to the substation earth before any other connections are made. Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged. The limit values given in Chapter 9, page 301 Technical Data, must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor during commissioning.

DANGER!
The output terminals of the current transformers must be short-circuited on the transformers themselves before the power supply lines to the bay unit are disconnected. Where a test switch is available that short-circuits automatically the output lines of the current transformer, it will be sufficient to set it to Test position, provided that the short-circuiters have been checked in the first place. It is recommended to make the checks with secondary values at the current settings for the protection system. If these are not available make the checks with the default values (Chapter 5, page 91). For the following descriptions of the checks the default values are the basis if not noted differently. As far as it is necessary, for other setting values formulas are given. Because of the phase-selective measuring principle for the testing two 1-phase, separately controllable current sources are sufficient.

270

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Checks With Secondary Values

Note The measuring accuracy depends on the electric data of the test source used. The accuracy given in Chapter 9, page 301 Technical data Test can only be expected when following the reference conditions corresponding to DIN VDE 0435/Teil 303 or IEC 255 and using precision measuring instruments. During all checks it is important that the corresponding annunciations are for remote signaling transmitted to the LEDs and are passed on via the alarm relays. Before you start the checks with the secondary values: Read out the isolator replica with DIGSI Plant Visualization. The output corresponds to the plant status. Check whether the assignment of the switching devices in the plant visualization is correct.

7.4.2

Trip Characteristic of the Busbar Protection

Connect the test currents directly to the measuring inputs of the bay units. Depending on the model the rated current of the bay unit is 1 A or. 5 A. The test setup for the zone-selective protection is shown in Figure 7-12, page 272. By the TRIP commands of the feeders the test equipment is switched off. The test setup for the check zone is shown in Figure 7-14, page 274. When the bus selectivity is checked switch one or more bays on a second bus (possibly by a feeder position simulation)

7.4.2.1

busbar-selective Protection To check the busbar-selective protection the check zone must be set more sensitive than the bus -zone selective protection. By this, the release of the check zone is granted before the release of the busbar-selective protection.

Example

You can set the Trip characteristic for the busbar-selective protection shall be set with the parameters Id> BZ (6102/CU) = 2,0 Ino and the stabilizing factor STAB FAC:BZ (6101/CU) = 0,8. For the check zone the parameters for the differential current threshold is assumed to be set Id> CZ (6104/CU) to 0,5 Ino and the stabilizing factor STAB FAC:CZ (6103/ CU) to 0,5.

Test setup

For the test use 2 bays (no sectionalizers, no bus couplers) with the same normalization factor (CT-transformation ratio). Connect both bays to the same busbar.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

271

Installation and Commissioning

1 For testing the diff-current limit for supervisory function (refer to Chapter 7.3.3, page 262) Figure 7-12 Test setup for the trip characteristic of the busbar-selective measuring system

Test steps

To prevent that the differential current supervision from blocking the protection during the test switch it off with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU). Set the differential current threshold and the stabilization factor for the busbar-selective protection and the check zone as desired. Set the parameters I>TRIP (XX13/CU) for the overcurrent thresholds for the affected bays to 0. The test currents I1 and I2 must have a phase displacement of 180. To find out the phase angle, check the feeders 1 and 2 each with the same current (0.5 IN). Note The percentages of the differential and stabilization currents refer to the rated CT current of the basic transformer. The percentages of the feeders refer to the transformerrated value of the particular feeder. If the same percentages are displayed this does not mean necessarily that the same current is flowing in the concerned feeders. If the connection is correct the differential current must be nearly zero and the stabilization current must be the double of the supply current. If the differential current in not zero, check the connection. If that is correct reverse the polarity in a feeder. If the current I2 is zero, then increase the current I1 for so long until a TRIP command is output. The current in the feeder must correspond to the differential current threshold set in the parameter Id> BZ (6102/CU). Apply a constant current I1 which is smaller than the set differential current threshold to the feeder 1 from the test setup Increase the current I2 in feeder 2 slowly until the protection trips. The following fomulas are valid: Differential current Id = | I1 + I2 | Stabilizing current Is = | I1 | + | I2 | Stabilizing factor k = Id / Is = | I1 + I2 | / (| I1 | + | I2 |)

272

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Checks With Secondary Values

On the trip characteristic is valid | I2 I1 | = k [| I1 | + | I2 |] Because the currents I1 and I2 have a phase displacement of 180, you have I2 (1 k) = I1 (1 + k) or. I2 = I1 (1 + k) / (1 k) and I2 = 9 I1, if k = 0,8 Repeat the checking with a different constant current I1. The Trip characteristic graph is shown in Figure 7-13, page 273. After the checking, switch on the differential current supervision again with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU).

Figure 7-13 Trip characteristic of the busbar protection

7.4.2.2

Check Zone Alternatively, the decision to trigger by the checkzone can be requested via the message "Trip L1 CZ" (FNo. 10457 to 10459/CU) as a phase selection. This enables a check which is independent of the selected bus protection.

Example

You want to set the trip characteristic for the check zone with the parameters for the differential current threshold Id> CZ (6104/CU) = 2,0 Ino and the stabilizing factor STAB FAC:CZ (6103/CU) = 0.8. You want to set the busbar-selective protection the parameters Id> BZ (6102/CU) to 0,5 Ino and the stabilizing factor STAB FAC:BZ (6101/CU) to 0.5.

Test setup

For the test setup use three bays with the same normalizing factor. Sectionalizers, or bus couplers must not be used for testing. Connect the bays 1 and 2 to the same bus zone. Connect the current inputs of these bay units back to back (see Figure 7-14, page 274). Connect bay 3 to a different bus.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

273

Installation and Commissioning

Figure 7-14 Test setup for the trip characteristic of the check zone.

Test steps

Prevent the differential current supervision from blocking the protection during the tests switch it off with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU). Set the differential current threshold and the stabilization factor for the busbar-selective protection and the check zone as desired. Set the parameters I>TRIP (XX13/CU) for the overcurrent limits for the affected bays to 0. The test current I1 in bay unit 1 and 2 must have a phase shift of 180. To find out the phase angle, check the feeders 1 and 2 each with the same current (0,5 IN). If the connection is correct the differential current of the bus zone must be nearly zero and the stabilization current must be the double of the supply current. If the differential current is not zero, reverse the polarity in a feeder. If the current I1 is zero, increase the current I2 until the annunciation Trip L1 CZ to Trip L3 CZ (FNo. 10457 to 10459/CU) is output by the measuring system which is assigned to bay 3. The current I2 must correspond to the differential current threshold set in the parameter Id> CZ (6104/CU). Apply to the bays 1 and 2 of the test setup with a constant current I1. Increase the current I2 in bay 3 slowly until the protection trips. The differential current is then I2 and the stabilizing current I1 (Chapter 5.2, page 111). The stabilizing factor k is then equal to the ratio of I2 to I1. Repeat the test with different constant currents I1. The trip characteristic graph is shown in Figure 7-13, page 273.

274

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Checks With Secondary Values

7.4.3
7.4.3.1

Differential Current Monitoring

busbar-selective Protection To check the busbar-selective protection, the busbar-selective protection must be set more sensitive than the check zone so that the supervision of the differential current of the check zone picks up later.

Example

You want to test the supervision for the busbar-selective protection with the parameters for the differential current threshold Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU) = 0.2 I/Ino and the delay time (6307/CU) = 2.0 s. For the check zone the parameter for the differential current threshold Id> SUPERV CZ (6309/CU)is assumed to be set to 0,8 I/Ino.

Test setup Test steps

Arrange the test setup as in Chapter 7.4.2, page 271. To make the differential current supervision block the protection, set it with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU) to On. Set the parameters for the differential current threshold Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU) and the delay time T-Idiff SUPERV (6307/CU) as desired. Set the parameters for the overcurrent thresholds I>TRIP (XX13/CU) for the concerned bays to 0. If the parameter DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU) is set to block, carry out the following 3 steps: Connect the bays 1 and 2 to different bus zones. Increase the current I1 in feeder 1 slowly until the annunciation of the differential current supervision signals that it has picked up. The current must correspond to the pickup threshold set in parameter Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU). Now the bus is blocked. Even if I1 is further increased, there is no tripping. Apply to feeder 2 a current 4 times as high as the rated current IN. The protection system now switches off the current in feeder 2. The last 2 test steps guarantee that the supervision of the differential current is busbar-selective. If the parameter DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU) is set to alarm only without protectionblocking, carry out the following 3 steps: Connect the bays 1 and 2 to the same bus zone. Increase the current I1 in feeder 1 slowly until the differential current signals that it has picked up. The current must corespond to the set pickup threshold in parameter Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU). Apply to feeder 2 a current 4 times as high as the rated current IN. By doing this the protection system now switches off the current in the feeders 1 and 2.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

275

Installation and Commissioning

7.4.3.2

Check Zone To test the check zone, the check zone must be set more selective than the busbarselective protection so that the supervision of the check zone picks up earlier.

Example

You want to test the supervision of the check zone with the parameters for the differential current threshold Id> SUPERV CZ (6309/CU) = 0,2 I/Ino and the delay time T-Idiff SUPERV (6307/CU) = 2,0 s. For the busbar-selective protection the parameter Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU) is assumed to be set to 0,8 I/Ino. Arrange the test setup as in Chapter 7.4.2, page 271. Check of the pickup threshold and the delay time: Increase the current in feeder 1 slowly until the check zone supervision picks up. The measured current must correspond to the set current Id> SUPERV CZ (6309/CU). Carry out a time measuring as in Chapter 7.4.3.3, page 276 Checking the blocking: The reaction of the protection when the differential current supervision of the check zone picks up can be set with the parameter DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) to blocking or to only indicate (without protective blocking). Connect the bays 1 and 2 to the same bus zone. Increase the current in feeder 1 slowly until the supervision of the check zone picks up. Apply to feeder 2 a current 4 times as high as the rated current IN. If the parameter is set DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) to blocking, no TRIP commands follow.

Test setup Test steps

7.4.3.3

Time Delay Time measuring is possible with the standard test equipment for protection devices. To measure the delay time for the differential current supervision, apply to feeder 1 through the testing device twice the current set in the parameter differential current threshold Id> SUPERV BZ (6308/CU). As soon as the differential current supervision picks up, the test current source is switched off. The measured time corresponds to the set delay time in parameter TIdiff SUPERV (6307/CU).

276

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Checks With Secondary Values

7.4.4
Example

Overcurrent Threshold Tripping

For two feeders the overcurrent limit shall be checked which is set in parameter I>TRIP (XX13/CU). Arrange the test setup as in Chapter 7.4.2, page 271. To prevent the differential current supervision from blocking the protection during the test switch it off with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU). Set the differential current thresholds for the busbar-selective measuring system and for the check zone with the parameters Id> BZ (6102/CU) and Id> CZ (6104/CU) to 1,0 I/Ino. Set the overcurrent threshold with the parameter I>TRIP (XX13/CU) for feeder 1 to 2,0 I/In and for the feeder 2 to 0,0 I/In. Set the isolators so that bay 1 and 2 are connected to the same bus zone Increase the current in feeder 1 slowly with the test equipment. At 1 Ino bay unit 2 must output a TRIP command, because the overcurrent threshold for this feeder is set to 0,0 I/In. Bay unit 1 must output a TRIP command at 2 IN.

Test setup Test steps

7.4.5
7.4.5.1 Example

Breaker Failure Protection

Trip Characteristic for Operating Mode Unbalancing The trip characteristic is assumed to be characterized by the parameters I> BF (XX18/CU) = 0,5 I/IN for the differential current threshold STAB FAC:BF (6201/CU) = 0,5 for the stabilizing factor. The test setup is shown in Figure 7-15, page 277.

Test setup

Figure 7-15 Test setup for the trip characteristic of the breaker failure protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

277

Installation and Commissioning

Test steps

To prevent the differential current supervision from blocking the protection during checking switch it off with the parameter DIFF SUPERV (6306/CU). Set the supervision of the breaker failure protection triggering inputs with the parameter BF BI MODE (XX14/CU) to 1-ch w/o sup or 2-ch w/o sup. Configure the feeder-selective parameter to BF OP MODE (XX15/CU) BZ unbalance. Set the parameters for the differential current threshold I> BF (XX18/CU) and the stabilizing factor STAB FAC:BF (6201/CU) to the desired value. Set the isolators so that bay 1 and 2 are connected to the same bus zone. The test currents I1 and I2 must have a phase displacement of 180. To find out the phase angle, check the feeders 1 and 2 each with the same current (0,5 IN). If the differential current is not zero reverse the polarity in a feeder. Apply to the bays 1 and 2 though the test equipment a constant current I1. After the start by the feeder protection (TRIP command) in feeder 2 the protection system permanently unbalances the measuring value of feeder 2. If the connection is correct there must be a differential current and the stabilizing current must be twice the supply current. Slowly increase the current in feeder 2 until the protection trips. The differential current must then be | I1 + I2 | and the stabilizing current must be | I1 | + | I2 |. The stabilizing factor must be the ratio of differential current to stabilizing current k = | I1 + I2 | / | I1 | + | I2 |.

7.4.5.2

Delay Time at Operating Mode Unbalancing and I>Query The test setup for the measuring of the time delay is shown in Figure 7-15, page 277. Set the two feeders to the same normalizing factor i.e.to the same CT transformation ratio. Set the CT polarity in such a way that the current flow (approx. 2 IN) before the unbalancing corresponds to an external short-circuit (flowing through current). The differential current is approx. zero. Apply for the test to one bay unit twice the current set in parameter I> BF (XX18/ CU). Simulate the TRIP command from the feeder protection for feeder 2 and start the time measuring. Stop the time measuring device with the TRIP command of the busbar protection. The value displayed by the measuring device corresponds to the set delay time plus the tripping time of the protection.

Test setup Test steps

7.4.6

Finishing the Tests with Secondary Values.

Remove all devices for the tests with secondary values and re-establish the original status (switching off the test switch,...).

278

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Checks With Primary Values

7.5

Checks With Primary Values

The operational preparations according to Chapter 7.4, page 270 must be completed.

Warning!
Primary tests may only be carried out by qualified persons who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, with the management of power systems and the relevant safety rules and guidelines (switching, earthing etc.) Switch on the primary values.

7.5.1

Transformer Polarity
To check the polarity of a current transformer you will need an operating current of at least 10% the rated current. If the operation current is not sufficient, use test equipment for primary values.

Test steps

Read out the isolator replica with DIGSI plant visualization. The output corresponds to the plant status. Set all feeders with the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU), (4500/BU), via the binary inputs of the bay units or easier locally at the operator panel with the function key F1 out of service. If the protection works correctly, the differential current for the module ZPS-BSZ2 must be nearly zero. Additionally the module ZPS-BSZ1 (check zone) shows the current differential, because putting the feeders out of operation does not influence the module ZPS-BSZ1. In the bay units the differential and stabilizing currents of the check zone are displayed as well. Bus couplers display the currents of the adjacent bus zone on the left. By this the transformer polarity can be checked locally at the bay units. Put one feeder into service (F1). Read out the differential and stabilizing currents with DIGSI Plant Visualization or the measured value window with DIGSI. The result corresponds to the product of feeder current and normalizing factor (CT transformation ratio). Otherwise you have to check whether the CT transformation ratio is correct. Set the feeder out of service. Repeat the previous step for each feeder. After that put all feeders out of service. Put the feeder with the highest current at the busbar into service and note down the differential current of the module ZPS-BSZ2. Put the feeder with the next lower current at the busbar into service. If the polarity is correct, the load direction corresponds to the load direction of the next higher current. The differential current must increase. If the load direction is reversed, check the configuration and the connections of the transformer. Repeat the previous step until all feeders at the busbar have been put into operation.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

279

Installation and Commissioning

Repeat the last 3 steps for all configured busbars. At the end of the measurements the differential current must be nearly zero. Read out the differential and stabilizing currents of module ZPS-BSZ1 with DIGSI Plant Visualization or the measured value window with DIGSI. The differential current must be nearly zero and the stabilizing current must be the sum of all currents. If the plant conditions allow it, make a busbar coupling via the bus coupler bay. Then check the polarity of the transformers in the bus coupler bay again. Transformer polarity reversal The polarity of a feeder's transformer can be reversed for test purposes via a configuration in DIGSI. The corresponding operating address 4601 CT-POLARITY can be reached via the arrow keys in the test settings or simply by pressing the F4 function key. Entering the password F3F1F3F1F3F1 is required for this function. After its confirmation, the three phase currents and the earth current are transmitted to the central unit with inverted signs. The annunciations "TF RevPol $00" (FNo. 176.1195/CU) for the corresponding bay unit and the group annunciation "TF RevPol M" (FNo. 10451/CU) are reported as ON in the central unit and in the bay unit. In the bay unit, "Fail MV.Offs." (FNo. 7652/BU) is reported as ON. The inversion of the currents is done until the process is undone again. Then, the annunciations TF RevPol $00 (FNo. 176.1195/CU) and the group annunciation TF RevPol $00 in the central unit and the annunciations "Fail MV.Offs" (FNo. 7652/BU), "CT inversion" (FNo. 7656/BU) and "BB TRIP block" (FNo. 7657/BU) in the bay unit are reported as OFF. The transformer polarity reversal is reset when the bay unit is restarted.

7.6

Final Check of the Protection

To finally check the protection, carry out the following steps: In case the parameters had been changed during the testing check their settings again. The green LED (RUN) at the central unit must shine green. The red Error LED must not be lit. The TRIP commands must be switched conductive. If there is a switch available with test and operation position, switch it to the position operation.

280

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Maintenance and Repair

This chapter is intended both for personnel in charge of operation and for protection engineers. The chapter tells you how to analyze malfunctions of the device, and describes the maintenance and repair procedures that are required to ensure the functioning of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 protection system.

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4

Maintenance Fault Analysis Troubleshooting Repair

282 284 290 293

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

281

Maintenance and Repair

8.1

Maintenance Warning!
Before executing tests or maintenance works it has to be ensured that there arises no danger for personnel and that the tests do not influence station components which are in service.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is not handled properly. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment. after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. The main points to observe are: The device is to be earthed to the substation earth before any other connections are made. Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged. The limit values given in Chapter 9, page 301 Technical Data, must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor during commissioning.

Danger!
The output terminals of the current transformers must be short-circuited before the power supply lines to the bay unit are disconnected. Where a test switch is available that short-circuits automatically the output lines of the current transformer, it will be sufficient to set it to Test position, provided that the short-circuiters have been checked in the first place. All measuring and signal processing circuits of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection are provided with electronic components which do not require any maintenance. As the protection is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs up to the coils of the trip relays, device faults are automatically annunciated This provides for a high degree of availability of the protection system. Maintenance tests at short intervals therefore become superfluous. The following tests are recommended in intervals of about 5 years: To check all measuring circuits with regard to the accuracy requirements, inject test currents into each bay unit, their magnitude lying in the nominal current range (selected between 0.8 and 1.2 IN). Make sure not to feed in any currents that might lead to an inadvertent tripping. Feeding in higher currents is not necessary since the complete dynamic range is monitored via internal tests. To monitor the magnitude of the injected current value, you can read the bay current at the central unit or the bay unit. A tolerance of up to 5 % is permissible.

282

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Maintenance

If you want to take additional precautionary measures to prevent the protection from tripping due to an operator mistake, the 7SS52 V4 offers you the following options: Set the operator menu Control Taggings Set Trip Blocking on the central unit to ON for as long as test currents are applied. In this operating state of the protection system, you can check ist measured values and annunciations without risk of a spurious trip. You can also set in the operator menu of the central unit Parameter BU BUXX the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) of bay XX to out of service - on the bay unit you do the same with the function key F1. Check the measured values and annunciations of the bay unit. Check the trip circuits of each bay unit with the ancillary function Circuit breaker test (Chapter 6.3.4, page 227). Check the function of the binary inputs in the bay units and the central unit. To do so, simulate both states of the binary inputs. The reaction of the protection to the selected input signal can be analysed via the LED indications or by means of the contents in the operations or fault event memories. Check the alarm outputs. The functional check of the alarm relays and of the LEDs of the central unit is supported by the DIGSI communication software. Check the bay unit outputs. The functional check of the command and alarm outputs is supported by the local operation and the DIGSI operating program.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

283

Maintenance and Repair

8.2

Fault Analysis
Disturbances of digital protection devices are in most cases caused by component failures. Practical experience also shows that environmental conditions may in few cases initiate failure alarm. Such environmental conditions can be e.g. short electromagnetic interference beyond the values guaranteed by the manufacturer. If the protection system or ist components are continuously disturbed, the green LED (RUN) goes out, the red LED (ERROR) lights up and the "Device operative / healthy" (FNo. 51/FE) alarm relay drops off. In the event of a continuous disturbance, the protection system or its components are blocked to avoid overfunction. In the event of a failure in one bay unit or in the transmission link between one bay unit and the central unit, the availability of the intact system can be ensured by setting the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU) to zone/phase. The disturbance can be caused by: Failures in the central unit (Failure or defect in the auxiliary voltage supply, module failure) Failures in one of the connected bay units (interruption of the power supply, defective measuring circuit, module failure) Interruption of the communication link to one of the bay units (defective transmission or reception modules, interrupted FO link, increased number of transmission errors) The protection system provides the following diagnostic information to support the user in a systematic analysis of the causes for the disturbance: Central unit operational event buffer fault event buffer operational events marshalled to LEDs LED indications on the modules Bay unit operational events marshalled to LEDs operational event buffer

8.2.1

Evaluation of Operational Events

The central unit's operational events provide first hand information about the cause of a registered device failure. If operational events which have been marshalled to LEDs are missing, you should interrogate immediately the operational event buffer in the central unit. You will get there information about: auxiliary voltage failure pick-up of the differential current supervision errors in the measured value supervision of the bay units and failure detection by the cyclic test

284

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Fault Analysis

If failures are detected in the bay unit, they are indicated with their bay number. It is then possible to locate the failure more precisely within the bay. Operational events which support identification of a failure are e.g.: Disturbance of the power supply Failure detection by the measured value supervision

8.2.2

Checking the Auxiliary Voltage Supply

The alarm of auxiliary voltage failure in the protection device can be caused by a device failure as well as by disturbances in the external wiring. It should be checked whether: the auxiliary voltage can be measured with adequate magnitude and correct polarity. the ON/OFF switch for the integrated converter is in ON position (this switch can be found on the front panel of the bay unit 7SS523 or behind the front panel of the central unit). the modules are correctly fitted and locked. the fuses in the power supply section of the central unit (module SV) or the bay unit (module SAF or SVW ) have not blown. You will find an explanation of the LED indication of the power supply module in the central unit in Chapter 8.2.3, page 285.

8.2.3

Checking the LEDs on the Modules

The processor modules ZPS-SBK, ZPS-BSZ, ZPS-SK in the central unit and the power supply (module SV) are equipped with LED indications which are only visible after opening the front panel of the central unit.

Warning!
For testing and commissioning, the ruling safety regulations for working in highvoltage installations have to be obeyed. The following inspection steps are performed in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements and precautionary measures may perform these steps. 5 LEDs are located vertically on the central processor modules (ZPS). Here is a description of what their indications mean.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

285

Maintenance and Repair

Module ZPS-SBK

Table 8-1

LEDs of the ZPS-SBK module LEDs Status

RED H1 o

GREEN YELLOW1 YELLOW2 YELLOW3 H1 H2 H3 H4 o Operational status Failure status (diagnosis by means of fault buffer required)

o bright dark

dim flashing

On detecting a system failure, the protection system is reset. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 3 second window of time, the device automatically removes itself from service and indicates the failure by the alarm relay Device failure. This is indicated on the ZPS-SBK by flashing of the 3rd yellow LED (H4). The cause for the failure which blocked the protection can be read from the fault event buffer (Chapter 8.2.1, page 284). Module ZPS-SBK
Table 8-2 LEDs of the ZPS-BSZ module LEDs RED H1 o o GREEN YELLOW1 YELLOW2 YELLOW3 H1 H2 H3 H4 o o Operational status Failure status Start-up not completed successfully (diagnosis by means of fault buffer required) Status

o bright dark

dim flashing

Module ZPS-SK

Table 8-3

LEDs of the ZPS-SK module LEDs Status

RED H1 o

GREEN YELLOW1 YELLOW2 YELLOW3 H1 H2 H3 H4 o o Fault-free cyclic process Failure of one bay unit or one channel Failure of the SK module

o o bright dark

dim flashing

286

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Fault Analysis

The green LED shines when the module is running without faults. The red LED is lit in the event of a module failure. In the event of failure of a configured bay, but normal function of the module, the green LED flashes in addition to the shining red LED. Reset of the ZPS modules To reset a central processor module (ZPS): Press the pushbutton S5 on the module. The button is located below the LEDs (Figure A-7, page 340). When you reset the ZPS-SBK module, the central unit is restarted, and the setting parameters related to the bay units are updated.

SV module

Table 8-4

LEDs of the SV module Colour Green Green Green Green Green Green Function Auxiliary voltage for supply of the processor modules and for the alarm relay device failure Auxiliary voltage not used for the central unit Auxiliary voltage exclusively for contrast control of the LC display Alarm relay voltage Auxiliary voltage not used for the central unit Alarm relay voltage

LED designation +5V + 15 V 15 V + 15 V 15 V + 24 V

LED ON means that the corresponding auxiliary voltage is available. If the LED indication fails completely, check the auxiliary voltage supply (Chapter 8.2.2, page 285), replace the fine-wire fuse (Chapter 8.4.2, page 297).

8.2.4

Analysis of Internal Communication Failures

The following components of the protection participate in the protection-internal fast data transmission (Figure 8-1, page 287):

Figure 8-1 Components for data transmission

If the protection system is blocked, the cause may be a failure in the communication system, or in a bay unit. The faulty bay is shown in the alarm list which can be called up by pressing the function key F1 on the central unit.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

287

Maintenance and Repair

The following measures allow to locate the failure. General measures If the substation is operating and the control voltage for the trip circuits of the circuit breakers is on, the intact portion of the protection system can remain available until the failure is eliminated. For this purpose, set the parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU) to zone/phase. The protection processing remains active for all zones which are not affected by the failure. Tripping is enabled by the check zone. As a result, the functioning of the faulty bay is suspended (Chapter 5.5.1, page 139). Set the parameter Bay status (XX12/CU) to out of service to take the faulty bay out of service. The protection function is now active again for all zones. The faulty bay unit no longer appears in the alarm list of the central unit. Test mode of the SK module To further locate the failure, switch the ZPS-SK module to test mode. The protection processing is the same as in normal mode, but more tolerant to errors. In test mode, the LEDs on the ZPS-SK module have more options for indicating information. The LEDs are visible after opening the front panel of the central unit. One red flashing LED per ZPS-SK module indicates that the ZPS-SK module is in test mode. One green and three yellow LED indicate the disturbed duplex channel with the highest channel number according to Table 8-5, page 288. A flashing greed LED indicated that at least one duplex channel on the ZPS-SK module is faulty.
Table 8-5 LEDs of the ZPS-SK module in SK test mode LEDs RED H1 o bright dark GREEN YELLOW1 YELLOW2 YELLOW3 H1 H2 H3 H4 o o o o o dim flashing o o o o o o o o no failure Failure in channel 0, bay 1 Failure in channel 1, bay 2 Failure in channel 2, bay 3 Failure in channel 3, bay 4 Failure in channel 4, bay 5 Failure in channel 5, bay 6 Failure in channel 6, bay 7 Failure in channel 7, bay 8 Status

There are two ways for activating the test mode on the ZPS-SK module. The first is to activate the test mode with the DIGSI communication software: Open the central unit in the DIGSI Manager. Double-click in the navigation window of the DIGSI Device Configuration the folder Online. This will open the directory containing the operating functions of the device (see Figure 6-1, page 207). Click Parameters. The function selection now shows the groups of parameters. Double-click Parametergruppe. You will now see the Parameter Group window. Double-click the function Schutz allgemein. You will now see the Schutz allgemein Parametergruppe A window.

288

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Fault Analysis

Check the checkbox Weitere Parameter anzeigen. In parameter Test mode for module SK (5108A/CU), click the column Wert. You will now see a list of setting options. Click On in the list and then OK. The second way describes how the test mode is activated by the hardware: Set jumper X34 on the ZPS-SK module to on. For the location of the jumper on the board, and the jumper settings of the ZPS-SK module, please refer to Chapter A.4.1, page 340. Reset the device by switching the auxiliary voltage off and on again. Testing the fiber-optic cables To further locate the failure, test the affected duplex channel by shorting it with a fiberoptic cable between the transmitter and the receiver. A short FO cable is included in the delivery of the central unit. If the substation is operating and the control voltage for the TRIP circuits is on, an additional safeguard against spurious tripping must be provided by setting the marking TRIP commands blocking to on (see Chapter 6.3.2.1, page 219). Short the affected duplex channel with a fiber-optic cable between the transmitter and the receiver. You can short as many duplex channels as you like. If the failure disappears after installing the fiber-optic cable, the signal path, including the LMZ converter module, is healthy. Remove the fiber-optic cable which connects the transmitter and the receiver of the channel you have just checked. Reconnect the fiber-optic cables running to the bay unit. Connect the fiber-optic cables on the bay unit using a fiber-optic coupler. This coupler is included in the delivery of the central unit. It allows you to check transmission paths with a length of up to 750 m. After completion of the test, remove the jumper from the ZPS-SK module and reestablish the old settings. If the test of the fiber-optic cables has been successful as well, the cause of the disturbed channel is very probably a defect on the bay unit. Try to replace the bay unit by a different one. Testing the FO interface The functionality of the FO interface can be tested. Before carrying out test, the FO connection to the central unit must be disconnected and at the bay unit, the receiver must be bridged with the transmitter via an optical fibre. The test function of the bay unit can be started via the membrane keypad or with DIGSI. 4100 TEST OF COM MUNICAT.INTERFAC The test takes approx. 10 s. Afterwards, the fault rate is displayed (in %). After the test, the jumper must be replaced with the correct optical fibre again.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

289

Maintenance and Repair

8.3

Troubleshooting
If the device indicates a defect, the following procedure is recommended: If none of the LEDs on the front panel of the device is on, then check: Are the modules inserted in the correct slots and locked by the front cover? Are the connectors of the ribbon cables on the modules plugged in and their locks latched? Can the auxiliary voltage be measured with adequate magnitude and correct polarity at the terminals (see overview diagrams in the Chapter A.3, page 334)? Is the mini-fuse in the power supply section intact (Figure 8-8, page 298 and Figure 8-9, page 299)? Replace the fuse if necessary (Chapter 8.4.2, page 297). If the red fault indicator LED is on and the green ready LED remains dark, you can try to restart the device by switching the auxiliary voltage off and on again (Chapter 6.3.6, page 230). If the display shows the Monitor mode (Figure 8-2, page 290), you can re-initalize the device with DIGSI:

MONITOR 01/05 --------------------Equipment data > 1 User interface > 2 System I-face > 3 Reset > 4 Siemens intern > 5 Figure 8-2 Monitor mode shown in the device display

Connect the serial port of your PC with the PC port of the central unit, and start DIGSI. Select in the menu bar under Device the option Initialize Device (Figure 8-3, page 290).

Figure 8-3 Initializing the device with DIGSI Example

290

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Troubleshooting

Enter password No. 7 for the parameter set. The text in the device display disappears for a moment. After successful initialization, the LED indicate normal operation again, and the default image is shown in the display. The devicespecific settings have been reloaded into the device, provided that they were saved on the PC during commissioning. The device is now ready for operation. Reading out the fault buffer of the CU In order to read out the fault buffer file of the CU (ErrorBuf.txt) in the 7SS52, please proceed as follows: In the DIGSI manager, with the 7SS52 device symbol selected, select Read out process data via the pop-up menu (right mouse button). For this, the central device must be connected with the PC, e.g. via a DIGSI cable. Then, please select and confirm the interface used. Note Please use original cables only.

The data are stored in a folder called "Diagnosis". The exact name for the "Path" is stored in the tab "System management" of the device properties. You may select the content of "Path", copy it and insert it in the Explorer address line. Note For further information on this and on other topics, please visit us on the Internet under our hompage WWW.SIPROTEC.DE - FAQs. Further support If the above measures are not successful, please contact our hotline. Please have the following data ready: the complete ordering information (MLFB) of the device, the serial number of the device, the version of the implemented protection firmware, the boot system version. This information can be read out in the display when the device is operational. To access the appropriate submenu, select MAIN MENU Settings Setup/Extras MLFB/Version. The ordering information (MLFB) and the serial number can also be found on the nameplate sticker on the device housing. This data can also be read from the file created for the device in DIGSI, as shown in Figure 8-4, page 292. Select in offline mode in the menu bar from File the option Properties. The desired information is then shown on the Device tab.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

291

Maintenance and Repair

Figure 8-4 Reading out device information in DIGSI Example

292

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Repair

8.4

Repair
Siemens strongly recommends to refrain from repairing units or modules, because they contain especially selected components, which must be handled according to the regulations for EED (Electrostatically Endangered Devices). Most importantly, special techniques are required for working with the printed circuit boards, so that the flowsoldered boards and sensitive components are not damaged. Therefore, if a defect cannot be eliminated by the operations described in this chapter, it is recommended to send the complete unit or defective module back to the manufacturer. In case it is unavoidable to replace single modules, the EED-regulations have to be followed (handling of electrostatically endangered devices).

Warning!
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges via the components, printed conductors and connection pins must under all circumstances be avoided by previous contact with earthed metal parts. This applies in the same way for replacing components in sockets, such as EPROMs or EEPROMs. Suitable electrostatic protecting packing has to be used for mailing. Modules fitted in the unit are not endangered. The module or bay unit must be safely packed for shipping. Shock resistance as per IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2 and IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 must be ensured. If a module or bay unit needs to be replaced, please observe the following: Protective devices in housings or factory-assembled mounting racks are delivered as complete units and can be replaced as such by units with the same MLFB. Match the pick-up threshold of the binary inputs to the station conditions. Plug-in modules are normally interchangeable if their ordering numbers are identical as far as the oblique stroke. Note on ZPS modules the address setting and the order number and on the EAZ modules and the D-CPU module also the jumper setting of the control voltage. Individual modules of the bay unit cannot be replaced. After replacement of devices or modules, complete parameterizing of the system may be required. Details are given in the Chapters 5, page 91 and 6, page 203.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

293

Maintenance and Repair

8.4.1

Replacing the Buffer Battery

The annunciations and fault record data of the device are saved in the RAM. The RAM and the internal system clock with calendar are protected against voltage failures with a buffer battery. To maintain this information in case of a voltage failure, a buffer battery must be fitted. The battery should be replaced when the annunciation Batt. superv. CU (on the central unit) or Fail.Battery (on the bay unit) appears, but at least after approx. 10 years of operation. Recommended batteries are listed in the Appendix in the Table A-6, page 331. Have a replacement battery ready.

Caution!
Do not short-circuit the battery! Do not reload the battery! Read out the device annunciations. If you read out the annunciations with the DIGSI communication software, the information will be saved on the PC. Note The complete saved configuration and setting information is protected against power failure. The memory in which they are stored is independent of the buffer battery. They will thus not be lost, neither when the battery is replaced nor when the device operates without a battery. Disconnect all auxiliary power circuit connections of the device at the miniature circuit breaker.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges via the components, printed conductors and connection pins must under all circumstances be avoided by previous contact with earthed metal parts. Do not plug or unplug interface connectors under live conditions. Central unit To replace the battery in the central unit: Remove the covering caps on the front panel, and unscrew the screws. Swing the front panel downwards. The battery in located on the top front of the D-CPU communication module (Figure 8-5, page 295).

294

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Repair

Battery Cable binder

D-CPU communication module Figure 8-5 Front view after removing the front panel, and location of the buffer battery

Use the cable binder to pull the spent battery out from its snap-in holder. Remove the cable binder from the old battery and fasten it to the new battery. Press the new battery firmly into its snap-in holder (see Figure 8-5, page 295). Observe the correct battery polarity! Close the front cover and fasten it again to the housing with the screws. Put the screw covers back on. Switch the auxiliary voltage on again. Where the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized through one of the serial ports, you can now set it , as described in Chapter 6.3.7, page 231.

Warning!
The spent battery contains lithium. The applicable regulations for its disposal must be strictly complied with! Do not reverse the polarity! Do not reload! Do not throw into the fire! Risk of explosion!

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

295

Maintenance and Repair

Bay unit

To replace the battery in the bay unit: Remove the covering caps on the front panel, and unscrew the screws. Swing the front panel to the left. The battery is located on the bottom front of the PFE module (Figure 8-6, page 296).

Figure 8-6 Front view after removing the front panel, and location of the buffer battery 7SS523

Figure 8-7 Front view after removing the front panel, and location of the buffer battery 7SS525

Use the cable binder to pull the spent battery out from its snap-in holder. Remove the cable binder from the old battery and fasten it to the new battery.

296

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Repair

Press the new battery firmly into its snap-in holder (see Figure 8-6, page 296 or Figure 8-7, page 296). Observe the correct battery polarity! Close the front cover and fasten it again to the housing with the screws. Put the screw covers back on. Switch the auxiliary voltage on again.

WARNING!
The spent battery contains lithium. The applicable regulations for its disposal must be strictly complied with! Do not reverse the polarity! Do not reload! Do not throw into the fire! Risk of explosion!

8.4.2

Replacing the Fine-Wire Fuse

The power supply modules SV in the central unit and SAF or SVW in the bay units are protected against short-circuit by fine-wire fuses. The ratings of the required fuses can be found for the central unit in Figure 8-8, page 298, and for the bay units in Figure 8-9, page 299 or Figure A-11, page 347. Disconnect all auxiliary power circuit connections of the device at the miniature circuit breaker.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges can occur if printed conductors, connectors and connecting pins are touched. To avoid such electrostatic discharges, touch a grounded piece of metal first. Central unit To replace the fine-wire fuse in the central unit: Remove the covering caps on the front panel, and unscrew the screws. Swing the front panel downwards. The fine-wire fuse is located on the power supply module (SV). This module is plugged in at the rightmost slot in the rack (Figure 2-2, page 16). Open the latch that holds the module in place. Pull the module out of the housing. Use the extraction handle (included in the delivery) to loosen the module. To avoid electrostatic discharge through components, the withdrawn modules

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

297

Maintenance and Repair

should be placed vertically on a conductive surface. Such a conductive surface could be e.g. an EMC mat. Replace the fine-wire fuse. The location of the fine-wire fuse can be seen in Figure 8-8, page 298. Insert the module again into the housing. Make sure that the module is fixed correctly and firmly contacted with the rear-side plug connector. Fasten the front panel again. Please note that the switch for the power supply SV is not accessible with the front panel closed. After fastening the front panel, switch the device on. If the auxiliary voltage failure continues to be indicated, there must be a failure or short-circuit in the internal power supply. The power supply module (SV) should be sent to the factory.

Figure 8-8 Location of the fine-wire fuse on the power supply module (SV) of the central unit

Bay unit

To replace the fine-wire fuse in the bay unit: Remove the covering caps on the front panel, and unscrew the screws. Swing the front panel to the left (7SS523), or remove it (7SS525). The fine-wire fuse is located on the power supply module (SAF or PFE/SVW). The location of that module is shown in Figure 8-6, page 296 or Figure 8-7, page 296. Pull off the front connector of the ribbon cable from the module. Pull the module out of the housing. Use the extraction handle (included in the delivery) to loosen the module. To avoid electrostatic discharge through components, the withdrawn modules should be placed vertically on a conductive surface. Such a conductive surface could be e.g. an EMC mat. Replace the fine-wire fuse. The location of the fine-wire fuse can be seen in Figure 8-9, page 299 or Figure A-11, page 347.

298

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Repair

Insert the module again into the housing. Make sure that the module is fixed correctly and firmly contacted with the rear-side plug connector. Re-establish the electrical connections with the power supply, and fasten the front panel again. After fastening the front panel, switch the device on. If the auxiliary voltage failure continues to be indicated, there must be a failure or short-circuit in the internal power supply. The complete bay unit should be sent to the factory.

Figure 8-9 Location of the fine-wire fuse on the power supply module (SAF) of the bay unit 7SS523

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

299

Maintenance and Repair

8.4.3

Startup with a Defective Bay Unit / Defective Fiber-Optic Cable

The protection system can be started up even if a bay has failed (defective bay unit or defective fiber-optic cable). The system first starts up, and the whole protection is blocked. This happens regardless of the setting of parameter BLOCKING MODE (6305/CU). The faulty bay is shown in a separate alarm list which can be called up by pressing the function key F1 on the central unit. To be able to go on operating the substation until the defective bay unit or fiber-optic cable has been replaced, proceed as follows: Set the parameter Status (XX12/CU) to out of service. Note The faulty bay must first be excluded from the protection zone by isolating it in the primary system.

300

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Technical Data

This chapter describes the technical specifications of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection system, and of its functions, including limits that may on no account be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for the maximum scope of functions are followed by the mechanical data and the dimension drawings.

9.1 9.2 9.3

General Data General Device Data Dimensions

302 303 319

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

301

Technical Data

9.1

General Data
Minimum duration of TRIP command Minimum current limit for reset of signal I / IN 1 0.02 to 1.00 s (in steps of 0.01) 0.20 to 2.00 (in steps of 0.1) 0.00 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.1)

TRIP command

Overcurrent release of TRIP signals Isolator running time Busbar (BB) configuration

Setting range

I / IN 1

Setting range in s Busbar arrangement (max.)

1.00 to 180.00 s (in steps of 0.01) Quadruple or triple busbar with transfer busbar; up to 16 couplers and 24 sectionalizers 12 bus sections, 12 coupler bus sections 2 48 (including bus couplers and sectionalizers)

Number of bays

1 Nominal current of the feeder current transformer (1 A or 5 A) 2 These are sections which serve exclusively for coupling of the bus zones; they have no feeder bays

302

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

9.2
9.2.1

General Device Data

Analog Inputs and Outputs
Rated frequency fN IN 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A or 5 A (settable)

Current inputs

Rated current

Thermal overload capability of current path continuous 4 IN for 10 s 30 IN for 1 s 100 IN Dynamic overload capability (1 half-cycle) Power consumption at IN = 1 A at IN = 5 A 250 IN 0.1 VA 0.2 VA

9.2.2

Rated Auxiliary Voltage

Rated auxiliary voltage Uaux Central unit Bay unit Permissible tolerance of rated auxiliary voltage Uaux Max. ripple Power consumption (dependent on station configuration) Quiescent Central unit Bay unit Energized Central unit Bay unit Bridging time during failure / short circuit of auxiliary voltage
1)

DC 48/60, 110/125, 220/250 V DC 48 to 250 V 20% 15%

70 to 120 W 12 W [10] 1) 75 to 135 W 16 W [14] 1) 50 ms (at Uaux 60 V)

Values in brackets [ ] for Bay unit 7SS525

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

303

Technical Data

9.2.3

Binary Inputs
Number Central unit Bay unit Voltage range Nominal control voltage Pick-up threshold Drop-off threshold Current consumption Maximum input voltage - Central Unit BI 1 to BI 5 (Module D-CPU) BI 6to BI 12 (Module EAZ) nominal control voltages 24 V nominal control voltages 60 V nominal control voltages 110 V nominal control voltages 220 V - Bay unit nominal control voltages 24 V nominal control voltages 60 V nominal control voltages 110 V nominal control voltages 220 V

12 20 [10] 1) DC 24 to 250 V (thresholds selectable by plug-in jumpers) DC 24; 60; 110; 220 V 0.8 UN 0.65 UN approx. 1.6 mA / input

DC 300 V DC 200 V DC 220 V DC 260 V DC 300 V DC 200 V DC 220 V DC 260 V DC 300 V

When delivered, the binary inputs of the nominal control voltage are preset to 220 V.

9.2.4

Alarm Contacts
Number of relays Marshallable Central unit Bay unit Not marshallable Central unit Bay unit Switching capacity MAKE/BREAK Switching voltage Permissible current continuously
1)

16 (NO contacts) 1 (1 NO contact) 1 (2 NC contacts) 1 (2 NC contacts) [1 NC contacts] 1) 20 W / VA AC / DC 250 V 1A

Values in brackets [ ] for Bay unit 7SS525

304

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

9.2.5
Bay unit

Trip Contacts
Number of relays Switching capacity CLOSE OPEN Switching voltage Permissible current: continuously 0.5 s
1)

4 [3] 1) (each 2 NO contacts) 1 [2] 1) (1 NO contact) 1000 W / VA 30 W/ VA AC / DC 250 V 5A 30 A

Values in brackets [ ] for Bay unit 7SS525

9.2.6

Light Emitting Diodes

Ready for service (green) Failure indication (red) Marshallable indications (red) 1 1 32 1 1 11 [1] 1) 5 [0] 1)

Central unit

Bay unit

Ready for service (green) Failure indication (red) Indications (marshallable) red green
1)

Values in brackets [ ] for Bay unit 7SS525

9.2.7

Operation, Displays
LC display Central unit Bay unit 7SS523 Sealed keypad Central unit Bay unit 7SS523 No display or keypad for bay unit 7SS525.

4 lines 20 characters 4 lines 16 characters 24 keys 12 keys

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

305

Technical Data

9.2.8

Serial Ports
PC port (front) Connection electrical Baud rate System port (rear) IEC 60870-5-103 Connection optical Baud rate

Central unit

D-SUB 9-pole 1200 to 115000 bauds

ST connectors 1200 to 115000 bauds

System port (rear) IEC 61850, electrical with EN100 Connection electrical RJ45 connectors Baud rate up to 100 Mbaud clock synchronization interface (rear) Connection electrical Service port (rear) Connection optical electrical Baud rate

D-SUB 9-pole

ST connectors D-SUB 9-pole 1200 to 115000 bauds

Bay unit

PC port (front) Connection electrical Baud rate

D-SUB 9-pole (subminiature ISO 2110) 1200 to 38400 bauds

Central/bay unit

Interface for high-speed data communication Connection Fiber-optic cable Optical wavelength Permissible cable attenuation Transmission distance
1 Note: Determination of the maximum distance 8 dB - reserve - cable attenuation L max = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------attenuation factor of FO cable

ST connectors glass fiber 62.5 / 125 m 820 nm max. 8 dB max. 1.5 km 1

typ. reserve for ageing and temperature drift: 2 to 3 dB plug attenuation (ST): approx. 0.3 dB per plug FO attenuation coefficient (glass fiber 62.5 / 125 m): 3.5 dB / km

306

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

9.2.9

Busbar Protection
Stabilized differential current measurement Overcurrent I / Ino 1 0.20 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01)

Characteristic Setting ranges

Stabilizing factor for bus section-selective protection k Stabilizing factor for the check zone Diff-current supervision Setting ranges Tripping time Drop-off times Tolerances Current threshold Time delay Typical tripping time TRIP Reset in Bay unit Current k factor Time k I / Ino 1

0.10 to 0.80 (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 0.80 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 0.80 (in steps of 0.01) 1 to 10 s (in steps of 1) 2 15 ms Approx. 45 ms 5 % of setting value or 50 mA 5 % of setting value 5 % of setting value or 50 ms

1 Ino = normalized nominal current referred to the current transformer with the highest ratio (base CT) 2 Identical setting ranges for the zone-selective protection and the check zone

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

307

Technical Data

9.2.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Control modes Modes of operation One or two-channel initiation Individually selectable per feeder: I>query TRIP repeat (1/3-phase) with I>query Unbalancing (1-stage CBF) Unbalancing with TRIP repeat (1-/3-phase, 2-stage CBF) TRIP by external CBF protection (tripping via isolator replica of busbar protection) plus for each mode (except for TRIP by external CBF): low-current mode plus for modes with TRIP repeat: pulse mode Overcurrent I / IN 0.10 to 2.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 2.00 (Earthfault characteristic) 0.05 to 0.80 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 10.00 s (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 10.00 s (in steps of 0.01) Approx. 2 ms Approx.25 ms Approx.25 ms 5 % of setting value or 50 mA 5 % of setting value 5 % of setting value or 50 ms

Setting ranges

Stabilizing factor Time delay for unbalancing / I>query Time delay for TRIP repeat Drop-off times Mode unbalancing Mode I>query

Definite time (backup protection) Tolerances Current k factor Time

308

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

9.2.11 Overcurrent Protection in the Bay Unit

Characteristic Setting ranges High-set stage High-set stage Trip time delays Definite time overcurrent protection Inverse-time overcurrent protection Overcurrent stage Overcurrent stage Trip time delays Inverse time O/C stage Inverse time O/C stage Trip time delays Characteristics Definite or inverse time overcurrent protection I>> (phase) I / IN 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) IE>> (earth) I / IN 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) TI>>, TIE>> I> (phase) I / IN IE > (earth) I / IN TI>, TIE> IP (phase) I / IN IE (earth) I / IN TIP, TIE 0.00 to 60.00 s or 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 60.00 s or 0.10 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.10 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 10.00 or inverse (IEC 255-3 type A) very inverse (IEC 255-3 type B) extremely inverse (IEC 255-3 type C) Approx.25 ms Approx.25 ms 5 % of setting value or 50 mA 5 % of setting value or 50 ms + 2% current tolerance or 50 ms

tripping times Drop-off times Tolerances

I>-, I>> stage definite time Current Time

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

309

Technical Data

Figure 9-1 Trip time characteristics of the inverse-time overcurrent protection, in acc. with IEC 255-3

310

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

9.2.12 Auxiliary Functions

Self-diagnosis Current monitoring per feeder Auxiliary voltage monitoring Cyclic test Check of the data transmission between central unit and bay units Memory tests IL1; IL2, IL3 in A primary and in % IN 0 to 1000% IN typically 2% of measured value IdL1; IdL2; IdL3 IsL1; IsL2; IsL3 in % IN 0 to 1000% IN IL1; IL2, IL3; IE in A primary and in % IN and in % INo 0 to 6000% IN typically 2% of measured value IdL1; IdL2; IdL3 IsL1; IsL2; IsL3 0 to 6000% IN f in Hz (I > 0.1 IN) fN 5Hz 0.1 Hz

Operational measured values Central unit

Feeder currents Range Tolerance Differential and restraint (stabilizing) currents of all bus sections (separate for ZPS-BSZ1 and ZPS-BSZ2) Range

Operational measured values Bay unit

Feeder currents Range Tolerance Differential and restraint (stabilizing) currents Range Frequency Range Tolerance

Event recording

Central unit Storage of the last 200 operational events and 80 fault events Bay unit Storage of the last 50 operational events and 100 fault events

Fault recording

Central unit Resolution Pre/post capture time (from busbar TRIP or initiation by binary input/operation) Capture Time Bay unit Resolution Pre/post capture time (from busbar TRIP or initiation by binary input/operation) Capture Time 1 ms at 50 Hz 0.83 ms at 60 Hz 500 to + 500 ms at 50 Hz 416 to + 416 ms at 60 Hz (up to 8 fault records) max. 5s (total) 1 ms at 50 Hz 0.83 ms at 60 Hz 500 to + 500 ms at 50 Hz 416 to + 416 ms at 60 Hz (up to 8 fault records) max. 5s (total)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

311

Technical Data

9.2.13 User-Configurable Functions (CFC)

Function Module ABSVALUE ADD ALARM AND BLINK BOOL_TO_CO BOOL_TO_DI BOOL_TO_IC BUILD_DI CMD_CHAIN CMD_CANCEL CMD_INF COMPARE CONNECT D_FF D_FF_MEMO DI_GET_STATUS DI_SET_STATUS DI_TO_BOOL DIV DM_DECODE DYN_OR LIVE_ZERO LONG_TIMER LOOP LOWER_SETPOINT MEMORY MUL MV_GET_STATUS MV_SET_STATUS NAND NEG NOR OR REAL_TO_INT REAL_TO_UINT RISE_DETECT RS_FF RS_FF_MEMO SI_GET_STATUS SI_SET_STATUS SQUARE_ROOT SR_FF SR_FF_MEMO ST_AND ST_NOT ST_OR SUB TIMER TIMER_SHORT UINT_TO_REAL Comment Formation of absolute value Addition Alarm AND gate Flash Block Boolean to command, conversion Boolean to double-point indication, conversion Boolean to internal single-point indication, conversion Generation of double-point indication Switching sequence Cancel command Command information measured value comparison Connection D-Flipflop D-Flipflop with preservation of information following restart Information status double point indication, decoder Double point indication with status, encoder Double-point indication to Boolean, conversion Division Decoding of double-point indication Dynamic OR gate Live zero monitoring, non-linear characteristic Timer (max. 1193 h) Signal feedback Value below lower limit data memory Multiplication Information status measured value, decoder Measured value with status, encoder NAND gate Negator NOR gate OR gate Adapter Real after U-Int, adapter Flankendetektor RS Flipflop Status memory for restart Information status single point indication, decoder Single point indication with status, encoder Square-root extraction SR Flipflop Status memory for restart AND gate with status Negator with status OR gate with status Subtraction Universal timer Simple timer U-Int to Real, Adapter

312

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

UPPER_SETPOINT X_OR ZERO_POINT

Value above upper limit (XOR gate) Zero point suppression

To find out which priority classes are associated with which function blocks, please consult the DIGSI CFC Manual/3/.

9.2.14 Electrical Tests

CE conformity regulations This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive 73/23 EEC). This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC directive) and with the standard EN 60255-6 (for Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens AG. The device is designed and manufactured for application in industrial environment. The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435. Insulation tests Standards: High voltage test (routine test) all circuits except auxiliary voltage input, binary inputs, data interfaces (service, system and clock synchronization interface) High voltage test (routine test) only auxiliary voltage input and binary inputs High-voltage test (routine test) only data interfaces (service,system and clock synchronization interface) Impulse voltage test (type test) all circuits without communication and clock synchronization interface, Class III EMC tests for immunity (type tests) Standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1 2 kV AC (r.m.s. value); 50 Hz; 1 min

2.8 kV DC; 30 sec; both polarities

500 V AC (r.m.s. value); 50 Hz; 1 min

5 kV (peak value); 1.2 / 50 s; 0.5 J; 3 positive and 3 negative pulses in intervals of 5 s IEC 60255-6 and -22, (product standards) EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard) VDE 0435 Section 301, DIN VDE 0435-110 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 pulses per s; test duration 2 s; RI= 200

High-frequency test IEC 60255-22-1, Class III and VDE 0435 Section 303, Class III

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

313

Technical Data

Attenuated oscillation IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 Discharge of static electricity IEC 60 55-22-2, Class IV und IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV Irradiation with HF field, frequency sweep IEC 60255-22-3, Class III IEC 61000-4-3, Class III

2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz, RI = 200 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge; both polarities; 150 pF; RI= 330 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 10 V/m; 800 MHz to 960 MHz; 80% AM; 1kHz

Irradiation with HF field, single frequencies IEC 60255-22-3, 10 V/m 80/160/450/900 MHz; IEC 61000-4-3, amplitude-modulated r80 % AM 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s Class III: Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz IEEE Std C37.90.2 Fast transient disturbance/Burst IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4 Class IV PE conductor: 1 kV / 5 kHz; all circuits: 4 kV / 2.5 kHz; 5 / 50 ns; 5 kHz; burst duration = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; RI = 50 ; test duration 1 min

High-energy surge voltages (SURGE), Impulse: 1.2/50 s IEC 61000-4-5 installation Class 3 Auxiliary voltage common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F measuring inputs, binary inputs und relay outputs HF on lines IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 61000-4-6 Class III Power system-frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8 IEC 255-6 Class IV common mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 10 V (r.m.s. value); 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 %; 1 kHz; AM; RI = 150 30 A/m continuously; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz;

314

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

EMC tests for noise emission

Standard: Radio disturbance voltage on lines, only auxiliary voltage IEC-CISPR 22 Disturbance field intensity IEC-CISPR 11

EN 61000-6-4 (generic standard) 150 kHz to 30 MHz limit value class B 30 MHz to 1000 MHz limit value class A

9.2.15 Mechanical Tests

Mechanical impact Standards: Permissible mechanical impact in service sinusoidal; 10 Hz to 60 Hz; 0,075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration; frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min; 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes sinusoidal; 5 Hz to 8 Hz; 7.5 mm amplitude; 8 Hz to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration; frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min; 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes IEC 60255-21-1 Class II IEC 60068-2-6 test Fc

during transport

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

315

Technical Data

9.2.16 Climatic Stress Tests

.

Warning!
Commissioning at temperatures 0 C may only be performed if plant conditions ensure that no command/trip outputs can be activated until the modules have reached their minimum permissible service temperature.

Temperatures

Standard: Permissible ambient temperature in service 10 C 5 C for storage 25 C during transport 25 C during start-up 10 C 0 C

IEC 602556 to + 55 C (bay unit) to + 55 C (central unit) to + 70 C to + 70 C to + 55 C (bay unit)* to + 55 C (central unit)

Storage and transport with factory packaging! * Commissioning at temperatures 0 C may only be performed if plant conditions ensure that no command/trip outputs can be activated until the modules have reached their minimum permissible service temperature! Humidity Permissible humidity in service yearly mean 75% relative humidity; on 30 in the year up to 95% relative humidity; moisture condensation not permissible We recommend to install the devices so that they are not subject to direct sunlight and strong fluctuations in temperature which could lead to moisture condensation. Commissioning at temperatures 0 C is permissible only if site conditions ensure that no command output can be activated before the device temperature has reached 0 C.

316

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Device Data

9.2.17 Service Conditions

The relay is designed for use in industrial environment, for installation in standard relay rooms and compartments so that with proper installation electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. The following should also be heeded: All contactors and relays which operate in the same cubicle or on the same relay panel as the digital protection equipment should, as a rule, be fitted with suitable spike quenching elements. All external connection leads in substations from 100 kV upwards should be screened with a screen capable of carrying power currents and earthed at both sides. No special measures are normally necessary for substations of lower voltages. Individual modules must not be withdrawn or inserted under voltage. In withdrawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling the EEC standards (standards for electrostatically endangered components) must be observed. The modules are not endangered when plugged in.

9.2.18 Design Versions

Central unit Cubicle Surface-mounted housing (wall-mounted) SIPAC subrack Terminals Bay unit Housing (7XP20) with window pane front without window pane front Terminals Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 Weight Weight at maximum configuration Central unit SIPAC subrack Surface-mounted housing Bay unit flush-mounted surface-mounted Dimensions 14.3 kg 43.0 kg 8.1 kg [5,5 kg] 1) 11.8 kg [not available] 1) IP 54 IP 54 IP 20 IP 21 IP 51 IP 30 [IP 20] 1) IP 21

See dimensional drawings, Chapter 9.3, page 319

1)

Values in brackets [ ] for Bay unit 7SS525

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

317

Technical Data

9.2.19 MCBs for Device 7SS52x

The miniature circuit breaker have one tripping characteristic for thermal overload as well as one for short circuits ( for magnetic trip actuator). For the dimensioning of overload, the continuous as well as momentary current has to be taken into consideration. For magnetic trip actuator, please observe the transitory current ratio. The limitation of the transitory current ratio correspond to the following requirements max. 18A peak value for a period of time of < 0,25 ms max. 12A peak value for a period of time of < 1 ms

318

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Dimensions

9.3
9.3.1

Dimensions
Central Unit

Figure 9-2 Mechanical dimensions of the subrack

By using the delivered distance angle piece the mounting location decreases up to 40 mm.

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

319

Technical Data

Figure 9-3 Connection plugs (rear view) of the subrack

320

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Dimensions

Figure 9-4 Mechanical dimensions of the surface-mounted casing

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

321

Technical Data

9.3.2

Bay Unit

Figure 9-5 Dimensional drawing of 7XP2040-1 for panel surface mounting 7SS523 (all dimensions in mm)

322

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Dimensions

Figure 9-6 Dimensional drawing of 7XP2040-2 for panel or cubicle flush mounting 7SS523 (all dimensions in mm)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

323

Technical Data

Figure 9-7 Dimensional drawing of 7XP2040-2 for panel or cubicle flush mounting 7SS525 (all dimensions in mm)

324

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Dimensions

Figure 9-8 Connection plugs (rear view) for flush-mounted casing 7SS523

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

325

Technical Data

326

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Appendix

A
This appendix contains ordering information, general diagrams and connection diagrams, tabular listings of all settings and information of the distributed busbar and failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 for the full scope of device functions. A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11 A.12 A.13 A.14 A.15 A.16 A.17 A.18 A.19 A.20 A.21 Data for Selection and Ordering Basis for Selection of the Stabilization Factor k Connection Diagrams Settings Central Unit Jumper Settings Bay Unit Protocol-Dependent Functions Parameter Listing - Central Unit Parameter Listing - Bay Unit List of information - Central Unit List of Information - Bay Unit Group Alarms - Central Unit Group Alarms - Bay Unit Measured Value List - Central Unit Measured Value List - Bay Unit Marshalling - Central Unit Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS523 Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS525 Navigation Tree - Central Unit Navigation Tree of the Bay Unit Abbreviations References 328 333 334 340 346 354 355 357 362 372 378 382 383 384 385 388 391 393 403 404 405

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

327

Appendix

A.1

Data for Selection and Ordering

Table A-1, page 328 to Table A-2, page 329 gives an overview of the available variants of the components (central unit, bay units) of the protection system SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 and their ordering codes. Necessary ancillary devices with corresponding ordering codes are added.

A.1.1
Table A-1

Central Unit
Selection and ordering data for central unit Order No.

Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 CENTRAL UNIT System version 50/60 Hz V4

7SS52

1 A 0

Rated auxiliary voltage of converters DC 48, 60 V DC 110, 125 V DC 220, 250 V Mechanical design in subrack ES902 C (SIPAC) in surface-mounted casing in 8MF cubicle Communication language Region DE, Language German (Lang. changeable) Region World, Language English (UK) (Lang. changeable) Region US, Language English (US) (Lang. changeable) Region World, Language French (Lang. changeable) Region World, Language Spanish (Lang. changeable) Region World, Language Italian (Lang. changeable) Region World, Language Russian (Lang. changeable) System interface no interface Protocol IEC 60870-5-103, optical 820 nm, ST plugs Additional protocols, see additional information L Service interface (Terminal block on the rear) 0 3 9 A B C D E F G A B F 3 4 5

328

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Data for Selection and Ordering

Table A-1

Selection and ordering data for central unit Order No.

Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 CENTRAL UNIT Service interface (rear port) DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST plug Fitted for 8 bays 16 bays 24 bays 32 bays 40 bays 48 bays Additional information L, further protocols (port K) IEC 61850, electrical with EN100

7SS52

1 A 0

1 2 3

A B C D E F Position 21 0 22 R

A.1.2

Bay Units

Table A-2

Selection and ordering data for bay unit 7SS523 Order No.

Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 BAY UNIT System version 50/60 Hz V3.* 16.7 Hz V3.* Rated current at 50/60 Hz 1A 5A Rated auxiliary voltage of converters DC 48 V DC 60 to 250 V Mechanical design in casing in casing 7XP2040-2 for flush mounting in panel / cubicle in casing 7XP2040-1 for surface mounting on panel in casing 7XP2040-2 for flush mounting without plastic cover Ancillary functions without with overcurrent time protection

7SS52

A 0

A A 1

3 7

1 5

2 5

C D E

0 1

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

329

Appendix

Table A-3

Selection and ordering data for bay unit 7SS525 Order No.

Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 BAY UNIT System version 50/60 Hz V3.*

7SS52

5 F A 0

A A 1

Rated current at 50/60 Hz 1A 5A Rated auxiliary voltage of converters DC 48 to 250 V Mechanical design in casing in casing 7XP2040-2 for flush mounting without glass cover Ancillary functions without with overcurrent time protection 0 1 F 5 1 5

A.1.3

Accessories

Table A-4

Accessories for Central Unit

Accessories The following accessories are contained in the delivery of the central unit:

CD with firmware, manuals, labeling software Extraction handle for printed circuit boards FO Simplex indoor cable, length 0.2 m (2 pieces) FO coupler Self-adhesive labeling film Torx-socket wrench insert T8, T10, T20 Buffer battery (see also Table A-6, page 331) Distanceangle for central unit with installationdrawing Plastic rings for FO cables

A plastic bag that is attached to the rear of the device contains the following accessories: Upgrade kit for EN100 module (release FF and higher)

Plug-in jumpers for boards C53207-A351-D677-1

330

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Data for Selection and Ordering

Table A-5

Ordering data for PC communication software DIGSI Order No.. 7XS5400-0AA00

ANCILLARY COMPONENTS PC communication software DIGSI, Basic German, English PC communication software DIGSI, Professional (Basic and all optional packets, incl. SIGRA) German, English DIGSI REMOTE Software for the remote control of protection devices via modem with DIGSI German, English SIGRA Software for the graphical visualization, analysis and evaluation of fault records German, English Connection cable protection device -PC (9-pole; D-SUB) Table A-6 Selection and ordering data for spare parts

7XS5402-0AA00

7XS5440-0AA00

7XS5410-0AA00

7XV5100-4

Order No. Spare parts for the 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection Buffer battery for central and bay unit Lithium battery 3 V / 1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Processor boards Central Unit ZPS-SBK 1) D-CPU Input/output board Central Unit EAZ Electrical/optical converter module Central Unit LMZ Power supply Central Unit DC 48/60 V DC 110/125 V DC 220/250 V 6127101501 6MA3522-0AA12 6MA3542-0AA00 6MA3262-0BA01 6MA3263-0AA10 6MA1890-1BC13 6MA1890-1BC14 6MA1890-1BC15

1) The ZPS-SK boards and ZPS-BSZ boards differ from the board ZPS-SBK only in terms of jumper settings and firmware. Jumpers and firmware are included in the accessories of the central unit. (The C53207-A361-B112-1 module contained in the device delivery has no communication controller and can thus only be used as ZPS-SBK and ZPS-BSZ 1 .. 3 module)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

331

Appendix

Table A-7

Selection and ordering data for FO connections Order No.

ANCILLARY COMPONENTS Fiber-optic connections central unit - bay units FO-Duplex outdoor cable 2G62,5/125, 2 fibers, ST-plugs on both sides FO-Duplex indoor cable 2G62,5/125, 2 fibers, ST-plugs on both sides 100 meter lengths Length 0 m Length 100 m Length 200 m Length 300 m Length 400 m Length 500 m Length 600 m Length 700 m Length 800 m Length 900 m 10 meter lengths: Length 0 m Length 10 m Length 20 m Length 30 m Length 40 m Length 50 m Length 60 m Length 70 m Length 80 m Length 90 m 1 meter lengths: Length 0 m Length 1 m Length 2 m Length 3 m Length 4 m Length 5 m Length 6 m Length 7 m Length 8 m Length 9 m

6XV81006XV8100-

0 0

B B

D E

4 4

1 1

0 0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A B C D E F G H J K

A B C D E F G H J K

1 Plain text order required for non-standardized lengths 2 Before delivery, the non-metallic rodent protection is stripped at both ends on a length of 1 m. Extended stripping lengths (max. 2.5 m) have to be ordered by plain text..

Note FO cable up to 1.500 m length Wavelength 820 nm

332

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Basis for Selection of the Stabilization Factor k

A.2

Basis for Selection of the Stabilization Factor k

In a first step, the relationship between the point (in time) at which saturation occurs and the stabilization factor ist established. The following condition must be fulfilled in order to prevent bus zone tripping for an external fault (see Figure A-1, page 333): 2 Iscc max sin TS k > Iscc max 2 sin TS k > 1 (1) or (2)

Figure A-1 Short-circuit on a feeder with CT saturation

To determine the point in time TS at which saturation occurs, the burdening factor Kb must be considered. Isat = Ipn * Kssc Kb = Iscc max / Isat

Figure A-2 Current/time characteristic

If the CT is burdened with Iscc max = KbIsat, it will saturate after time TS, with area A being equal to area B .
Ts

i.e.

( I scc max sin t ) =

( I sat sin t ) (3)

Kb (1 cos TS) = 2

(4)

If inequation (2) and equation (4) are combined, the result is the minimum selectable stabilization factor k: Kb k > --------------------------for Kb > 2(5) 4 Kb 1

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

333

Appendix

A.3

Connection Diagrams

Legend: BI: CZ: BU: I-DIFF: I-SUM: CB: M: BZ: BF: ISO: CU: Binary Input Check zone Bay unit Differential current Summation current Circuit breaker Alarm reley Bus zone Breaker failure Isolator Central unit

Figure A-3 Connection diagram central unit (continued in Figure A-4, page 335)

334

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Connection Diagrams

Figure A-4 Connection diagram central unit (continued from Figure A-3, page 334)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

335

Appendix

D-SUB Connectors
Pin No. PC port Service port (F) RS 232 RS 485 Shield electrically connected with collar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RxD TxD GND RxD TxD GND RTS CTS A/A (RxD/TxDN) C/C (GND) 1 B/B (RxD/TxDP) P24_TSIG P5_TSIG M_TSIG 2 P12_TSIG Time synchronizing port (E)

1 Pin 7 carries the RTS signal with RS232 level even if operated as RS 485 interface. Therefore pin 7 must not be connected! 2 Pin 4 is assigned but cannot be used

Connections for FOs

The transmit and receive connections of the FO cables are identified by the symbols for transmit (output) and for receive (input).

336

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Connection Diagrams

*) Table A-28 Marshalling TRIP RELAY show the default assignment of relay K1 - K5. Legend: BI: K: CB: M: BF:

Binary Input Trip relay Circuit breaker Alarm reley Breaker failure

Figure A-5 Connection diagram bay unit 7SS523

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

337

Appendix

*) Table A-32 Marshalling TRIP RELAY show the default assignment of relay K1 - K5. Legend: BI: K: CB: M:

Binary Input Trip relay Circuit breaker Alarm reley

Figure A-6 Connection diagram bay unit 7SS525

338

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Connection Diagrams

D-SUB connectors
Pin No. PC port

Shield electrically connected with collar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RxD TxD GND

Connections for FOs

The transmit and receive connections of the FO cables are identified by the symbols for transmit (output) and for receive (input).

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

339

Appendix

A.4
A.4.1

Settings Central Unit

Settings of the ZPS Modules
The ZPS modules are a component of the central unit. They can be used as master (ZBS-SBK) or slave (ZPS-BSZ or ZPS-SK) in the multi-processor system. The C53207-A361-B12-1 module can be applied universally as ZPS-SK, ZPS-SBK and ZPS-BSZ. The C53207-A361-B112-1 module has no communication controller and can thus only be used as ZPS-SBK and ZPS-BSZ module. For an unequivocal definition of the task, the respective module is coded by means of switches. The location of the code switches and the jumpers on the module is depicted in figure Figure A-9, page 344. The settings can be taken from the tables A-8, page 341 and A-9, page 341.

Figure A-7 Location of the coding switches and jumpers on the ZPS module

It is recommended to verify the switch positions and jumpers before fitting the module. In Table A-8, page 341 and Table A-9, page 341 of the appendix the settings are listed.

340

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings Central Unit

Table A-8 Jumper X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 X34

Jumper settings for the ZPS module SBK off on off 5-6 off on off off on off on BSZ 1 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off BSZ 2 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off BSZ 3 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off ZPS Functions SK 1 SK 2 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off SK 3 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off SK 4 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off SK 5 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off SK 6 off on off off 5-6 off off off on off off

Table A-9 Switch S2 S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S3 S3.1 S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5 S3.6 S4 S4.1 S4.2 S4.3 S4.4 S4.5 S4.6

Coding switch settings for the ZPS module SBK off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off BSZ 1 off off off on off off on off on off off on off off on off off off BSZ 2 off off off on off off on on on off off on off on on off off off BSZ 3 off off off on off off on off off on off on off off off on off off ZPS Functions SK 1 SK 2 off off off on off off on on off on off on off on off on off off off off off on off off on off on on off on off off on on off off SK 3 off off off on off off on on on on off on off on on on off off SK 4 off off off on off off on off off off on on off off off off on off SK 5 off off off on off off on on off off on on off on off off on off SK 6 off off off on off off on off on off on on off off on off on off

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

341

Appendix

A.4.2

Settings of the EAZ Module

Figure A-8 Jumper layout on the EAZ module

Table A-10

Jumper settings for the EAZmodule Jumper Not installed 1-2 Jumpers for the setting of the control voltage (see Table A-11, page 343)

Connector X9 X10 X11 to X17 X21 to X27 X31 to X37 X38 X39 X40 X41 5-6 1-2 2-3 1-2

342

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings Central Unit

Table A-11

Jumper settings for different control voltages of the binary inputs of the EAZ module Setting for nominal control voltage Name 24 V 60 V 110 V 220 V 1)

BI1 to BI5 (on module D-CPU, Table A-14, page 345) BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 X31 X32 X33 X34 X35 X36 X37 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 -

1) Delivery setting
Table A-12 Coding switch setting for the EAZ module Position off on off off

Switch S1 S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

343

Appendix

A.4.3

Jumper Settings of the D-CPU Module

Figure A-9 Location of the jumpers on the D-CPU module

The service port can be configured as RS232, RS485 or as optical interface. Insert the jumpers according to Table A-13, page 345. The Ethernet interface module EN100 has no plug-in jumpers.

344

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Settings Central Unit

Note The jumpers settings on the connectors X103 and X104 must always be the same, i.e. either both on 1-2 or both on 2-3.

Table A-13

Jumper settings (service port) for the D-CPU-module Jumper RS232 RS485
1) 1)

Connector

optical any any any any any 1-2 any any 2-3 1-2

X103 X104 X105 X106 X107 X108 X109 X110 X111 X112

1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3

2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3

1) 2-3, switches the terminating resistors on if the device is connected to the beginning or the end of a RS485 bus line. 1-2, switches he terminating resistors off

Table A-14

Jumper settings (binary inputs) for the D-CPU module Binaryinputs BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 Jumper 24 V 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 60 V 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 110 V 220V 1) 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4

Connector

X20, X21 X22, X23 X24, X25 X26, X27 X28, X29

BI6 to BI12 (on module EAZ, Table A-11, page 343)

1) Delivery setting

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

345

Appendix

A.5
A.5.1

Jumper Settings Bay Unit

Settings of the PFE Module

Figure A-10 Location of the jumpers on the PFE module

Table A-15

Jumper settings for the PFE module Jumper Not installed Not installed Not installed

Connector X9 X10 X15

346

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Jumper Settings Bay Unit

A.5.2

Settings of the SVW Module

Figure A-11 No jumpers on the SVW module

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

347

Appendix

A.5.3

Settings of the SAF Module

Figure A-12 No jumpers on the SAF module

348

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Jumper Settings Bay Unit

A.5.4

Settings of the AFE Module

Figure A-13 No jumpers on the AFE module

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

349

Appendix

A.5.5

Settings of the EFE Module

Figure A-14 Location of the jumpers on the EFE module

Table A-16

Jumper settings for the EFE module Jumper Jumpers for the voltage setting, see Table A-17, page 351 Not installed Not installed Not installed

Connector X35 to X94 X2 (wire jumper) X95 (wire jumper) X96 (wire jumper)

350

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Jumper Settings Bay Unit

Table A-17

Jumper settings for different control voltages of the binary inputs of the EFE module Setting for nominal control voltage Name 24 V X37 X40 X43 X46 X49 X52 X55 X58 X61 X64 X67 X70 X73 X76 X79 X82 X85 X88 X91 X94 60 V X36 X39 X42 X45 X48 X51 X54 X57 X60 X63 X66 X69 X72 X75 X78 X81 X84 X87 X90 X93 110 V X35 X38 X41 X44 X47 X50 X53 X56 X59 X62 X65 X68 X71 X74 X77 X80 X83 X86 X89 X92 220 V 1) -

BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4 BI 5 BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 10 BI 11 BI 12 BI 13 BI 14 BI 15 BI 16 BI 17 BI 18 BI 19 BI 20

1) Delivery setting

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

351

Appendix

A.5.6

Settings of the EFE_10 Module

Figure A-15 Location of the jumpers on the EFE_10 module

Table A-18

Jumper settings for the EFE_10 module Jumper Jumpers for the voltage setting, see Table A-19, page 353 Not installed Not installed Not installed

Connector X35 to X58 and X74 to X79 X2 (wire jumper) X95 (wire jumper) X96 (wire jumper)

352

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Jumper Settings Bay Unit

Table A-19

Jumper settings for different control voltages of the binary inputs of the EFE_10 module Setting for nominal control voltage Name 24 V X37 X40 X43 X46 X49 X52 X55 X58 X76 X79 60 V X36 X39 X42 X45 X48 X51 X54 X57 X75 X78 110 V X35 X38 X41 X44 X47 X50 X53 X56 X74 X77 220 V 1) -

BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4 BI 5 BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 10

1) Delivery setting

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

353

Appendix

A.6

Protocol-Dependent Functions
Table A-20 Protocol dependent functions Function Operational measured values Fault recording Protection setting by remote control User-defined indications and switching objects Time synchronization Annunciation with time stamp Commissioning Aids Alarm and Measured Value Transmission Blocking Creating test annunciations Acknowledging LED Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol IEC 61850 (EN100) Protocol Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Physical mode Transmission mode Baud rate Type

Asynchronous Cyclic/Event 4800 to 38400 FO

Synchronous Cyclic/Event up to 100 MBaud Ethernet TP

354

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Parameter Listing - Central Unit

A.7

Parameter Listing - Central Unit

Addr. 106A 112

Setting Title Combi-Coupler Bay status BU BU

Function YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting NO in service

Comments Combi-Coupler Bay status

out of service in service maintenance 0.00 .. 25.00 I/In 1-ch w/o sup 1-ch w sup 2-ch w/o sup 2-ch w sup non existent external BZ unbalance trip rep/unbal I>query trip rep/I>quer ON OFF single-channel 3pole 0.10 .. 2.00 I/In 0.05 .. 2.00 I/In 0.05 .. 10.00 sec 0.05 .. 10.00 sec 0.05 .. 10.00 sec 0.05 .. 10.00 sec 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.02 .. 15.00 sec 0.06 .. 1.00 sec ON OFF YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO 50 Hz 60 Hz OFF ON German English French Spanish Italian Russian NO YES 0 .. 1500 min

113 114

I>TRIP BF BI MODE

BU BU

0.00 I/In 1-ch w sup

Current threshold for TRIP release Binary input mode / supervision BF

115

BF OP MODE

BU

BZ unbalance

Operation mode BF

116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123A 124 125 126 127 128 129 151A 152A 153A 154A 155A 156A 5103 5104 5108A 5111A

BF I< TRIP REP. MODE I> BF I> BF-EF T-BF-1P T-BF-mP T-BF I< T-BF IMP T-BF CB fault T-TRIP repeat T-CB open T-BF rel sup T-BF 2chan End Fault Prot Maint. Iso1 Maint. Iso2 Maint. Iso3 Maint. Iso4 Maint. Iso5 Maint. CB AUT LED ACK FREQUENCY Test mode SK Language BU

BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU Protec. general P.System Data 1 Protec. general Protec. general

OFF single-channel 0.50 I/In 0.25 I/In 0.25 sec 0.25 sec 0.25 sec 0.50 sec 0.10 sec 0.12 sec 0.00 sec 15.00 sec 0.06 sec OFF YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 50 Hz OFF English

Low-current mode BF TRIP repeat mode Current threshold for BF Current threshold for BF - EF Time delay for BF with 1-pole faults Time delay for BF with multi-pole faults Time delay for BF low current mode Time delay for BF pulse mode Time delay BF after CB fault Time delay for TRIP repeat Time delay for CB open Supervision bin. input BF-release Supervision time BF start / release End fault protection Maintenance for Isolator 1 Maintenance for Isolator 2 Maintenance for Isolator 3 Maintenance for Isolator 4 Maintenance for Isolator 5 Maintenance for CB Automatic acknowledgement of LED Nominal frequency Test mode for module SK Language of bay units

5112A 5299A

OutEn BU-TEST TO IV-Bit T103

Protec. general Device

NO 1380 min

Output enable bay unit under test Timeout IV-Bit T103

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

355

Appendix

Addr. 5401 6101 6102 6103 6104 6106 6108A 6109A 6110A 6111A 6201 6202A 6301 6302

Setting Title PROT TR BUS STAB FAC:BZ Id> BZ STAB FAC:CZ Id> CZ Tmin TRIP Is< BZ - EF Id> BZ - EF Is< CZ - EF Id> CZ - EF STAB FAC:BF Is< BF - EF ISOL TIME ISOL Malfunct

Function Protec. general BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection Protec. general BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection BF-Protection BF-Protection Monitoring Monitoring YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting YES 0.65 1.00 I/Ino 0.50 1.00 I/Ino 0.15 sec 5.00 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino 4.50 I/Ino 0.25 I/Ino 0.50 5.00 I/In 7.00 sec alarm only

Comments Selective protection for transfer busbar Stabilizing factor - selective Diff-current threshold - selective Stabilizing factor - check zone Diff-current threshold - check zone Minimum duration of TRIP command Stabilizing current threshold - BZ - EF Diff-current threshold - selective - EF Stabilizing current threshold - CZ - EF Diff-current threshold - check zone - EF Stabilizing factor BF protection Stabilizing current threshold - BF - EF Limit value isolator time Reaction on isolator malfunction

0.10 .. 0.80 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 0.80 0.20 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.00 .. 25.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 25.00 I/Ino 0.05 .. 4.00 I/Ino 0.00 .. 0.80 0.00 .. 25.00 I/In 1.00 .. 180.00 sec alarm only blocking block./release block./acknow. OLD ON OLD ON zone/phase protection ON OFF 1.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.05 .. 0.80 I/Ino 0.05 .. 0.80 I/Ino alarm only blocking block./release alarm only blocking block./release ON OFF 0.15 .. 4.00 I/Ino 1.00 .. 180.00 sec 0.00 .. 2.50 I/In; 0.02 .. 15.00 sec released blocked released blocked global central decentralized 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 .. 5.00 sec;

6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310

ISOL DC FAIL ISOL ST 1/1 BLOCKING MODE DIFF SUPERV T-Idiff SUPERV Id> SUPERV BZ Id> SUPERV CZ DIF SUP mode BZ

Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring

OLD OLD zone/phase ON 2.00 sec 0.10 I/Ino 0.10 I/Ino blocking

Treatment isolator status on DC fail Treatment isolator status not plausible Blocking mode on failure Differential current supervision Time delay for diff-current supervision Limit value diff-current supervision -BZ Limit value diff-current supervision -CZ Diff-current supervision mode -BZ

6311

DIF SUP mode CZ

Monitoring

alarm only

Diff-current supervision mode -CZ

6312A 6313A 6315 6316 6317 6318 6320A 6401A

ZERO CR SUPERV I> ZERO CR CB SUP TIME I> MAN TRIP T-TRIP-Rel sup CTRL REL BU EF charact. fault rec mode

Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Protec. general Protec. general Osc. Fault Rec.

ON 0.50 I/Ino 7.00 sec 0.05 I/In 15.00 sec released blocked central

Zero crossing supervision Threshold for zero crossing supervision CB supervision time Limit value for circuit breaker test Supervision bin. input TRIP-Release Control release for bay units Earth fault characteristic switchover Mode of fault recording

6404 6405 6406 6407

MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME

Osc. Fault Rec. Osc. Fault Rec. Osc. Fault Rec. Osc. Fault Rec.

2.00 sec 0.20 sec 0.20 sec 0.40 sec

Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input

356

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Parameter Listing - Bay Unit

A.8

Parameter Listing - Bay Unit

Addr. 1101 1105 1141 1201 1202 1203 1206 1211

Setting Title CT STARPNT In PRIMARY T TRIP O/C PHASES I>> TI>> MEAS.REPET CHARACTER.

Function Power System Data Power System Data Power System Data O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Phases O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth

Setting Options TOWARDS LINE TOWARDS BUSBAR 10..20000 A 0.01..32.00 s ON OFF 0.05..25.00 IN 0.00..60.00 s YES NO NORMAL INVERSE VERY INVERSE EXTREMELY INVERS. 0.05.. 25.00 IN 0.00..60.00 s infinite 0.10..4.00 IN 0.05..10.00 s 0 infinite FUNDAMENTAL TRUE RMS I>> UNDELAYED I>/Ip UNDELAYED INEFFECTIVE ON OFF 0.05..25.00 IN 0.00..60.00 s YES NO NORMAL INVERSE VERY INVERSE EXTREMELY INVERS 0.05..25.00 IN 0.00..60.00 s unendlich 0.10..4.00 IN 0.05..10.00 s 0 infinite

Default Setting TOWARDS LINE 400 A 0.15 s ON 2.00 IN 0.10 s NO NORMAL INVERSE

Comments Current transformer polarity Primary rated current Minimum trip command duration O/C protection for phase faults Pick-up value of the high-set stage I>> Trip time delay of the high-set stage Measurement repetition Characteristic of the O/C stage Ip

1212 1213 1214 1215

I> TI> Ip TIp

1.00 IN 0.50 s 1.00 IN 0.50 s

Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage I> Trip time delay of the overcurrent stage I> Pick-up value inverse time O/C stage Ip Trip time delay inverse time O/C stage Ip RMS format for inverse time O/C protection Overcurrent stage valid for phase currents when the circuit breaker is manually closed O/C protection for earth faults Pick-up value of the high-set stage IE>> Trip time delay of the high-set stage IE>> Measurement repetitiong Characteristic of the O/C stage IEp

1216 1221

RMS FORMAT MAN.CLOSE

FUNDAMENTAL I>> UNDELAYED

1501 1502 1503 1506 1511

O/C EARTH IE>> TIE>> MEAS.REPET CHARACTER.

ON 0.50 IN 0.50 s NO NORMAL INVERS

1512 1513 1514 1515

IE> TIE> IEp TIEp

0.20 IN 0.50 s 0.10 IN 0.50 s

Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage IE> Trip time delay of the overcurrent stage IE> Pick-up value inverse time O/C stage IEp Trip time delay inverse time O/C stage IEp

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

357

Appendix

Addr. 1516 1521

Setting Title RMS FORMAT MAN.CLOSE

Function O/C Protection Earth O/C Protection Earth User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions User Logic Functions Back-Up Breaker Fail.Protection Back-Up Breaker Fail.Protection

Setting Options FUNDAMENTAL TRUE RMS IE>> UNDELAYED IE>/IEp UNDELAY. INEFFECTIVE 0.00..10.00 s 0.00..10.00 s 0.00..10.00 s 0.00..10.00 s NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES 0..9999 0..9999 0..9999 0..9999 ON OFF 0.10..4.00 IN

Default Setting FUNDAMENTAL IE>> UNDELAYED

Comments RMS format for inverse time O/C protection Overcurrent stage valid for phase currents when the circuit breaker is manually closed Delay time for 1st user defined annunciation Delay time for 2nd user defined annunciation Delay time for 3rd user defined annunciation Delay time for 4th user defined annunciation Processing of annunciation 1 by central unit Processing of annunciation 2 by central unit Processing of annunciation 3 by central unit Processing of annunciation 4 by central unit Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.1 Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.2 Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.3 Binary input annunciation (Fct.nr) by annunc.4 State of back-up circuit breaker failure prot. Current threshold of back-up breaker fail.prot Interface to central unit Switch on the blockage of busbar trip Switch off the blockage of busbar trip Circuit breaker trip test 1pole L1 Circuit breaker trip test 1pole L2 Circuit breaker trip test 1pole L3 Circuit breaker trip test 3pole Number of trip commands issued Summated current tripped IL1/In Summated current tripped IL3/In Summated current tripped IL2/In Last trip current IL1/In Last trip current IL2/In Last trip current IL3/In

2801 2802 2803 2804 2811 2812 2813 2814 2821 2822 2823 2824 3901 3911 4101 4201 4202 4401 4402 4403 4404 5604 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612

T-Annunc.1 T-Annunc.2 T-Annunc.3 T-Annunc.4 ANNUN1byCU ANNUN2byCU ANNUN3byCU ANNUN4byCU ANN1Fct.Nr ANN2Fct.Nr ANN3Fct.Nr ANN4Fct.Nr BackUp CBF B.U.CBF-I CU INTERF. BLOCKAGE BLOCKAGE CB TRIP CB TRIP CB TRIP CB TRIP Trip No =

0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0 0 0 0 OFF 0.50 IN

IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In=

IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In=

358

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Parameter Listing - Bay Unit

Addr. 5701 5702 5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 5711 5712 5713 5714 5715 5716 5717 5718 5719 3912 6101 ... 6120 6201 6301 ... 6316 6401 ... 6405 7101

Setting Title IL1[%] = IL2[%] = IL3[%] = IE[%] = IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = IE a = IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = IE = IDL1[%]= IDL2[%]= IDL3[%]= ISL1[%]= ISL2[%]= ISL3[%]= f [Hz]= B.U.CBF-T BINARY INPUT 1 ... BINARY INPUT 20 SIGNAL RELAY 1 LED 1 ... LED 16 TRIP RELAY 1 ... TRIP RELAY 5 Language

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments Current in phase L1 [%] = Current in phase L2 [%] = Current in phase L3 [%] = IE[%] = Current in phase L1 = Current in phase L2 = Current in phase L3 = Operational measurement: IEa= Normalized current IL1 = Normalized current IL2 = Normalized current IL3 = Normalized current IE = BZ: Differential current phase L1 [%] = BZ: Differential current phase L2 [%] = BZ: Differential current phase L3 [%] = BZ: Stabilising current phase L1 [%] = BZ: Stabilising current phase L2 [%] = BZ: Stabilising current phase L3 [%] = Frequency f [Hz] =

Back-Up Break.Fail.Prot. Marshalling ... Marshalling Marshalling Marshalling ... Marshalling Marshalling ... Marshalling Integrated Operation

0.06..60.00 s; +*

0.12 s

Time delay of back-up breaker failure prot. Binary input 1 ... Binary input 20 Signal relay 1 LED 1 ... LED 16 Trip relay 1 ... Trip relay 5

DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANCAIS ESPANOL ITALIANO PYCCK.

ENGLISH

Language

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

359

Appendix

Addr. 7120

Setting Title OPER.1st L.

Function Integrated Operation

Setting Options IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALISED IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALISED IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALISED IL1, IL2, IL3, IE I-DIFF. L1, I-DIFF. L2, I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1, I-RESTR. L2, I-RESTR. L3 PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMALISED 1..254 1..254 1..254 1..254 0..255 DIGSI V3 ASCII 1200 BAUD 2400 BAUD 4800 BAUD 9600 BAUD 19200 BAUD DIGSI V3 NO 2 STOP NO 1 STOP VDEW COMPATIBLE VDEW EXTENDED DIGSI V3 VDEW COMPATIBLE VDEW EXTENDED NO YES NO YES 160 194 IL1

Default Setting

Comments Display of measured values in the 1st line of the quiescent-state indication in 4-line mode

7121

OPER.1st L.

Integrated Operation Integrated Operation

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 1st line as primary or secondary (percent) values Display of measured values in the 2nd line of the quiescent-state indication in 4-line mode

7122

OPER.2nd L.

IL2

7123

OPER.2nd L.

Integrated Operation Integrated Operation

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 2nd line as primary or secondary (percent) values Display of measured values in the 3rd line of the quiescent-state indication in 4-line mode

7124

OPER.3rd L.

IL3

7125

OPER.3rd L.

Integrated Operationg Integrated Operation

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 3rd line as primary or secondary (percent) values Display of measured values in the 4th line of the quiescent-state indication in 4-line mode

7126

OPER.4th L.

IE

7127

OPER.4th L.

Integrated Operation PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces

SECONDARY

Display of measured values in the 4th line as primary or secondary (percent) values Device address Feeder address Substation address Function type in accordance with VDEW/ZVEI Device type Data format for PC-interface Transmission baud rate for PC-interface

7201 7202 7203 7208 7209 7211 7215

DEVICE ADD. FEEDER ADD. SUBST. ADD. FUNCT. TYPE DEVICE TYPE PC INTERF. PC BAUDRATE

DIGSI V3 9600 BAUD

7216

PC PARITY

PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces PC/System Interfaces

DIGSI V3

Parity and stop-bits for PC-interface

7221

SYS INTERF.

DIGSI V3

Data format for system-interface

7222 7227 7235

SYS MEASUR. SYS-SWITCH SYS-PARAMET

VDEW COMPATIBLE NO NO

Measurement format for system-interface Online-switch VDEW-DIGSI enabled Parameterizing via system-interface

360

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Parameter Listing - Bay Unit

Addr. 7402

Setting Title INITIATION

Function Fault Recordings

Setting Options STORAGE BY FD. STORAGE BY TRIP START WITH TRIP 0.30..5.00 s 0.05..0.50 s 0.05..0.50 s 0.10..5.00 s infinite 0.10..5.00 s DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME 50 Hz 60 Hz

Default Setting STORAGE BY FD.

Comments Initiation of data storage

7410 7411 7412 7431 7432 7812 7815 7899 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205

T MAX T-PRE T-POST T-BINARY IN T-KEYBOARD CHARAC. PH CHARAK. E FREQUENCY RESET RESET RESET RESET RESET

Fault Recordings Fault Recordings Fault Recordings Fault Recordings Fault Recordingsg SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS

2.00 s 0.20 s 0.20 s 0.40 s 0.40 s DEFINITE TIME DEFINITE TIME 50 Hz

Maximum time period of a fault recordingl Pre-trigger time for fault recording Post-fault time for fault recording Storage time by initiation via binary input Storage time by initiation via keyboardr Characteristic O/C protection phases Characteristic O/C protection earth Rated system frequency Reset of LED memories Reset of operational annunciation buffer Reset of fault annunciation buffer Reset of CB operation counters Reset of the total of interrupted currents

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

361

Appendix

A.9

List of information - Central Unit

Indications for IEC 60870-5-103 are always reported as ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for IEC 60870-5-103. If not, they are only reported as ON. New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (".._W"). For further information on the indications, please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1100-C151. For information on mapping and logical nodes for IEC 61 850, please refer to the manual SIPROTEC Distributed Busbar/Breaker Failure Protection IEC 61850 PIXIT Order No. C53000-G1176-C180-1. In columns "Event Log", "Trip Log" and "Ground Fault Log" the following applies: UPPER CASE NOTATION ON/OFF:fdefinitely set, not allocatable lower case notation ON/OFF: preset, allocatable *: <blank>: not preset, allocatable neither preset nor allocatable

In column "Marked in Oscill.Record" the following applies: UPPER CASE NOTATION M: fdefinitely set, not allocatable lower case notation M: *: <blank>: preset, allocatable not preset, allocatable neither preset nor allocatable

1. column Meaning: $00, .., $03 are variables which can be replaced automatically with $00 Number of the bay unit $01 Bay name $02 Name of the switching element (e.g. Isolator or circuit breaker) $03 Name of the bus zone 2. column Event buffer: Operational events and fault events: The abbreviations for the marshalling and pre-setting of the annunciations can be depicted in the following table.
Abbreviation off on on/off * off on on/off Matrix changeable yes yes yes yes Pre-setting ON allocated allocated allocated allocated OFF allocated allocated allocated allocated

Earth fault alarm not in 7SS52 V4.

362

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

List of information - Central Unit

3. column IEC 60870-5-103: Column Type (Function Bus Zone): Information that belong to the bus zones are of type 207. In this type up to 256 information numbers can be addressed. The type is divided into 12 blocks with 21 information numbers each. The blocks are assigned to the bus zones. The basic type number is given in brackets. Example:
Bus Zone n 1 Information Number m 1 ... 21 ... 12 ... 1 ... 21 ... 207 Type 207 Effective Information Number x 1 ... 21 ... 232 ... 252

The effective information number can be calculated with the following formula: x = 21 (n - 1) + m

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

363

Appendix

Column Type (Function Bay Unit): Informationen that belong to the bay units are of types 195 to 206. In these types up to 256 information numbers can be addressed. These types are divided into 4 blocks each with 63 information numbers each. The blocks are assigned to the bay units. The basic type number is given in brackets. Example:

Bay Unit No. 1

n 1

Information Number m 1 ... 63

Type 195

Effective Information Number x 1 ... 63

1 ... 63

195

64 ... 126

1 ... 63

195

127 ... 189

1 ... 63

195

190 ... 252

1 ... 63

196

1 ... 63

... 8

... 4

... 1 ... 63

... 196

... 190 ... 252

... 48

... 4

... 1 ... 63

... 206

... 190 ... 252

The effective information number of each type number can be calculated with the following formula: x = 63 (n - 1) + m Column Information number: The basic information number is given in brackets. Note Only the annuciations subject to general interrogation are reported as ON/OFF to the IEC 60870-5-103 interface. Indications that are not subject to general interrogation are only reported as ON.

364

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

List of information - Central Unit

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

3 4 5 15 16 51 55 56 60 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 95 110 113 203 301 302 303 320 321 322 323 10410 10411 10412

>Synchronize Internal Real Time Device Clock (>Time Synch) >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) >Reset LED (>Reset LED) >Test mode (>Test mode) >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Osc. Fault Rec. Device Device Device

SP_E v SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT_ Ev OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* on on on off on off on off on on

* * * * * * * * m * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

135 135 135 135 135 135

48 49 50 53 54 81

1 1 1 1 1 1

Device is Operational and Protec- Device ting (Device OK) Reset Device (Reset Device) Reset LED (Reset LED) Resume (Resume) Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Settings Check (Settings Check) Device Device Device Device Device Device Device Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device

194

on on off on off on off * on off * *

* * * * * * * * * * * on on * * * * * * * * K

* * * * * * * * * m

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

135 135

97 202

1 1

194

22

Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device Local setting change (Local change) Setting change in progress (Change in Prog.) Event lost (Event Lost) Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Waveform data deleted (Wave. deleted) Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Fault Event (Fault Event) Earth fault (Earth Fault) Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded (Warn Mem. Data) Device Device Device Device Osc. Fault Rec. Device Device Device Device

OUT_ on Ev OUT on OUT_ on Ev OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT on off * on off on off on off on off on off * on off on off

135 135 135 135 135

130 136 203 231 232

1 1 1 2 2

* * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter Device exceeded (Warn Mem. Para.) Warn: Limit of Memory Operation Device exceeded (Warn Mem. Oper.) Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded (Warn Mem. New) Diff-current superv. CZ (group alarm) (Id-sup CZ M) Diff-current supervision Check Zone L1 (Id-sup CZ L1) Diff-current supervision Check Zone L2 (Id-sup CZ L2) Device Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring

194 194 194

205 206 207

1 1 1

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation no yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes yes yes

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

365

Appendix

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

10413 10415 10416 10417 10418 10420 10421 10422 10423 10424 10425 10426 10427 10428 10429 10430 10431 10432 10433 10434 10435 10436 10437 10439 10440 10441 10442 10443

Diff-current supervision Check Zone L3 (Id-sup CZ L3) Diff-current superv. BZ (group alarm) (Id-sup BZ M)

Monitoring Monitoring

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP IntSP OUT OUT

on off * * * * on off on off on off on off * * * * * * on off on off on off * * * * * * on off on off on off *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * m * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194

208 200 201 202 203 212 213 214 216 215 186 185 184 183 210 164

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Diff-current superv. BZ L1 (group Monitoring alarm) (Id-sup BZ L1 M) Diff-current superv. BZ L2 (group Monitoring alarm) (Id-sup BZ L2 M) Diff-current superv. BZ L3 (group Monitoring alarm) (Id-sup BZ L3 M) 15V supply supervision central unit (15V-superv CU) 24V supply supervision central unit (24V-superv CU) Battery supervision central unit (Batt. superv CU) Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring

Measured value superv. BU Monitoring (group alarm) (Meas sup BU M) Supply voltage superv. BU (group Monitoring alarm) (Supply sup BU M) Isolator fault alarm (Isol flt alarm) Monitoring Failure of isolator aux. voltage (g. Monitoring a.) (Bay DC fail M) Isolator fault: run time (group alarm) (Isol flt run M) Isolator position faulty (group alarm) (Isol flt pos M) Failure in auto testing (group alarm) (Flt autotest M) Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring

>Blocking of Breaker Failure Pro- BF-Protection tection (>Blocking BF) Blocking of Breaker Failure Protection (Blocking BF) Breaker Failure Protection blocked (BF blocked) Breaker Failure/Transfer Trip (g. a.) (Transf. Trip M) Timing error BF input (group alarm) (BF BI error M) Timing error BF release (group alarm) (BF rel error M) Trip command BF (group alarm) (Trip BF M) BF-Protection BF-Protection BF-Protection BF-Protection BF-Protection BF-Protection

194 194 194 194 194 194

165 180 181 182 176 189

1 2 1 1 2 1

Timing error BF impulse input (g. BF-Protection a.) (BF ImpBI errorM) Trip command BF external (Trip BF extern) >TRIP commands blocking (>TRIP blocking) TRIP commands blocking (TRIP blocking) TRIP commands blocked (TRIP blocked) BZ blocked selective (g. a.) (Block BZ sel M) IEC61850-info Device Device Device BB Protection

194

162

194 194

163 192

1 1

366

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

List of information - Central Unit

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

10444 10445 10446 10447 10448 10449 10450 10451 10453 10454 10455 10456 10457 10458 10459 10460 10461 10462 10465 10466 10467 10470 10471 10475 10476 10477 10478 10479

Blocking by supervision zero crossing (Block ZeroCross)

Monitoring

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP OUT

* * * * * * * on off * * * * on off on off on off on on

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* m * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 187 188 152 151 178 160 161 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 194 222 1 yes 194 220 1 yes 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 170 171 172 173 174 175 211 157 156 158 190 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

Device Trip (group alarm) (Device BB Protection trip M) Trip command L1 (group alarm) (Trip L1 M) Trip command L2 (group alarm) (Trip L2 M) Trip command L3 (group alarm) (Trip L3 M) BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection

Trip command BBP (group alarm) BB Protection (Trip BBP M) Trip repeat BU (group alarm) (Tri- BB Protection pRep BU M) Transformer reversed in polarity (g.a.) (TF RevPol M) Bay out of service (group alarm) (out of serv. M) Maintenance of bay (group alarm) (Maintenance M) Protec. general BB Protection BB Protection

Bay unit failure (group alarm) (BU BB Protection fail M) Circuit breaker fault (group alarm) BB Protection (CB fault M) Trip command L1 check zone (Trip L1 CZ) Trip command L2 check zone (Trip L2 CZ) Trip command L3 check zone (Trip L3 CZ) >Reset blocking of diff-current superv. (>Reset Id-Block) Reset blocking of diff-current superv. (Reset Id-Block) Blocking of diff-current superv. reset (Id-Block Reset) >Reset blocking of isolator fault (>Reset IsoMalBl) Reset blocking of isolator fault (Reset IsoMalBl) Blocking of isolator fault reset (IsoMalBl Reset) Isolator oper. prohibitted (isol.fault) (IsoProhib/fault) BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring

OUT_ on Ev SP OUT on on

* *

LED BI LED LED

OUT_ on Ev OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP OUT on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

* * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED

Isolator oper. prohibitted (mainte- Monitoring nance) (IsoProhib/Maint) Error without protection blocking (Err PROT ACTIVE) BB Protection

Error with protection blocking (Err BB Protection PROT BLOCK) Check zone released (CZ release) >Earth fault characteristic active (>EF charact.) Earth fault characteristic active (EF charact.) BB Protection BB Protection BB Protection

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

367

Appendix

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

10480 10481 10484 10485 10486 10487 10488 10489 10490 10491 10492 10493 10494 10495 10496 10497 30053 009.0100 009.0101 009.0102 176.1061 176.1062 176.1063 176.1071 176.1072 176.1073 176.1081 176.1082

Bus bar protection complete blocked (BB prot blkd) BF protection complete blocked (BF prot blkd) BB protection complete blocked by error (BBP blckd err)

IEC61850-info IEC61850-info IEC61850-info

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP OUT OUT SP IntSP OUT SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * on off * * on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off * on off on off on off kg kg kg * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * k k k k k

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED LED LED BI LED LED LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL 194 194 194 194 194 194 167 168 169 195 196 197 1 1 1 1 1 1 yes yes yes yes yes yes 194 194 179 159 1 1 yes yes

BB protection partially blocked by IEC61850-info error (BBP Pblckd err) Timing error trip release (TripRel- Monitoring Err) >TRIP-Release for external command (>TRIP-Release) BF protection complete blocked by error (BF blckd err) BB Protection IEC61850-info

BF protection partially blocked by IEC61850-info error (BF Pblckd err) >Blocking back-up breaker fail.prot. BU (>Block BF of BU) Blocking back-up breaker fail.prot. BU (Block BF of BU) Back-up breaker fail.prot. of BU blocked (Blkd BF of BU) >Blocking O/C protection of BU (>Block O/C BU) Blocking O/C protection of BU (Block O/C BU) O/C protection of BU blocked (Blkd O/C BU) BF protection BZ blocked (group alarm) (BF BZ blkd M) BF-Protection BF-Protection BF-Protection Protec. general Protec. general Protec. general BF-Protection

Trip command BZ blocked (group BB Protection alarm) (TRIP BZ blkd M) Fault recording is running (Fault rec. run.) Failure EN100 Modul (Failure Modul) Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 (Ch1) (Fail Ch1) Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 (Ch2) (Fail Ch2) Bay $00 out of service (OutOfServ. $00) Maintenance of bay $00 (Mainten. $00) Bay unit $00 failure (BU fail $00) Trip repeat $00 phase L1 (TripRep $00 L1) Trip repeat $00 phase L2 (TripRep $00 L2) Trip repeat $00 phase L3 (TripRep $00 L3) No release of TRIP command $00 (noTripRel $00) Breaker failure/Transfer trip $00 (TransfTrip $00) Osc. Fault Rec. EN100-Modul 1 EN100-Modul 1 EN100-Modul 1 BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU

368

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

List of information - Central Unit

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

176.1091 176.1092 176.1093 176.1094 176.1101 176.1102 176.1104 176.1110 176.1112 176.1113 176.1115 176.1117 176.1118 176.1120 176.1122 176.1123 176.1125 176.1127 176.1128 176.1130 176.1132 176.1133 176.1134 176.1135 176.1136 176.1141 176.1142 176.1143 176.1144 176.1145 176.1146 176.1147 176.1148 176.1171

Timing error BF input $00 L1 (BF- BU BIErr $00 L1) Timing error BF input $00 L2 (BF- BU BIErr $00 L2) Timing error BF input $00 L3 (BF- BU BIErr $00 L3) Timing error BF input $00 3pole (BFBIErr $00 3P) Timing error BF release $00 1pole (BFRlErr $00 1P) Timing error BF release $00 3pole (BFRlErr $00 3P) BU BU BU

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT DP OUT OUT DP OUT OUT DP OUT OUT DP OUT OUT DP OUT OUT OUT DP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg k k kg k k kg k k kg k k kg k k kg kg kg * * * * * * * * kg

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL

Timing error BF impulse input $00 BU (BFBIImpErr $00) $01 Isolator $02 ($01 $02) Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 (FltR $01 $02) Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 (FltP $01 $02) $01 Isolator $02 ($01 $02) Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 (FltR $01 $02) Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 (FltP $01 $02) $01 Isolator $02 ($01 $02) Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 (FltR $01 $02) Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 (FltP $01 $02) $01 Isolator $02 ($01 $02) Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 (FltR $01 $02) Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 (FltP $01 $02) $01 Isolator $02 ($01 $02) Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 (FltR $01 $02) Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 (FltP $01 $02) Failure of isolator aux. voltage $00 (BayDC fail $00) BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU

$01 circuit breaker $02 ($01 $02) BU Circuit breaker fault $01 (CB fault BU $01) Input 1 from $00 (IN1 BU $00) Output 1 to $00 (OUT1 BU $00) Input 2 from $00 (IN2 BU $00) Output 2 to $00 (OUT2 BU $00) Input 3 from $00 (IN3 BU $00) Output 3 to $00 (OUT3 BU $00) Input 4 from $00 (IN4 BU $00) Output 4 to $00 (OUT4 BU $00) BU BU BU BU BU BU BU BU

15V supply supervision $00 (15V- BU superv $00)

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

369

Appendix

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

176.1172 176.1173 176.1174 176.1175 176.1190 176.1195 176.1339 176.1349 176.1365 177.1321 177.1322 177.1323 177.1326 177.1327 177.1328 177.1331 177.1332 177.1333 177.1334 177.1335 177.1336 177.1337 177.1338 177.1341 177.1342 177.1343 177.1344 177.1346 177.1347 177.1348 177.1352 177.1353

5V supply supervision $00 (5Vsuperv $00) 0V supply supervision $00 (0Vsuperv $00) Battery supervision $00 (BattSuperv $00) Measured value supervision ISUM $00 (MeasInSup $00) Failure in automatic testing $00 (Flt aut $00) Transformer reversed in polarity $00 (TF RevPol $00) Block Trip command for BB by $00 (BlkTrip BB $00)

BU BU BU BU BU BU BU

OUT OUT OUT OUT

kg kg kg kg

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * k * * * * * * * k k k * * * k k

* * * *

LED LED LED LED LED

REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL FS REL REL FS REL REL REL REL REL REL REL FS REL REL REL REL

OUT_ k Ev OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP OUT SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg * * kg kg kg kg kg kg * * * * kg kg kg * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BE LED LED BE LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BE LED LED LED LED

Block BF protection for BB by $00 BU (BlkBF BB $00) Timing error back-up BF input $00 (BF BUBIErr $00) BU

Id-sup $03 L1-2 (Id-supL1-2 $03) Protection Zone Id-sup $03 L2-2 (Id-supL2-2 $03) Protection Zone Id-sup $03 L3-2 (Id-supL3-2 $03) Protection Zone Id-sup $03 L1-3 (Id-supL1-3 $03) Protection Zone Id-sup $03 L2-3 (Id-supL2-3 $03) Protection Zone Id-sup $03 L3-3 (Id-supL3-3 $03) Protection Zone Id-sup $03 M (Id-sup $03 M) Protection Zone Protection Zone Transfer Trip $03 (TrfTrip $03)

Blocked by fault $03 ($03 blocked Protection Zone Flt) >Block $03 (>Blk $03) Blocked by BI $03 ($03 blocked BI) >Block Trip command for $03 (>Blk Trip $03) Block Trip command $03 ($03 BlkTrip) Blocked Trip command $03 ($03 BlkdTrip) Trip command for $03 (group alarm) (Trip $03 M) Trip command for $03 L1 (Trip $03 L1) Trip command for $03 L2 (Trip $03 L2) Trip command for $03 L3 (Trip $03 L3) >Block BF protection for $03 (>Blk BF $03) Block BF protection for $03 ($03 BlkBF) Blocked BF protection for $03 ($03 BlkdBF) Trip command BF for $03 phase L1 (Trip BF $03 L1) Trip command BF for $03 phase L2 (Trip BF $03 L2) Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone

370

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

List of information - Central Unit

FNo.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

177.1354 177.1360 177.1361 177.1362 177.1363 -

Trip command BF for $03 phase L3 (Trip BF $03 L3) >Trip command for $03 (>Trip $03) Timing error external Trip command $03 (TripBIErr $03)

Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone

OUT SP OUT OUT OUT IntSP _Ev OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP _Ev IntSP IntSP IntSP

* kg * * * * kg kg kg k K kg kg *

k * k k *

* * * * * *

LED LED BE LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BE

REL REL FS REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL 194 19 1 no 135 208 1 no

No release of Trip command $03 Protection Zone (noTripRel $03) Trip command by BI for $03 (Trip Protection Zone BI $03) Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Disturbance CFC (Distur.CFC) Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Reset LED (Reset LED) Reset meter (Meter res) Stop data transmission (DataStop) Test mode (Test mode) Unlock data transmission via BI (UnlockDT) Device Device Device Device Protec. general Device Device Device

* * * *

* m * *

Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Osc. Fault Rec.

* * * *

LED LED LED

REL REL REL

194 194

20 21

1 1

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

General Interrogation yes yes

Event Log On/Off

Chatter Blocking

Information No.

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Data Unit

Type ofInformatio n

Log-Buffer

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Type

LED

371

Appendix

A.10 List of Information - Bay Unit

FNo.

Short Text

Logical Function

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix Compatible Annunciation

IEC 60870-5-103 Annunc. for Fault Rec. Buffer (Tagged)

Type (p: Corresponds to parameter Function type) p p p p 135 p p p p p p p 135 135 135 p 135 135

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

General Interrogation

3 4 5 7 8 11 12 13 14 51 52 55 56 59 60 61 62 95 100 101 110 111 112 113 115 116 120 121 122 123 124 129 135 140 143 144

>Time Synchro >Start FltRec >LED reset >ParamSelec.1 >ParamSelec.2 >Annunc. 1 >Annunc. 2 >Annunc. 3 >Annunc. 4 Dev.operative Prot. operat.

>Time synchronization >Start fault recording >Reset LED indicators >Parameter group selection 1 (with >ParamSelec2) >Parameter group selection 2 (with >ParamSelec1) >User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 Device operative / healthy Any protection operative Reset Device on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on on on on on/off on/off on/off on on on on on on

IO IO IO IO IO IOT IOT IOT IOT 1 1 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 1 CA CA CA CA GI GI GI 19 20 21 22 CA CA CA CA CA CA CA GI GI GI GI GI GI TA TA TA TA 27 28 29 30 81 18 4 5

Initial start

Initial start of processor system Real time response to LSA

LED reset LogMeasBlock Test mode Param.running Wrong SW-vers Wrong dev. ID Annunc. lost Annu. PC lost

LED Reset Logging and measuring functions blocked Test mode Parameters are being set Wrong software-version Wrong device identification Annunciations lost (buffer overflow) Annunciations for PC lost Annunciations for LSA lost Fault tag lost

1 1 on TA

Flt.Buff.Over E.F. Buff.Over Oper.Ann.Inva Flt.Ann.Inval E/F.Prot Inva Stat.Buff.Inv LED Buff.Inva VDEW-StateInv Chs Error

Fault annunciation buffer overflow E/F buffer overflow Operational annunciations invalid Fault annunciations invalid Earth fault annunciations invalid Statistic annunciation buffer invalid LED annunciation buffer invalid VDEW state invalid Error in check sum General internal failure of device on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off

1 1 1

CA

GI GI GI

Failure 15V Failure 5V

Failure of internal 15 VDC power supply Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply

372

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Information Number 130 131 136 47 163 164

Binary Input I Binary Output O (LED, alarm relay) Trip Relay T

Event Log On/Off Measured Value

Data Unit

List of Information - Bay Unit

FNo.

Short Text

Logical Function

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix Compatible Annunciation

IEC 60870-5-103 Annunc. for Fault Rec. Buffer (Tagged)

Type (p: Corresponds to parameter Function type) 135 135 p p p 135 135 135 135 135 135 150 150 150 150 150 150 151 151

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

General Interrogation

145 150 154 160 161 177 203 204 205 206 244 301 302 303 501 502 511 521 522 523 561 601 602 603 604 651 652 653 654 694 1000 1004 1005 1006 1015 1016 1017 1156 1174 1181 1401 1402

Failure 0V Failure I/O Fail. TripRel

Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply Failure in I/O module Supervision trip circuit Common alarm

on/off on/off on/off on/off O on/off on on on on M on/off on on on/off on/off on on on on on on M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M IOT on/off on IOT IOT O

1 1 1 1 1 CA CA CA

GI GI GI GI GI

I supervision Fail.Battery Flt.RecDatDel Flt.Rec.viaBI Flt.Rec.viaKB Flt.Rec.viaPC D Time= Syst.Flt Fault E/F Det.

Measured value supervision of currents Failure: Battery Fault recording data deleted Fault recording initiated via bin.input Fault recording initiated via keyboard Fault recording initiated via PC interf Diff. time of clock synchronism Fault in the power system Flt. event w. consecutive no. E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw. General fault detection of device

1 1 1

TA TA TA

2 2 1 2 GI GI TA

Dev. Drop-off Device Trip IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In= Manual Close IL1[%] = IL2[%] = IL3[%] = IE[%] = IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = IEa = f [Hz]= Trip No = IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In= IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In= >CB Test CB in Test CB Test Trip >b.u. CBF on >b.u. CBF off

General drop-off of device General trip of device Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In) Interrupted current: Phase L2(I/In) Interrupted current: Phase L3(I/In) Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse) Current in phase IL1 [%] = Current in phase IL2 [%] = Current in phase IL3 [%] = IE [%] = Current in phase IL1 = Current in phase L2 = Current in phase L3 = Operational measurement: IEa= Frequency f [Hz] = Number of trip commands issued Summated current tripped IL1/In Summated current tripped IL2/In Summated current tripped IL3/In Last trip current L1 IL1/In= Last trip current L2 IL2/In= Last trip current L3 IL3/In= >CB test start Circuit breaker test in progress Circuit breaker test: General trip >Switch on back-up breaker fail. prot. >Switch off back-up breaker fail. prot.

2 4 4 4 1

TA

1 1

GI

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Information Number 165 170 36 46 32 204 205 206 231 232 233 151 161 171 172 173 211 74 81

Binary Input I Binary Output O (LED, alarm relay) Trip Relay T

Event Log On/Off Measured Value

Data Unit

373

Appendix

FNo.

Short Text

Logical Function

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix Compatible Annunciation

IEC 60870-5-103 Annunc. for Fault Rec. Buffer (Tagged)

Type (p: Corresponds to parameter Function type) 166 166 166 166 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 p p p p p 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

General Interrogation

1403 1451 1452 1453 1455 1471 1701 1702 1704 1711 1712 1714 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779

>b.u. CBF blk. b.u. CBF off b.u. CBF act. b.u. CBF act. b.u. CBF flt. b.u. CBF Trip >O/C Ph on >O/C Ph off >O/C Ph block >O/C E on >O/C E off >O/C E block >I>> block >I> block >Ip block >IE>> block >IE> block >IEp block O/C Ph off O/C Ph block O/C Ph active

>Block back-up breaker failure protect. Back-up breaker fail.prot. switched off Back-up breaker fail.prot. is active Back-up breaker failure prot. is active Back-up breaker fail. prot.: fault det. Trip by back-up breaker failure prot. >Switch on O/C protection phase >Switch off O/C protection phase >Block overcurrent protection phase >Switch on overcurrent protection earth >Switch off overcurrent protec. earth >Block overcurrent protection earth >Overcurrent protection:block stage I>> >Overcurrent protection:block stage I> >Overcurrent protection:block stage Ip >Overcurrent protec.: block stage IE>> >Overcurrent protection:block stage IE> >Overcurrent protection:block stage IEp Overcurrent prot. phase is switched off Overcurrent prot. phase is blocked Overcurrent prot. phase is active O/C protection phase is switched off I> O/C protection phase is switched off Ip

on/off on/off on/off

IOT OT OT OT on on OT OT IOT IOT 1 2 2 TA GI 153 155 171 1 GI 151

on/off

IOT IOT IOT

on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off

IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT OT OT OT 1 1 1 IOT OT OT 1 1 1 OT OT OT OT OT on on on on on on on on on 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 CA CA CA CA CA GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI 28 29 30 84 64 65 66 67 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 1 GI GI GI GI 23 24 25 26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GI GI GI GI GI GI GI 1 2 3 4 5 6 21

on/off on/off on/off

O/C E off O/C E block O/C E active

O/C protection earth is switched off O/C protection earth is blocked O/C protection earth is active O/C prot. earth is switched off IE> O/C prot. earth is switched off IEp

on/off on/off

O/C Gen.Fault Fault L1 Fault L2 Fault L3 Fault E Fault L1 Fault L1E Fault L2 Fault L2E Fault L12 Fault L12E Fault L3 Fault L3E Fault L13

General fault detection O/C O/C fault detection phase L1 O/C fault detection phase L2 O/C fault detection phase L3 O/C fault detection earth O/C fault detection L1 only O/C fault detection L1-E O/C fault detection L2 only O/C fault detection L2-E O/C fault detection L1-L2 O/C fault detection L1-L2-E O/C fault detection L3 only O/C fault detection L3-E O/C fault detection L1-L3

374

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Information Number

Binary Input I Binary Output O (LED, alarm relay) Trip Relay T

Event Log On/Off Measured Value

Data Unit

List of Information - Bay Unit

FNo.

Short Text

Logical Function

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix Compatible Annunciation

IEC 60870-5-103 Annunc. for Fault Rec. Buffer (Tagged)

Type (p: Corresponds to parameter Function type) 60 60 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

General Interrogation

1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1791 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608

Fault L13E Fault L23 Fault L23E Fault L123 Fault L123E Fault E O/C Gen.Trip I>> Fault I>> Fault L1 I>> Fault L2 I>> Fault L3 T-I>> expired I>> Trip I> Fault I> Fault L1 I> Fault L2 I> Fault L3 T-I> expired I> Trip Ip Fault Ip Fault L1 Ip Fault L2 Ip Fault L3 3 T-Ip expired Ip Trip IE>> Fault T-IE>> expired IE>> Trip IE> Fault T-IE> expired IE> Trip IEp Fault T-IEp expired IEp Trip >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off

O/C fault detection L1-L3-E O/C fault detection L2-L3 O/C fault detection L2-L3-E O/C fault detection L1-L2-L3 O/C fault detection L1-L2-L3-E O/C fault detection E only O/C general trip command O/C fault detection stage I>> O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L3 O/C time TI>> expired O/C protection I>> phase trip ) O/C fault detection stage I> O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L3 O/C time TI> expired O/C protection I> phase trip O/C fault detection Ip O/C fault detection Ip phase L1 O/C fault detection Ip phase L2 O/C fault detection Ip phase L3 O/C time TIp expired O/C protection Ip phase trip O/C fault detection IE>> earth O/C time TIE>> expired O/C protection IE>> earth trip O/C fault detection IE> earth O/C time TIE> expired O/C protection IE> earth trip O/C fault detection IEp earth O/C time TIEp expired O/C protection IEp earth trip >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off

on on on on on on on on OT OT OT OT OT on OT OT on OT OT OT OT v OT OT on OT OT OT OT on OT OT on on OT OT OT on on OT OT OT on on OT OT OT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 CA TA

2 2 2 2 2 CA

GI GI GI

2 2 2 2 2 CA

GI GI GI

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 CA

GI GI GI

GI

GI

GI

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Information Number 40 41 42 43 44 45 68 46 47 48 49 91 50 51 52 53 90 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 92 64 65 66

Binary Input I Binary Output O (LED, alarm relay) Trip Relay T

Event Log On/Off Measured Value

Data Unit

375

Appendix

FNo.

Short Text

Logical Function

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix Compatible Annunciation

IEC 60870-5-103 Annunc. for Fault Rec. Buffer (Tagged)

Type (p: Corresponds to parameter Function type) 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

General Interrogation

7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 7628 7629 7630 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 7642 7643 7644 7645 7646 7650 7651 7652 7656

>Isolator5on >Isolator5off >CBF L1 >CBF L2 >CBF L3 >CBF puls >CBF release >TRIP release >CB OFF >CB man.close >CB not ready >Bay o.of ser. >CBF 3-pole >SVS Frg. 3pol >CB ON >Maintenance >b.u.CBF L1 >b.u.CBF L2 >b.u.CBF L3 >b.u.CBF 3pol >Blk.BB TRIP BB flt.detect BB Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 BB intertrip Bay o.of serv. Maintenance CB not plaus. CBF Trip L123 End-Flt. Trip Trip blocked CBF-Prot.bloc Fail Com.CU Param.f.CU Fail MV.Offs. CT inversion

>Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker failure pulse >Circuit breaker failure release >Trip release >Circuit breaker open >Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker not ready >Bay out of service >Circuit breaker failure start 3-pole >Circuit breaker failure release 3-pole >Circuit breaker closed n >Maintenance of bay >Back-up breaker failure start phase L1 >Back-up breaker failure start phase L2 >Back-up breaker failure start phase L3 >Back-up breaker failure start 3-pole >Block TRIP commands of whole busbar Busbar protection: Fault detected Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 Busbar protection: Intertrip Bay is out of service Maintenance of bay State of circuit breaker not plausible CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip phase L123 Trip is blocked by Central Unit CBF protection blocked by Central Unit Failure in communication w.Central Unit Receiving parameters from Central Unit Failure in offset of measured values Inversion polarity of curr. transformer

on/off on/off on on on on on/off on/off on/off on on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on/off on/off on/off on on on/off on/off on/off on on/off on/off

IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT IOT 2 OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT OT O 1 1 O OT 1 GI GI 121 122 129 1 2 2 TA TA 124 125 126 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 GI TA TA TA TA TA 90 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 1 1 1 1 1 GI TA TA TA TA 83 84 85 86 87 1 1 1 1 1 GI GI TA TA TA 77 78 79 80 81 1 1 1 1 1 1 TA TA TA TA TA TA 70 71 72 73 74 75

376

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Information Number

Binary Input I Binary Output O (LED, alarm relay) Trip Relay T

Event Log On/Off Measured Value

Data Unit

List of Information - Bay Unit

FNo.

Short Text

Logical Function

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix Compatible Annunciation

IEC 60870-5-103 Annunc. for Fault Rec. Buffer (Tagged)

Type (p: Corresponds to parameter Function type)

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

General Interrogation

7657 7658 7659 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7690 7696 7697 7698 7699

BB TRIP block SVS SS block. Test mode IDL1 [%] = IDL2 [%] = IDL3 [%] = ISL1 [%] = ISL2 [%] = ISL3 [%] = IDL1 = IDL2 = IDL3 = ISL1 = ISL2 = ISL3 = IL1= IL2= IL3= IE= >Blk.BF of BB Annunc. 1 Annunc. 2 Annunc. 3 Annunc. 4

TRIP commands of whole busbar blocked BF (ext.start) of whole busbar blocked Test mode of protective functions BZ: Differential current phase L1 [%] BZ: Differential current phase L2 [%] BZ: Differential current phase L3 [%] BZ: Stabilizing current phase L1 [%] BZ: Stabilizing current phase L2 [%] BZ: Stabilizing current phase L3 [%] BZ: Differential current phase L1 BZ: Differential current phase L2 BZ: Differential current phase L3 BZ: Stabilizing current phase L1 BZ: Stabilizing current phase L2 BZ: Stabilizing current phase L3 Normalized current IL1 = Normalized current IL2 = Normalized current IL3 = Normalized current IE = >Block.BF (ex.start) of whole busbar User defined annunciation 1 User defined annunciation 2 User defined annunciation 3 User defined annunciation 4

on/off on/off on/off M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on

OT OT OT

IOT OT OT OT OT

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Information Number

Binary Input I Binary Output O (LED, alarm relay) Trip Relay T

Event Log On/Off Measured Value

Data Unit

377

Appendix

A.11 Group Alarms - Central Unit

Abbreviations $00, .., $03 are variables which are replaced automatically with $00 Number of the bay unit $01 Bay name $02 Name of the switching element (e.g. Isolator or circuit breaker) $03 Name of the bus zone BUnn Bay number 01 to 48 BSZz Modules for protection processing BSZ1, BSZ2, BSZ3 Ln Phase L1, L2, L3 BZnn Bus zone 01 to12 Isoln Isolator 1 to 5
Group Alarm FNo. 10476 Description Error with protection blocking FNo. 10455 10426 10428 10427 10443 10410 10415 176.1171 176.1172 176.1173 10423 10444 10475 Error without protection blocking 10426 10428 10427 10410 10415 10420 10421 10422 176.1174 Bay unit failure Failure of isolator aux. voltage (group alarm)1 Isolator position faulty (group alarm) 1 Isolator fault: run time (group alarm) 1 BZ blocked selective (g. a.) Diff-current superv. CZ (group alarm) 2 Diff-current superv. BZ (group alarm) 3 15V supply supervision $00 5V supply supervision $00 0V supply supervision $00 Measured value superv. BU (group alarm) Blocking by supervision zero crossing (Block ZeroCross) Failure of isolator aux. voltage (g. a.) 4 Failure of isolator aux. voltage (g. a.) 4 Isolator fault: run time (group alarm) 4 Diff-current superv. CZ (group alarm)5 Diff-current superv. BZ (group alarm) 6 15V supply supervision central uni 24V supply supervision central uni Battery supervision central unit Battery supervision $00 BUnn Alarm Logical function BUnn BUnn BUnn, Isoln BUnn, Isoln BZnn Ln BZnn, Ln, BSZ2/3 BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BZnn BUnn BUnn, Isoln BUnn, Isoln Ln BZn, Ln, BSZ2/3 Relates to

378

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Group Alarms - Central Unit

Group Alarm FNo. 10445 Device Trip Description FNo. 177.1342 177.1352 177.1343 177.1353 177.1344 177.1354 10449 Trip command BBP 177.1342 177.1343 177.1344 10436 Trip command BF 177.1352 177.1353 177.1354 177.1341 Trip command for $03 177.1342 177.1352 177.1343 177.1353 177.1344 177.1354 10446 Trip command L1 177.1342 177.1352 10447 Trip command L2 177.1343 177.1353 10448 Trip command L3 177.1344 177.1354 10450 Trip repeat BU 176.1071 176.1072 176.1073 10433 10434 Breaker Failure/Transfer Trip Timing error BF input 176.1082 176.1091 176.1092 176.1093 176.1096 10435 Timing error BF release 176.1101 176.1102 10437 10453 10454 Timing error BF impulse input Bay out of service Maintenance of bay 176.1104 176.1061 176.1062

Alarm Logical function Trip command for $03 L1 Trip command BF for $03 phase L1 Trip command for $03 L2 Trip command BF for $03 phase L1 Trip command for $03 L3 Trip command BF for $03 phase L3 Trip command for $03 L1 Trip command for $03 L2 Trip command for $03 L3 Trip command BF for $03 phase L1 Trip command BF for $03 phase L2 Trip command BF for $03 phase L3 Trip command for $03 L1 Trip command BF for $03 phase L1 Trip command for $03 L2 Trip command BF for $03 phase L2 Trip command for $03 L3 Trip command BF for $03 phase L3 Trip command for $03 L1 Trip command BF for $03 phase L1 Trip command for $03 L2 Trip command BF for $03 phase L2 Trip command for $03 L3 Trip command BF for $03 phase L3 Trip repeat $00 phase L1 Trip repeat $00 phase L2 Trip repeat $00 phase L3 Breaker failure/Transfer trip $00 Timing error BF input $00 L1 Timing error BF input $00 L2 Timing error BF input $00 L3 Timing error BF input $00 3pole Timing error BF release $00 1pole Timing error BF release $00 3pole Timing error BF impulse input $00 Bay $00 out of service Maintenance of bay $00) BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn Relates to

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

379

Appendix

Group Alarm FNo. 10471 10455 10451 10456 10424 Description Isolator oper. prohibitted Bay unit failure Transformer reversed in polarity Circuit breaker fault Supply voltage superv. BU FNo. 176.1062 176.1063 176.1195 176.1136 176.1171 176.1172 176.1173 10443 10426 10427 BZ blocked selective (g. a.) Failure of isolator aux. voltage Isolator fault: run time 177.1333 176.1134 176.1112 176.1117 176.1122 176.1127 176.1132 10428 Isolator position faulty (group alarm) 176.1113 176.1118 176.1123 176.1128 176.1133 10410 Diff-current superv. CZ 10411 10412 10413 10415 Diff-current superv. BZ 177.1321 177.1322 177.1323 177.1326 177.1327 177.1328 10416 Diff-current superv. BZ L1 177.1321 177.1326 10417 Diff-current superv. BZ L2 177.1322 177.1327 10418 Diff-current superv. BZ L3 177.1323 177.1328

Alarm Logical function Maintenance of bay $00 Bay unit $00 failure Transformer reversed in polarity $00 Circuit breaker fault $01 15V supply supervision $00 5V supply supervision $00 0V supply supervision $00 Blocked by fault $03 Failure of isolator aux. voltage $00 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: run time $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Fault: dist. position $01 isolator $02 Diff-current supervision Check Zone L1 Diff-current supervision Check Zone L2 Diff-current supervision Check Zone L3 Id-sup $03 L1-2 Id-sup $03 L2-2 Id-sup $03 L3-2 Id-sup $03 L1-3 Id-sup $03 L2-3 Id-sup $03 L3-3 Id-sup $03 L1-2 Id-sup $03 L1-3 Id-sup $03 L2-2 Id-sup $03 L2-3 Id-sup $03 L3-2 Id-sup $03 L3-3 BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BZnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BZnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn BUnn Relates to

380

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Group Alarms - Central Unit

Group Alarm FNo. 10423 10429 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Measured value superv. BU Failure in auto testing FNo. 176.1175 176.1190

Alarm Logical function Measured value superv. $00 Failure in automatic testing $00 BUnn BUnn Relates to

If Parameter ISOL Malfunct(6302/CU) is set to Blocking . If Parameter DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) is set to Blocking . If Parameter DIF SUP mode BZ(6310/CU) is set to Blocking . If Parameter ISOL Malfunct (6302/CU) s set to alarm only. If Parameter DIF SUP mode CZ (6311/CU) is set to alarm only . If Parameter DIF SUP mode BZ (6310/CU) is set t oalarm only .

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

381

Appendix

A.12 Group Alarms - Bay Unit

Group Alarm FNo. 140 161 Description General internal failure of device Measured value supervision of currents General fault detection of device 161 161 FNo.

Alarm Logical function Only existing alarm is 161. Standard-Group Alarms for all Measured Value Supervisions. On BU the summation current will be monitored. Back-up breaker fail. prot.: fault det. General fault detection O/C Busbar protection: Fault detected Trip by back-up breaker failure prot. O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip phase L123

501

1455 1761 7630

511

General trip of device

1471 1791 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7643 7644

382

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Measured Value List - Central Unit

A.13 Measured Value List - Central Unit

Abbreviations Comments $00, .., $03 are variables which are replaced automatically by $00 Number of the bay unit $01 Bay name $02 Name of the switching element (e.g. isolator or circuit breaker) $03 Name of the bus zone Column Function: Checkzone Id, Is is not allocateable to the control center. Column Information No. (Function Bus Zone): The bus zones1 to12 are assigned to the Information numbers 100 to111. The basic-information number is given in brackets. Column Information No. (Function Bay Unit): The Information number corresponds to the number of the bay unit assigned by you. The basic Information number is given in brackets. Column Position: The positions of the information in a block correspond to the position given in the table. The basic-position number is given in brackets. Column Configurable in Matrix: Control display and Default display not in 7SS52 V4.
FNo. Description Function Information No. IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display

Function type

Compatibility

Data Unit

Position

10401 10402 10403 10404 10405 10406 176.1011 176.1012 176.1013 177.1301 177.1302 177.1303 177.1306 177.1307 177.1308

CZ: IdiffL1 (% I/Ino)= (CZ Id L1=) CZ: IdiffL2 (% I/Ino)= (CZ Id L2=) CZ: IdiffL3 (% I/Ino)= (CZ Id L3=) CZ: IstabL1 (% I/Ino)= (CZ Is L1=) CZ: IstabL2 (% I/Ino)= (CZ Is L2=) CZ: IstabL3 (% I/Ino)= (CZ Is L3=) Current $01 in phase L1= ($01 IL1=) Current $01 in phase L2= ($01 IL2=) Current $01 in phase L3= ($01 IL3=) $03 IDiffL1 (% I/Ino)= ($03 Id L1=) $03 IDiffL2 (% I/Ino)= ($03 Id L2=) $03 IDiffL3 (% I/Ino)= ($03 Id L3=) $03 IStabL1 (% I/Ino)= ($03 Is L1=) $03 IStabL2 (% I/Ino)= ($03 Is L2=) $03 IStabL3 (% I/Ino)= ($03 Is L3=)

CZ Id, Is CZ Id, Is CZ Id, Is CZ Id, Is CZ Id, Is CZ Id, Is BU BU BU Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone Protection Zone 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 (1) (1) (1) priv priv priv 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(100) priv (100) priv (100) priv (100) priv (100) priv (100) priv

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

383

Appendix

A.14 Measured Value List - Bay Unit

FNo.

Description

Function Information No.

IEC 60870-5-103

Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display

Function type

Compatibility

Data Unit

Position

5701 5702 5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 5711 5712 5713 5714 5715 5716 5717 5718 5719

IL1[%] = Current in phase L1 [%] = IL2[%] = Current in phase L2 [%] = IL3[%] = Current in phase L3 [%] = IE[%] = IE[%] = IL1 = Current in phaseL1 = IL2 = Current in phase L2 = IL3 = Current in phase L3 = IEa = Operational measurement: IEa = IL1= Normalized current IL1 = IL2= Normalized current IL2 = IL3= Normalized current IL3 = IE = Normalized current IE = IDL1[%]= BZ: Differential current phase L1 IDL2[%]= BZ: Differential current phase L2 IDL3[%]= BZ: Differential current phase L3 ISL1[%]= BZ: Stabilising current phase L1 ISL2[%]= BZ: Stabilising current phase L2 ISL3[%]= BZ: Stabilising current phase L3 f [Hz]= Frequency f [Hz] =

384

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

CFC

Marshalling - Central Unit

A.15 Marshalling - Central Unit

When the device leaves the factory, the annunciations for the binary inputs, relays, LEDs and function keys are preallocated for the maximum scope. For the preallocation, please refer to Table A-21, page 385.

Table A-21 Binary Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ... 12

Marshalling of the Binary Inputs Annunciation >Reset LED >Start FltRec >Time synchron empty empty >Reset Id-Block
>Reset

FNo. 5 4 3 10461 10465 ...

Comments Reset LED diplays Start fault recording Time synchronization empty empty Reset blocking of diff-current superv. >Reset blocking of isolator fault empty ... empty

IsoMalBl

empty ... empty

Table A-22 Relay 1 2 3 3 4

Marshalling of the Relay Annunciation Err PROT BLOCK Err PROT ACTIVE BU fail M Meas sup BU M 15V-superv CU 24V-superv CU Batt. superv CU Supply sup BU M FNo. 10476 10475 10455 10423 10420 10421 10422 10424 10429 10437 10435 10434 10410 10415 Comments Error with protection blocking Error without protection blocking Bay unit failure Measured value superv. BU 15V supply supervision central unit 24V supply supervision central unit Battery supervision central unit Supply voltage superv. BU Failure in auto testing not assigned Timing error BF impulse input Timing error BF release Timing error BF input Diff-current superv. CZ Diff-current superv. BZ

5 6 7

Flt autotest M not assigned BF ImpBI errorM BF rel error M BF BI error M

Id-sup CZ M Id-sup BZ M

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

385

Appendix

Relay 9

Annunciation CB fault M Bay DC fail M Isol flt run M Isol flt pos M Isol flt alarm

FNo. 10456 10426 10427 10428 10425 10442 10432 10454 10453 10470 10471 10450 10433 10445

Comments Circuit breaker fault Failure of isolator aux. voltage Isolator fault: run time Isolator position faulty Isolator fault alarm TRIP commands blocked Breaker Failure Protection blocked Maintenance of bay Bay out of service Isolator oper. prohibited Isolator oper. prohibited Trip repeat BU Breaker Failure/Transfer Trip Device Trip

10 11 12

TRIP blocked BF blocked Maintenance M out of serv. M

13

IsoProhib/fault IsoProhib/Maint

14 15 16

TripRep BU M Transf. Trip M Device Trip

Table A-23 LED 1 2 3

Marshalling of the LEDs Annunciation Err PROT BLOCK Err PROT ACTIVE BU fail M Meas sup BU M FNo 10476 10475 10455 10423 10420 10421 10422 10424 10429 10437 10435 10434 10410 10415 Comments Error with protection blocking Error without protection blocking Bay unit failure Measured value superv. BU 15V supply supervision central unit 24V supply supervision central unit Battery supervision central unit Supply voltage superv. BU Failure in auto testing not assigned Timing error BF impulse input Timing error BF release Timing error BF input Diff-current superv. CZ Diff-current superv. BZ

115V-superv CU 24V-superv CU) Batt. superv CU Supply sup BU M

5 6 7

Flt autotest M not assigned BF ImpBI errorM BF rel error M BF BI error M

Id-sup CZ M Id-sup BZ M

386

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Marshalling - Central Unit

LED 9

Annunciation CB fault M Bay DC fail M Isol flt run M Isol flt pos M Isol flt alarm

FNo 10456 10426 10427 10428 10425 10442 10432 10454 10453 10470 10471 10450 10433 10445 10446 10447 10448

Comments Circuit breaker fault Failure of isolator aux. voltage Isolator fault: run time Isolator position faulty Isolator fault alarm TRIP commands blocked Breaker Failure Protection blocked Maintenance of bay Bay out of service Isolator oper. prohibitted Isolator oper. prohibitted Trip repeat BU Breaker Failure/Transfer Trip Device Trip Trip command L1 Trip command L2 Trip command L3

10 11 12

TRIP blocked BF blocked Maintenance M out of serv. M

13

IsoProhib/fault IsoProhib/Maint

14 15 16 17 18 19

TripRep BU M Transf. Trip M Device trip M Trip L1 M Trip L2 M Trip L3 M

Table A-24 Function key F1 F2 F3 F4

Marshalling of the function keys Annunciation Alarm list Operational events Measured values Last fault

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

387

Appendix

A.16 Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS523

When the device is delivered, annunciations are marshalled to the binary inputs, relays, and LEDs for the maximum scope. The functional keys are pre-assigned. The marshalling can be found in Table A-25, page 388 to Table A-29, page 390.

Table A-25 Address 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120

Marshalling of the binary inputs of the bay unit 7SS523 1st display line BINARY INPUT1 BINARY INPUT 2 BINARY INPUT 3 BINARY INPUT 4 BINARY INPUT 5 BINARY INPUT 6 BINARY INPUT 7 BINARY INPUT 8 BINARY INPUT 9 BINARY INPUT 10 BINARY INPUT 11 BINARY INPUT 12 BINARY INPUT 13 BINARY INPUT 14 BINARY INPUT 15 BINARY INPUT16 BINARY INPUT 17 BINARY INPUT 18 BINARY INPUT 19 BINARY INPUT 20 2nd display line >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off >Isolator5on >Isolator5off >CBF L1 >CBF L2 >CBF L3 >CB man.close >CBF release >CB Test >CB OFF not marshalled >CB not ready >Bay o.of ser NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO FNo. 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7618 7615 1156 7617 1 7619 7620 Comment >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open >Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker failure release >CB test start >Circuit breaker open No function assigned to this input >Circuit breaker not ready >Bay out of service

NO: NO contact (active when energized) NC: NC contact (active when not energized)

Table A-26 Function key F1 F2 F3 F4

Default setting function keys Function Bay out of service CB test Maintenance mode

Transformer polarity reversal

388

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS523

Table A-27 Address 6201

Marshalling Signal Relays of the bay unit 7SS523 1st display line SIGNAL RELAY 1 2nd display line Bay o.of serv FNo. 7640 Comment Bay is out of service

Table A-28 Address 6401

Marshalling TRIP RELAYS of the bay unit 7SS523 1st display line TRIP RELAY 1 2nd display line BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CB Test L1 O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L2 CB Test L2 O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L3 O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 O/C Gen.Trip BB intertrip End-Flt. Trip FNo. 7631 7643 7632 7633 7636 1791 7631 7643 7632 7634 7637 1791 7631 7643 7632 7635 7638 1791 7631 7643 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 1791 7639 7644 Comment Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Intertrip End fault protection: Trip phase L123

6402

TRIP RELAY 2

6403

TRIP RELAY 3

6404

TRIP RELAY 4

6405

TRIP RELAY 5

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

389

Appendix

Table A-29 Address 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314

Marshalling LED indicators of the bay unit 7SS523 1st display line LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 LED 9 LED 10 LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 2nd display line >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off >Isolator5on >Isolator5off I supervision not marshalled Fail Com.CU BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 relay Trip BB intertrip End-Flt. Trip Bay o.of serv nm m m m m m m m m m m m m nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm FNo. 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 0161 1 7650 7631 7643 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 0511 7639 7644 7640 Comment >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open >Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open Measured value supervision of currents (group alarm) No function assigned to this output Failure in communication w.Central Unit Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 General trip of device Busbar protection: Intertrip End fault protection: Trip phase L123 Bay is out of service

6315 6316

LED 15 LED 16

nm: not memorized m: memorized

390

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Appendix

A.17 Marshalling - Bay Unit 7SS525

When the device is delivered, annunciations are marshalled to the binary inputs, relays, and LEDs for the maximum scope. The functional keys are pre-assigned. The marshalling can be found in Table A-25, page 388 to Table A-29, page 390.

Table A-30 Address 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110

Marshalling of the binary inputs of the bay unit 7SS525 1st display line BINARY INPUT1 BINARY INPUT 2 BINARY INPUT 3 BINARY INPUT 4 BINARY INPUT 5 BINARY INPUT 6 BINARY INPUT 7 BINARY INPUT 8 BINARY INPUT 9 BINARY INPUT 10 2nd display line >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >CB ON >CB OFF not marshalled not marshalled not marshalled >CB man.close NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO FNo. 7601 7602 7603 7604 7623 7617 1 1 1 7618 Comment >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Circuit breaker closed >Circuit breaker open No function assigned to this input No function assigned to this input No function assigned to this input >Circuit breaker manual close

NO: NO contact (active when energized) NC: NC contact (active when not energized)

Table A-31 Address 6201

Marshalling Signal Relays of the bay unit 7SS525 1st display line SIGNAL RELAY 1 2nd display line Bay o.of serv FNo. 7640 Comment Bay is out of service

391

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Appendix

Table A-32 Address 6401

Marshalling TRIP RELAYS of the bay unit 7SS525 1st display line TRIP RELAY 1 2nd display line BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CB Test L1 O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L2 CB Test L2 O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L3 O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 O/C Gen.Trip BB intertrip End-Flt. Trip FNo. 7631 7643 7632 7633 7636 1791 7631 7643 7632 7634 7637 1791 7631 7643 7632 7635 7638 1791 7631 7643 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 1791 7639 7644 Comment Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Intertrip End fault protection: Trip phase L123

6402

TRIP RELAY 2

6403

TRIP RELAY 3

6404

TRIP RELAY 4

6405

TRIP RELAY 5

Table A-33 Address 6301

Marshalling LED indicators of the bay unit 7SS525 1st display line LED 1 2nd display line Fail Com.CU nm FNo. 7650 Comment Failure in communication w.Central Unit

nm: not memorized m: memorized

392

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

A.18 Navigation Tree - Central Unit

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

3rd level 4th level 5th level EVENT LOG xx/yy >dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss .................... TRIP LOG xx/yy >Last Fault -> x 2nd Last Fault-> x 3rd Last Fault-> x ... 8th Last Fault-> x n-TE xx/yy >dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss WARNING xx/yy >dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss ....................

The following navigation tree gives an overview of the parameter blocks and the individual parameters that can be selected in the central unit of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and breaker failure protection. It shows the operations which are necessary to achieve certain setting options.

Table A-34

Navigation tree of the central unit

1st level

2nd level

CZ L1 L2 L3

Idiff x.x% x.x% x.x%

Istab x.x% x.x% x.x%

7SS5220-5FA31 1AA0 Bootsystem:V##.##.## Firmware: V##.##.## P-Set: V##.##.##

MENU

MAIN MENU xx/yy >Annunciations -> x Measurement -> x Control -> x Parameter -> x Test/Diagnosis-> x

Annunciations xx/yy >Event Log -> x Trip Log -> x Warnings -> x Set/Reset -> x

Navigation Tree - Central Unit

393

Table A-34
3rd level SET/RESET >Event Log Trip Log xx/yy -> x -> x 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

394
Operation.PRI >BU I,pri -> xx -> xx BUxx >BUxx IL1= BUxx IL2= BUxx IL3= BU I,PRI >BU01 ... BUxx xx/nn -> xx xx/nn ###A ###A ###A PERCENT xx/yy >CZ Id,Is -> xx BZ Id,Is -> xx BU I,% -> xx CZ ID,IS >CZ Id L1= CZ Is L1= CZ Id L2= CZ Is L2= CZ Id L3= CZ Is L3= xx/yy ##% ##% ##% ##% ##% ##% BZ ID,IS >BZ01 ... BZyy xx/yy ->xx ->xx BZyy >BZyy BZyy BZyy BZyy BZyy BZyy Id Is Id Is Id Is L1= L1= L2= L2= L3= L3= xx/nn ##% ##% ##% ##% ##% ##% BU I, % >BU01 ... BUxx xx/nn -> xx -> xx BUxx >BUxx IL1= BUxx IL2= BUxx IL3= xx/nn ##% ##% ##% xx/yy -> x -> x Taggings >Display Set xx/yy -> x -> x Display xx/yy >TRIP blocking Blocking BF OFF OFF

1st level

2nd level

Appendix

Main Menu

Annunciations

Measurement xx/yy >Operation.pri -> x PERCENT -> x

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Control >Taggings Interlock

Table A-34
3rd level Taggings OFF OFF SET xx/yy >TRIP blocking Blocking BF 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

1st level

2nd level

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Interlock xx/yy >TRIP blocking Blocking BF - - Device Config. xx/yy Masking (I/O) xx/yy >Binary Inputs -> x LED -> x Binary Output -> x Binary Inputs xx/yy >Binary Input1 -> ... Binary Input12 -> LED >LED 1 ... LED 32 xx/yy -> -> Binary Outputs xx/yy >Binary Output1 -> ... Binary Output16-> -

Main Menu

Control

PARAMETER xx/yy >Device Config. -> x Masking (I/O) -> x Substat. Data -> x Param. Group -> x Fault Recording-> x BU -> x Setup/Extras -> x

Navigation Tree - Central Unit

395

Table A-34
3rd level Subst. Data 5104 Frequency ## Hz 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

396
Param. Group >General BB Prot. BF Prot. BU Supervision General xx/yy 6106 Tmin TRIP #.##s xx/yy -> x -> x -> x -> x -> x General xx/yy 5401 PROT.TR BUS released General xx/yy 6318 CRTL REL BU >released General xx/yy 5103 AUT LED ACK >YES BB PROT. xx/yy 6101 STAB FAC BZ >#.## BB PROT. xx/yy 6102 Id> BZ >#.##I/Ino

1st level

2nd level

Appendix

Main Menu

Parameter

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Table A-34
3rd level Param.Group BB PROT. xx/yy 6103 STAB FAC CZ >#.## 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

1st level

2nd level

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

BB PROT. xx/yy 6104 Id> CZ >#.##I/Ino BF PROT. 6201 STAB FAC BF >#.## BU >BU01 ... BUnn xx/yy -> xx -> xx BUxx xx/yy xx12 Bay status out of service

Main Menu

Parameter

...

BUxx xx13 I> TRIP #.##I/In

xx/yy

Navigation Tree - Central Unit

Supervision xx/yy 6305 Blocking Mode >zone/phase

397

Table A-34
3rd level Param. Group Supervision xx/yy 6306 DIFF.SUPERV >ON 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

398
Supervision xx/yy 6308 Id> SUPERV BZ >#.##I/Ino Supervision xx/yy 6309 Id> SUPERV CZ >#.##I/Ino Supervision xx/yy 6310 DIF SUP mode BZ blocking Supervision xx/yy 6311 DIF SUP mode CZ alarm only Supervision xx/yy 6307 TIdiff SUPERV >#.##s Supervision xx/yy 6301 ISOL RUN TIME >#.##s Supervision xx/yy 6303 ISOL DC FAIL >old isolator status

1st level

2nd level

Appendix

Main Menu

Parameter

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Table A-34
3rd level Param. Group Supervision xx/yy 6304 ISOL ST 1/1 >old isolator status 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

1st level

2nd level

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Supervision xx/yy 6302 ISOL Malfunct alarm only Supervision xx/yy 6316 I> MAN TRIP #.##I/In Osc.Fault Rec. xx/yy 6404 MAX. LENGTH >#.##s Osc.Fault Rec. xx/yy 6405 PRE.TRIG.TIME >#.##s Osc.Fault Rec. xx/yy 6406 POST REC TIME >#.##s Osc.Fault Rec. xx/yy 6407 BinIn CAPT. TIME >#.##s

Main Menu

Parameter

Navigation Tree - Central Unit

399

Table A-34
3rd level BU >BU01 ... BUnn -> xx BUxx xx12 Bay status >out of service xx/yy -> xx 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

400
SETUP/EXTRAS >Date/Time Clock Setup Serial Ports Device # MLFB/Version Contrast Date/Time Status: -- NS ER ST >DD.MM.YYY hh:mm:ss Diff. time:-------xx/yy -> x -> x -> x -> x -> x -> x CLOCK SETUP Source Error Time Offset xx/yy >T103 >100min >2min Serial Ports >PC port System port Service port xx/yy -> x -> x -> x PC PORT xx/yy Phys.Addr. >254 Baud rate>19200Baud Parity >8E1 Gaps >#.##s SYSTEM PORT >IEC 60870-5-103 ->x SERVICE PORT xx/yy Phys.Addr. >254 Baud rate>19200Baud Parity >8E1 Gaps >#.##s

Appendix

1st level

2nd level

Main Menu

Parameter

6th level for SYSTEM PORT

IEC 60870-5-103xx/yy Phys.Addr. >254 Baud rate>19200Baud Parity >8E1 Gaps >#.##s OFF-Sig. Light>off

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Table A-34
3rd level 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

1st level

2nd level

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Setup/Extras xxxx DEVICE # Device # MLFB/VERSION xx/yy MLFB:7SS5220-5FA31 1AA0 LB-No.: ######### Firmware: V##.##.## Bootsystem:V##.##.## P-Set: V##.##.## CONTRAST Device reset ... TEST Enable TEST Enable >OFF

Main Menu

Parameter

TEST/DIAGNOSIS xx/yy >Device reset x Test Enable -> x Blk Data Trans-> x Hardware Test -> x Osc.Fault Rec.-> x Set/Reset -> x SIEMENS Intern x

Navigation Tree - Central Unit

401

Table A-34
3rd level BLK DATA TRANS Blk Data Trans >OFF 4th level 5th level

Navigation tree of the central unit

402
Hardware Test HWTestMod >OFF Osc.Fault Rec. FltRecSta >ON Set/Reset xx/yy >Event Log x TRIP log x Reset Id-Block x Reset IsoMalBl x

Appendix

1st level

2nd level

Main Menu

Test/Diagnosis

4 Fault

Device TRIP Transf. TRIP M

5 Startup

SIPROTEC 7SS5220-5FA31 1AA0 Firmware: V##.##.## Bootsystem:V##.##.##

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Navigation Tree of the Bay Unit

A.19 Navigation Tree of the Bay Unit

The following navigation tree gives an overview of the parameter blocks and the individual parameters that can be set in the bay units of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 V4 distributed busbar and failure protection.

Figure A-16 Navigation tree of the bay unit

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

403

Appendix

A.20 Abbreviations

AB

BB BF BI BO BSZ1 BSZ2/3 BU BZ CB CBF CFC CU CZ DA EAZ g.a. HW ISOL KOM LED M MLFB PC REL RTC SBK SK ZPS

Auxiliary bus (bus coupler) sections (sections which serve exclusively for longitudinal connection of bus zones and to which no outgoing feeders are connected) Busbar protection Breaker Failure Binary input Binary output Processing board for protection in the check zone Processing boards for protection in the selective zones Bay unit Bus zone Circuit Breaker Breaker failure protection Continuous Function Chart Central unit Check zone Direct address Input/output module group alarm Hardware Isolator Communication board used for operation Light emitting diode Measurement Coded ordering numbers Personal computer Relay Real Time Clock Control-operation-interface board Serial link board Central processor board of protection

404

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

References

A.21 References
/1/ /2/ /3/ /4/ /5/ /6/ SIPROTEC 4, System Description E50417-H1176-C151-A4 SIPROTEC DIGSI 4, Start-Up E50417-G1176-C152-A3 DIGSI CFC, Manual E50417-H1176-C098-A6 SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual E50417-H1176-C070-A3 Ethernet & IEC 61850 Start UP E50417-F1100-C324-A1 SIPROTEC Distributed Busbar/Breaker Failure Protection IEC 61850 PIXIT C53000-G1176-C180-1

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

405

Appendix

406

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Index
A
Abbreviations 404 Additional support iv Algorithm 100 Annunciation buffer deleting 224 Applications 4 Assigning Bay Units 61 Auxiliary voltage supply failure 145 2-bay coupler 103 without circuit breaker 104 Busbar coupling via isolators 145 Busbar protection 92 Evaluation of half-cycles 96

C
Central unit 8MF cubicle 17 Communication module (D-CPU) 16 Fiber-optic module (LMZ) 17 I/O module (EAZ) 16 jumpers ZPS module 340 Power supply module (SV) 16 Processor modules (ZPS) 16 Subrack ES902 C (SIPAC) 17 Terminal blocks 17 Wall-mounted housing 17 Chapter 203 Characteristic Earth fault 96 Normal load line 95 Check Differential current supervision 275 Overcurrent threshold 277 Trip characteristic 271 Check zone 111 Checks Auxiliary power supply 285 Delay Time at operating mode "Unbalancing" and "I>Query" 278 Differential current supervision delay time 276 Differential current supervision of bus zone-selective protection 275 Differential current supervision of check zone 276 Final 280 Overcurrent threshold 277 Primary values 279 Secondary values 270 Transfomer polarity 279 Trip characteristic check zone 273 Trip characteristic for operating mode "Unbalancing" 277 Trip characteristic of a bus zone-selective protection 271

B
Battery 294 Bay unit Annunciations binary inputs/outputs 384 Annunciations LC display 384 Annunciations PC 384 Cubicle mounting 21 Indications binary inputs/outputs 383 Indications LC display 383 Jumper settings of the EFE module 350, 352 Jumper settings of the PFE module 346, 347 Jumper settings of the SAF module 348, 349 jumpers PFE module 346, 347 Panel flush mounting 21 Panel surface mounting 21 PC indications 383 Bay unit failure 140 Blocking the breaker failure protection 222 TRIP command 219 Zone-selective 139 Bonding power failure 14 Breaker failure protection 113 2-stage 118 Busbar short-circuit 124 External 122 Initiation by feeder protection 118 Operating mode 118 Release 116 Triggering 116 Buffer 230, 264, 267 Bus coupler circuit breaker 125 Bus coupler variants 1-bay coupler 103 2-bay bus couple 107 2-bay bus coupler 106, 107

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-14

407

Index

Circuit breaker Checks 227 Not ready 125 CLOSE command Detection 136 Commissioning 252 Commissioning tool 254 Concluding the configuration concluding 79 Configuration Notes 81 1-bay bus coupler 86 CT location 87 CTs 86 Hardware design 86 Isolator 86 Reserve bays 86 Sectionalizing isolator 86 Station configuration 86 Configuration notes Transformer polarity 89 Configuring the Substation 49 Connecting Dynamic Elements to the Busbars 57 Connection diagrams 334 Connection method 27 Connectors 251 Control voltage 31 Controlling device functions 218 Creating a Project 46 Creating Typicals creating 59 Current transfomer polarity 279 Current transformers Bus-side 132 Line-side 132

Data for selection 328 DCF77 75, 76 Defining Bays 54 Deleting event buffer 225 Dimensions Bay unit 322 Central unit 319 Double leaf-spring-crimp contacts 26 Drawing Busbars 52 D-SUB female connectors 27, 28

E
Electrical tests 313 EMC tests 313

F
Failures Communication 287 Fault analysis 284 Fault location options 210 fault recording 218 Features 5 Binary inputs 10 Breaker failure protection 8 Busbar protection 6 Clock control 12 End fault protection 9 Event buffer 12 Fault recording 10 Isolator replica 9 LEDs 10 Measuring functions 11 Overcurrent protection 9 Relays 10 Self-monitoring 12 Testing functions 11 Trip output 9 Trip reset 9 Feeder short-circuit 118 Feeder shutdown 236 Fibre optic cables 332 Fine-wire fuse Replacing 297 FO connections 27

D
Data Alarm contacts 304 Analog inputs and outputs 303 Auxiliary functions 311 Binary inputs 304 Breaker failure protection 308 Busbar protection 307 Climatic stress tests 316 Design versions 317 General 302 Light emitting diodes 305 Mechanical tests 315 Operation, displays 305 Overcurrent protection 309 Rated auxiliary voltage 303 Serial interfaces 306 Service conditions 317 Trip contacts 305 User-configurable functions (CFC) 312 Data for ordering 328

G I

Group alarms central unit 378, 382 Idle state of fibre optic connection 72 Information Catalog 65 Initial values 99 Inserting bay units 47 Inserting Dynamic Elements 55 Inserting static text 59

408

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-14

Index

Inserting the central unit 47 Inserting Typicals inserting 59 Installing the bay unit Cubicle mounting 247 Panel flush mounting 247 Panel surface mounting 247 Installing the central unit Cubicle mounting 246 Panel flush mounting 246 Panel surface mounting 246 Instructions and warnings iv Insulation tests 313 IRIG B 75, 76, 233 Isolator replica Auxiliary voltage supply failure 145 Busbar coupling 145 Isolator running status 145 Transfer busbars 105 Wire break 145 Isolator running status 145 Isolator status in case of wire break 145

Memory 142 Release of the breaker failure protection 117 Trip output 142 Zero current 144

N
Navigation tree BU 403 CU 393

O
Operating mode I> query 121 Low-current 122 Pulse mode 123 TRIP repetition/I> query: 121 TRIP repetition/Unbalancing 122 Operational events 208 Evaluation 284 Oscillographic fault recording 158 Output relays 207 Overall 2 Overall Operation Bay units 2 Central unit 2 Overcurrent protection 185 Definite-time 187 Inverse-time 187

L
LEDs 207 Line disconnector Isolator states 102 Linearised current transformers 144 List of information 362

P
Parameter listing Bay unit 357 Central unit 355 Parameters AUT LED ACK 170 B.U.CBF-I 200 B.U.CBF-T 200 BackUp CBF 200 Bay status 171, 174 BF BI MODE 126 BF I< 127 BF OP MODE 126 BinIn CAPT.TIME 159 BLOCKING MODE 152 CHARAC. E 181 CHARAC. PH 181 CHARACTER. 188, 190 CT STARPNT 183 CTRL REL BU 169 DIF SUP mode BZ 152 DIF SUP mode CZ 153 DIFF SUPERV 152 EF charact. switchover 114 End Fault Prot 137 fault rec mode 159 FREQUENCY 164, 181

M
Maintenance 282 Manual Aim iii Scope of validity iii Target audience iii Marshalling 63, 384 binary outputs 63 Changing allocations 65 Changing the view 64 Inserting information items 65 LED indicators 63 Opening the Configuration Matrix 64 Measured value list 383 Measuring method 100 MLFB see ordering information 291 Monitor mode 290 Monitoring Battery 142 Cyclic test 143 Differential current 143 External current transformer circuits 143 in maintenance mode 142 Isolator 142 Measured value errors 140

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-14

409

Index

I< MAN TRIP 170 I> 188 I> BF 114 I> BF.EF 114 I> TRIP 170 I>> 187 I>ZERO CR 153 Id> BZ 108 Id> BZ - EF 109 Id> CZ 109 Id> CZ - EF 109 Id> SUPERV BZ 152 Id> SUPERV CZ 152 IE> 190 IE>> 189 IEp 190 INITIATION 179 Ip 188 Is< BF - EF 115 Is< BZ - EF 109 Is< CZ - EF 110 ISOL DC FAIL 153 ISOL Malfunct 154 ISOL RUN TIME 153 ISOL ST 1/1 154 LANGUAGE 175 Language BU 170 MAN.CLOSE 189, 191 MAX. LENGTH 159 MEAS.REPET. 188, 190 O/C EARTH 189 O/C PHASES 187 OPER.1st L. 175 OPER.2nd L. 175 OPER.3rd L. 175 OPER.4th L. 175 PC BAUDRATE 177 PC INTERF. 177 PC PARITY 177 POST REC. TIME 159 PRE. TRIG. TIME 159 PROT TR BUS 170 RMS FORMAT 189, 191 STAB FAC:BZ 107 STAB FAC:CZ 109 Stab.factor BF 114 T TRIP 184 T-Annunc.1 195 T-Annunc.2 195 T-Annunc.3 195 T-Annunc.4 195 T-BF 2chan 128 T-BF CB fault 128 T-BF I< 128 T-BF IMP 128 T-BF rel sup 128

T-BF-1P 127, 137 T-BF-3P 127, 137 T-BINARY IN 180 T-CB open 137 Test mode SK 170 TI> 188 TI>> 188 T-Idiff SUPERV 152 TIE> 190 TIE>> 189 TIEp 191 TIp 189 T-KEYBOARD 180 T-MAX 179 Tmin TRIP 169 T-POST 180 T-PRE 179 TRIP repetition 127 T-TRIP repeat 128 ZERO CR SUPERV 153 Plant Configuration How to Proceed 49 Plant visualisation 241 ports others 72 Power supply 14 Power System Data 164 Pre-marshalling 385 Project window 46 protocol independent functions 354

R
Read and set the date 231 Reading out annunciations 206 fault data 215 fault events 209 general interrogation 211 measured values 213 spontaneous annunciation 212 Reading out the switch status 241 Reading the date 231 Reading the time 231 References 405 Repacking the units 30 Repair 293 Replacing the buffer battery 294 Reset blocking 229 Revision mode 239

S
Saving the substation chart 60 Screw-type terminals 26 Serial PC ports 71 Serial ports

410

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-14

Index

PC port 71 Service port 71 Setting 70 Setting the date 231 Setting the time 231 Setting values apply 70 Settings BU 346 Settings CU 340 Short-circuit Detection 134 Spontaneous indications 209 Stabilization factor 333 Starting the Plant Configuration Start 50 Startup with defective bay 300 Static 59 Storage 44 Supervisory functions 139 Symbol conventions v

Time format 78 Time Synchronization 75, 80 Training courses iv Transfer busbars 105 Transmission block 269 Transmittig setting values to the device 70 Trigger initial start 230 restart 230 Trip characteristic Unbalancing: 277 TRIP command Minimum duration 165 Overcurrent controlled 167 Troubleshooting 290 Two bay units one coupler 248 Typographic conventions v

U
Unbalancing 121 Unpacking the units 30 Use 4

T
Test System interface 266 Test mode 268, 269 Time delay Unbalancing: 278

W
Web-Monitor 254

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-14

411

Index

412

7SS52 V4 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-14

Corrections To Siemens AG Dept. PTD PA D PSN D-90459 Nrnberg Germany Address: Dear reader, printing errors can never be entirely eliminated: therefore, should you come across any when reading this manual, kindly enter them in this form together with any comments or suggestions for improvement that you may have. Corrections/Suggestions Phone no: Fax no: Company/Dept: From Name:

7SS52 Manual C53000-G1176-C182-1

Subject to technical alteration

Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model Order-no. : C53000-G1176-C182-1 Available from: LZF Frth-Bislohe

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft